Meridian 1

Software Input/Output Guide

X11 Maintenance

Document Number: 553-3001-511

Document Release: Standard 6.0
Date: June 1999

Year Publish FCC TM

© 1995, 1999
All rights reserved

Printed in Canada

Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design
or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules, and the
radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at their own expense.

SL-1 and Meridian 1 are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

X11 Maintenance
Revision history
June 1999
Standard 6.00. This document is up-issued to include updates and changes
required for X11 Release 24.2x.

March 1999
Standard 5.00. This document is up-issued to include updates and changes
required for X11 Release 24.0x.

October 1997
Standard 4.00. This document is up-issued to include updates and changes
required for X11 Release 23.0x.

August 1996
Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to include updates and changes
required for X11 Release 22.0x.

December 1995
Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued to include updates and changes
required for X11 Release 21.1x.

July 1995
Standard 1.00. This document is issued to include updates and changes
required for X11 Release 21.0x. This document has the new NTP number
553-3001-511 and replaces NTP 553-2301-511.

X11 Maintenance
553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999
viii

Page i of viii

Contents
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Format of 553-3001-511 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Communicating with the Meridian 1. . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Accessing the Meridian 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
System memory and disk space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
System Look up Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Multi-User Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Maintenance display codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Time and date of fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Alphabetical List of Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login . . . . . . . . . . 29

LD 01: Template audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic . . . . . . . 37

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Superloop commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Option 11 BRI commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

X11 Maintenance
Page ii of viii Contents

Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console

Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
M2009, M2018 and M2112 Telephone test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
M2006 and M2008 Telephone test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
M2216, M2016S and M2616 Telephone test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
M2317 Telephone test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
QCW-type Attendant Console test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
M1250 Console test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
M1250 Console test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
M2250 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

LD 32: Network and Peripheral Equipment

Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Superloop commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ISDN BRI MISP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Option 11 BRI MISP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Option 11 BRI SILC/UILC commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ISDN BRI BRSC commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic for 1.5 Mb/s

RPE and Fibre Remote IPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1.5 Mb/s RPE diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fibre Remote IPE diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Contents Page iii of viii

Basic commands for 1.5 Mb/s RPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Basic commands for Fibre Remote IPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver

Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

LD 35: Common Equipment Diagnostic. . . . . . . . . 173

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

LDs 36, 41: Trunk Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Basic commands (LD 36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Basic commands (LD 41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

LD 37: Input/Output Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . 201

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

X11 Maintenance
Page iv of viii Contents

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System Clock

Generator Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

LDs 40, 42: Call Detail Recording Diagnostic . . . . 211

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

LD 43: Equipment Datadump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Option 11 ROM selection for SYSLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Option 11/11E commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Option 11C commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

LD 44: Software Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching

Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command . . . . . . . . . 236
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
XCON sub-prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

LD 46: Multifrequency Sender Diagnostic for

Automatic Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

LD 48: Link Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Contents Page v of viii

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

ACD High speed and low speed link commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
ACD High speed and low speed link monitor commands . . . . . . . . . . 264
AML commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
AML over Ethernet (ELAN) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
AML/CSL monitor commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
APL monitor commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
CSL commands (X11 Release 17 and earlier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ISDN BRI monitor commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Single Terminal Access (STA) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

LD 51: Intercept Computer Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic . . . . . 313

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate

Interface Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Basic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

X11 Maintenance
Page vi of viii Contents

LD 61: Message Waiting Lamps Reset . . . . . . . . . 339

LD 62: 1.5 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment

Local End Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

LD 66: Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

LD 77: Manual Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Basic commands (Release 15 & later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

LD 80: Call Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Originating and terminating information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Option 11 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

LD 92: Automatic Trunk Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 383

Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

D-channel commands (pre-Release 18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
D-channel commands (Release 18 & later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Contents Page vii of viii

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Multipurpose Serial Data Link D-channel commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management . . . . . . . 421

New Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
New Alarm Management Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Object Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Alphabetical list of Administration commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Alphabetical list of Maintenance Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

LD 135: Core Common Equipment Diagnostic . . . 441

Adding a group to an option 51C/61C/81/81C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Removing a group from an option 51C/61C/81/81C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Basic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Option 11C commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . 455

Basic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Option 11C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and

Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Basic commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Alphabetical list of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

X11 Maintenance
Page viii of viii Contents

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

6

Page 1 of 472

General
This Northern Telecom Publication (NTP) documents Meridian 1 commands
which may be input to:

• view and print status of switch information

• perform background tests
• disable, enable and test system hardware (e.g. a particular phone)

This NTP is applicable to Meridian 1 and Meridian SL-1 switches equipped

with Generic X11 (Release 24) software.

When a data administrator loads a Maintenance overlay into memory on a

Terminal, the administrator may then type in any command documented in
that overlay. The Meridian 1 responds to command entries either by changing
the status of hardware or by presenting information on the Terminal. (The
term “overlay” is synonymous with the terms “load” and “overlay program”.)

A list of available Feature Packages appears in this NTP. An alphabetical

listing (sorted by Package mnemonic) of Feature Packages can be found on
page 19.

X11 Maintenance
Page 2 of 472 General

Format of 553-3001-511
This NTP presents only maintenance overlays and text supplementary to
these overlays. Overlay programs are identified by LD XX or LD XXX (for
Options 11C, 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C) where XX or XXX is the overlay
number. Maintenance overlays are arranged in numerical order and appear in
this NTP as separate modules.

Two general tables appear in each Load. The first general table is titled
“Basic commands”. It appears at the front of each load and often follows
introductory text. The second general table concludes each Maintenance
Load and is titled “Alphabetical list of commands”.

The Basic commands Table

This table presents an abbreviated listing of that load’s entire command
selection. A brief description of the command is presented beside each
command.

Shown below is an excerpt from a “Basic commands” table:

CDSP Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to ....

CMIN ALL Resets minor alarm indication on attendant consoles ...
CMIN c Resets minor alarm indication on attendant consoles ...

Note that in a Basic commands table:

a There are no column headings.
b The list is always arranged in alphabetical order.
c The corresponding comment is typically brief.
“Basic commands” tables present in less detail all entries in the “Alphabetical
list of commands” table.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 General Page 3 of 472

The Alphabetical list of commands Table

This table provides a more detailed description of a given command. Shown
below is an excerpt from an Alphabetical list of commands table:

Command Description Pack/Rel

DISI loop c Disable carrier c on RPE loop when idle. rpe-1

The number of channels still busy on the carrier
may be checked using the STAT command. The
message ...

Note that in an Alphabetical list of commands table:

a The description is often expansive.
b The package and release column provides the mnemonic of the
package that must be equipped on the switch in order to receive this
prompt. (In this example, the “rpe” package must be equipped to
enter the DISI loop c command.) The number following the hyphen
(“1” in this example) denotes the Release of software in which the
package was made available.

X11 Maintenance
Page 4 of 472 General

Notational conventions
1 The TTY used for data administration should be set to UPPERCASE
input since the Meridian 1 does not normally accept lowercase. However,
the exceptions to this rule are:
• Both upper and lower case input is permitted with Options 11C,
51C, 61C, 81 and 81C.

• In LD 95, “NAME” may be entered in lowercase.

2 Lowercase variables are used in this book to represent many possible
responses. The following table lists a few key variables which appear
throughout this NTP:

Variable Meaning

aa Text string
aaa bbb Alphabetic or alphanumeric characters
c Customer Number (0-99)
c (u) Option 11 Terminal Number (TN) Card, Unit; where unit is optional
cu Option 11 Terminal Number (TN) Card and Unit
c00u Terminal Number (TN) for Option 11. A TN consists of a card, two filler digits,
and a unit.
dn Directory Number (DN)
hh mm Hours (0 - 23) and Minutes (00 - 59)
loop Network Loop Number (0-159)
l s c (u) Terminal Number (TN), Loop, Shelf, Card, Unit; where unit is optional
lscu Terminal Number (TN) (loop, shelf, card, and unit number)
mmm Month (JAN - DEC) when used in a date.
nnn xxx Numeric characters
xxx Numeric value (such as a DN)
yy mm dd Year (00 - 99), Month (1 - 12) and Day (1 - 31)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 General Page 5 of 472

3 <cr> denotes that the carriage return key is to be depressed without

inputting any data. The carriage return leaves the existing value
unchanged, or enters the default value if there is no existing value.
4 <space> denotes that the space bar is to be depressed instead of <cr>.

5 <value> denotes a variable value, generally for a prompt response.

For example, <NIPN> is the value responded to the NIPN prompt and
<min> is a minimum value.

6 Default values are shown in parentheses

7 A range of numbers is denoted by giving the lower and upper limits of
the range. For example, given the range 0 - (2) - 3, the user may manually
enter 0, 1, 2, or 3, or carriage return (press <cr>) to enter the default of 2.
8 Default values are shown in brackets in the response column where
applicable. Pressing <cr> enters the default.
9 Where applicable, precede an entry with an X to delete that entry or set
your entry to default value.

X11 Maintenance
Page 6 of 472 General

Related documentation
Feature description
Feature information is provided in the X11 Features and Services NTP.

Operational testing
Information and instruction regarding the testing of features and services for
telephone sets and attendant (ATT) consoles is contained in the X11 Features
and Services NTP.

Administration Overlays
Information regarding Administration overlay programs is provided in NTP
553-3001-311.

Error Messages
Information is provided to interpret and respond to system error messages in
NTP 553-3001-411.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

18

Page 7 of 472

Communicating with the Meridian 1

To communicate with the system, the following input/output devices at either
on-site (local) or remote locations are required:
— TTY or VDT terminal as an input/output device
— RS-232-C compatible printer as an output only device
— Meridian SL-1 maintenance telephone set as an input only device

The input/output system can operate with terminals having the following
characteristics:
— Interface: RS-232-C
— Code: ASCII
— Speed: 110, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 baud
— Loop Current: 20 mA

X11 Maintenance
Page 8 of 472 Communicating with the Meridian 1

Accessing the Meridian 1

Logging in and out
When you access the system through a system terminal, a login procedure is
required (refer to Procedure 1). All system passwords are initially set as 0000,
but you can change passwords through the Configuration Record (LD 17).
See also “Limited Access to Overlays” in the X11 features and services NTP.

Level 1 password. This general password is used in the log in sequence

to provide general access to the system by service personnel. Once the
system is accessed, the service personnel may then perform any
necessary administration or maintenance tasks.
Level 2 password. This administrative password is known and used
only by the data administration manager. The password is used to protect
the system configuration record and is required when using LD 17 to
change either the general or the administrative passwords.
Local and remote access
Input/output terminals may operate either locally or remotely. However, data
modems are required for terminals located more than 50 feet (15 meters) from
the central control interface. Both local and remote terminals interface with
the system through Serial Data Interface (SDI) packs.

Many devices can be installed at local and remote locations. When a system
terminal is installed locally, it is connected directly to a SDI Card. When a
system terminal is installed at a remote location, modems (or data sets) and a
telephone line are required between the terminal and the SDI card. Figure 1 :
Local and remote access to a system terminal shows typical system terminal
configurations.

With X11 release 19 and later, multiple devices can simultaneously

communicate with the Meridian 1 if Multi User Login is enabled. Refer to
X11 system management applications (553-3001-301) for details regarding
the Multi User Login Feature. Prior to Release 19, only one device at a time
could interact with the Meridian 1.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Communicating with the Meridian 1 Page 9 of 472

Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal

Meridian 1

Local access
system terminal

Remote access
system terminal

modem modem

telephone line

553-3000

HOST mode access

A system terminal is connected through an SDI port. SDI ports are defined in
LD 17 and may be configured for different types of outputs. For example, one
terminal may be defined for traffic reports, another for maintenance
messages. Two ports may be defined for the same output; however, prior to
X11 release 17, both ports operate at the speed of the slowest port.

In X11 Release 17, it is possible to log in as a HOST. When in the HOST

mode, the outputs defined for the port are only output to that port. Thus the
port is no longer limited to the speed of the slowest port sharing the output
types. This is useful for applications, such as Meridian Manager, which
require high speed ports. Once the HOST port has logged out, the outputs to
the other ports are restored.

To configure a system terminal, see the “System and limited access

passwords” in the configuration record (LD 17). See also OVL403 and
OVL404 messages, which are output to the ports affected by a HOST log in.

X11 Maintenance
Page 10 of 472 Communicating with the Meridian 1

Line mode interface log in procedure

X11 release 18 introduces Line Mode interface. With Line Mode enabled
(LON), the backspace can be used to edit input. The entered information
(responses, for example) is not processed until the <CR> is entered. When the
Line Mode is disabled (LOF), the system terminal interface operates as it did
prior to X11 release 18.

Procedure 1: Logging in and out

1 Press <cr>
— If the response is : OVL111 nn TTY or OVL111 nn SL-1
That means: Someone else is logged into the system. When they have
logged off, press <cr> and go to Step 2.
— If the response is : OVL111 nn IDLE or OVL111 nn BKGD
That means: You are ready to log into the system. Go to Step 2.
— If the response is: OVL000 >

That means: This is the program identifier which indicates that you are
have already logged into the system. Go to Step 4.
2 Enter : LOGI, then press <cr>
The normal response is : PASS?
If there is any other response, refer to the message text in the System
Error Messages NTP.
3 Enter : Level 1 or Level 2 password and press <cr>.
If the password is correct, the system responds with the prompt: >
4 Load a program by entering : LD XX (where XX represents the overlay
program number). For X11 release 18 and later can use LD 135 or LD
137 (LD xxx) to load an overlay program or LD XX D.
5 Perform tasks
6 End the program by entering : END or ****
7. Always end the log in session with : LOGO
The background routines are then loaded automatically.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Communicating with the Meridian 1 Page 11 of 472

Access through the maintenance telephone

A telephone functions as a maintenance telephone when you define the
class-of-service as MTA (maintenance telephone allowed) in the Multi-line
Telephone Administration program (LD 11). A maintenance telephone
allows you to send commands to the system, but you can only use a subset of
the commands that can be entered from a system terminal.

You can test tones and outpulsing through the maintenance telephone.
Specific commands for those tests are given in the Tone and Digit Switch and
Digitone Receiver Diagnostic (LD 34).

To access the system using the maintenance telephone, see Procedure 2. To

enter commands, press the keys that correspond to the letters and numbers of
the command (for example, to enter LD 42 return, key in 53#42##). Table 2
shows the translation from a keyboard to a dial pad.

The following overlays (LDs) ARE accessible from a maintenance telephone:

30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 45, 46, 60, 61, and 62

The following overlays (LDs) ARE NOT accessible from a maintenance

telephone: 31, 40, 48, 77, 80, 92, 96, 135, 137

Note: To use the maintenance telephone, the loop for that telephone
must be operating.
Table 2 : Translation from keyboard to dial pad
Keyboard Dial pad
1 1
A B C 2 2
D E F 3 3
G H I 4 4
J K L 5 5
M N O 6 6
P R S 7 7
T U V 8 8
W X Y 9 9
0 0
Space or # #
Return ##
* *
Note: There is no equivalent for Q or Z on a dial pad.

X11 Maintenance
Page 12 of 472 Communicating with the Meridian 1

Procedure 2: Access through the maintenance telephone

1 Press the prime DN key.
2 Place the set in maintenance mode by entering : xxxx91
Where: “xxxx” is the customer Special Prefix (SPRE) number. It is
defined in the Customer Data Block and can be printed using LD 21. The
SPRE number is typically “1” (which means you would enter 191).
3 Check for busy tone by entering “return” : ##
— If there is no busy tone, go to Step 4.
— If there is a busy tone, a program is active. To end an active program and
access the system enter : ****

4 Load a program by entering : 53#xx##

Where : "xx" represents the number of the overlay program
5 Perform tasks.
6 To exit the program and return the telephone to call processing mode,
enter : ****

Background routines are then loaded automatically.

Accessing Meridian Mail

Option 11 allows access to Meridian Mail Administration & Maintenance
through a shared terminal on the Option 11. To access the Meridian Mail
system, log in and enter: AX. To exit from Meridian Mail, press the Control
key and the closed square bracket ( ] ) simultaneously.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Communicating with the Meridian 1 Page 13 of 472

System memory and disk space

The following memory information is output when an administration
program is loaded. This information is used to plan the addition of new
features, such as speed call lists, which require memory and disk space.

NT, RT, XT,11C, 51, 51C, 61, 61C, 71, 81, 81C systems
MEM AVAIL: (U/P): pppppp USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrr

or (depending on the total amount of memory)

MEM AVAIL: (U-ppppp1 P-ppppp2): USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrr

ST, 21, STE, 21E systems

UDATA: ppppp1 PDATA: ppppp2

X11 release 17 (for all systems)

DISK RECS AVAIL: xxxxx

Legend :

Element Definition
ppppp1 Amount of unprotected memory available for use (in words)
ppppp2 Amount of protected memory available for use (in words)
ppppp Total memory available for use (ppppp1 + ppppp2) (in words)
qqqqq Total amount of memory used (in words)
rrrrr Total amount of memory (in words)
xxxxx Floppy disk records available for storage of additional data

X11 Maintenance
Page 14 of 472 Communicating with the Meridian 1

Low memory and disk warnings

If the amount of memory or disk space is low, the following messages are
output on the RT, NT, XT, 11C, 51, 51C, 61, 61C, 71, 81, and 81C systems.

WARNING: LOW MEMORY

WARNING: LOW DISK
WARNING: LOW MEMORY/DISK
When these messages appear, (or when the DISK RECS is less than 5, and/or
the available memory is less than 1K words on the ST, STE, 21, or 21E),
avoid performing further administration changes which require more memory
and disk space. These changes may be lost during the next data dump.

When low memory or disk problems occur, a review of system memory is

recommended. Memory may be reclaimed by removing unused features. For
example, the system may have speed call lists which are no longer used and
can be removed.

The low disk warning only occurs in Release 17 and later. In addition, the
Speed Call List program (LD 18) has been enhanced to provide a method of
computing the memory and disk requirements of new lists.

A disk record stores approximately 500 words of protected data store. The
number of disk records depends on the type of floppy disk used:
— 3.5 inch high density floppy = maximum of 1425 records
— 3.5 super density = maximum of 2850 records
— 5.25 inch floppy = maximum of 1140 records

Note 1: Be sure the correct floppy type is defined. See prompts ADAN
and FTYP in LD 17. This does not apply to the Option 81.

Note 2: These messages are not output after sysload until a data dump
is done.

Note 3: These messages are not output for 21, 21E, ST, or STE systems.
In these systems, avoid performing additional changes when disk records
available is below 5, or memory available is below 1K.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Communicating with the Meridian 1 Page 15 of 472

System Look up Messages

On Option 11C, 51C, 61C, 81, or 81C systems equipped with System Errors
and Events Lookup package 245, it is possible to display system messages on
screen. System messages must first be loaded into the switch by entering ERR
<cr>. Specific system messages may then be viewed on screen if the user
enters the desired system error code and <cr>. The following example shows
the data entries necessary to view error message: SCH946.

1 Login to switch
2 PASS (Enter only your password)
3 ERR <cr> (The user must type “ERR” and press return)
4 SCH946 <cr> (The user must type “SCH946” and press return)

The screen will now display the error message corresponding to SCH946. In
this case, that message is:

Invalid User Type

Multi-User Login
Meridian 1 Multi-User Login (MULTI_USER) (package 242) enables up to
three users to log in, load, and execute overlays simultaneously. These three
users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenance terminal. The
multi-user capability increases the efficiency of craftspersons by enabling
them to perform tasks in parallel. To facilitate this operating environment,
Multi-User Login includes significant functionality:

— Database conflict prevention

— Additional user commands
— TTY log files
— TTY directed I/O

X11 Maintenance
Page 16 of 472 Communicating with the Meridian 1

With multiple overlays operating concurrently, there is the potential for a

database conflict if two or more overlays attempt to modify the same data
structure. Multi-User Login software prevents such conflicts. When a user
requests that an overlay be loaded, the software determines if it could pose a
potential conflict with an overlay that is already executing. If no conflict
exists, the requested overlay is loaded. If a conflict does exist, the system
issues the following message:

OVL429-OVERLAY CONFLICT
The user can try again later, or try to load a different overlay.

Multi-User Login also introduces several new user commands. With these
commands, the user has the ability to:

— communicate with other users

— determine who is logged into the system
— halt and resume background and midnight routines
— initiate and terminate terminal monitoring
— change printer output assignment

Changes for X11 release 22

Prior to X11 release 22, the number of Meridian 1 users allowed to login at
the same time was three. For X11 release 22, this number is increased to five.
A second change has also occurred in X11 release 22. Multiuser capability is
now extended to LD 2 and LD 87.

User commands
A user can issue any of the commands listed and described in Table 3, “New
user commands,” on page 17 at the > prompt (after login but with no overlay
executing), or from within an overlay. To issue a command from within an
overlay, precede the command with an exclamation point (!).

For example, to issue the WHO command from within an overlay, type:

!WHO

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Communicating with the Meridian 1 Page 17 of 472

Table 3
New user commands

Command Description

WHO Displays user name, port ID, and overlay loaded for each logged-in
terminal, as well as the user’s MON and SPRT commands (see below).
SEND xx Sends a message to logged-in terminal xx. When the system responds
with a “ SEND MSG: ” prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80
characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is
not written to any log file.
SEND ALL Sends a message to all logged-in terminals. When the system responds
with a “ SEND MSG: ” prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80
characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is
not written to any log file.
SEND OFF Prevents messages sent by other terminals from appearing at the user’s
terminal.
SEND ON Enables messages sent by other terminals to appear at the user’s
terminal.
FORC xx Forces terminal xx to log off (the requesting user must log in with LAPW or
a level 2 password).
HALT Stops background and midnight routines during a login session.
HALT OFF Resumes halted background and midnight routines.
MON xx Initiates monitoring for terminal xx (the requesting user must log in with
LAPW or a level 2 password). The monitored terminal receives a message
at the beginning and end of the monitored period.
MON OFF Turns off the monitor function.
SPRT xx Assigns printer output to port xx.
SPRT OFF Resets printer output assignment.

For more information on Multi-User Login, consult the Management

Applications NTP.

X11 Maintenance
Page 18 of 472 Communicating with the Meridian 1

Maintenance display codes

Maintenance displays are located on the faceplate of certain circuit cards. A
maintenance display code is a one-, two-, or three-digit alphanumeric code
which can indicate the status of the system and identify faulty equipment. For
a detailed definition of these codes, see the section titled “HEX” in the
System Error Messages NTP.

Time and date of fault

The system identifies the time that faults are detected. When a diagnostic
message is output, a timestamp is output within 15 minutes. The format is:
TIMxxx hh:mm dd/mm/yy CPU x
Where: xxx is the system ID

The time, date, and system ID are set in LD 2.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

28

Page 19 of 472

Alphabetical List of Packages

Listed below is a comprehensive alphabetical list of packages which may be
equipped on your Meridian 1.

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

AA Attendant Administration 54 1
AAA Attendant Alternative Answering 174 15
AAB Automatic Answerback 47 1
ABCD 16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone 144 14
ACDA Automatic Call Distribution, Package A 45 1
ACDB Automatic Call Distribution, Package B 41 1
ACDC Automatic Call Distribution Package C 42 1
ACDD Automatic Call Distribution Package D 50 2
ACLI Analog Calling Line Identification 349 24
ACNT Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code 155 13
ACRL AC15 Recall 236 20
ADMINSET Set Based Administration 256 21
ADSP ACD Night Call Forward without Disconnect 289 23
Supervision
AFNA Attendant Forward No Answer 134 14
AINS Automatic Installation (Option 11 only) 200 16
AIOD Automatic ID of Outward Dialing 3 1
ALRM_FILTER Alarm Filtering 243 19
AMP Automated Modem Pooling 78 5
ANI Automatic Number Identification 12 1
ANIR ANI Route Selection 13 1
AOP Attendant Overflow Position 56 1
APL Auxiliary Processor Link 109 10

X11 Maintenance
Page 20 of 472 Alphabetical List of Packages

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

ARDL Automatic Redial 304 22

ARFW Attendant Remote Call Forward 253 20
ARIE Aries Digital Sets 170 14
ATM Automatic Trunk Maintenance 84 7
ATX Autodial Tandem Transfer 258 20
AUXS Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary 114 12
Security
AWU Automatic Wake-Up 102 10
BACD Basic Automatic Call Distribution 40 1
BARS Basic Alternate Route Selection 57 1
BASIC Basic Call Processing 0 1
BAUT Basic Authorization Code 25 1
BGD Background Terminal 99 10
BKI Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer 127 1
BQUE Basic Queuing 28 1
BRI Basic Rate Interface 216 18
BRIL BRI line application 235 18
BRIT ISDN BRI Trunk Access 233 18
BRTE Basic Routing 14 1
BTD Busy Tone Detection Tone 294 21
CAB Charge Account/Authorization Code 24 1
CALL ID Call ID (for AML applications) 247 19
CASM Centralized Attendant Services (Main) 26 1
CASR Centralized Attendant Services (Remote) 27 1
CBC Call-by-Call Service 117 13
CCB Collect Call Blocking 290 21
CCDR Calling line Identification in Call Detail Recording 118 13
CCOS Controlled Class Of Service 81 7
CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan 59 1
CDR Call Detail Recording 4 1
CDRE Call Detail Recording Expansion (7 digit) 151 13
CDRQ ACD CDR Queue Record 83 3
CDRX Call Detail Recording Enhancement 259 20
CHG Charge Account for CDR 23 1
CHINA China Attendant Monitor Package 285 21

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Alphabetical List of Packages Page 21 of 472

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

CHTL China Toll Package 292 21

CISMFS Commonwealth of Independent States 326 23
Multifrequency Shuttle Signalling
CIST Commonwealth of Independent States - Trunk 221 21
CLNK Call Detail Recording, Data Link 6 1
CMAC N/W Communications Management Center 30 1
CNAME Calling Name Delivery 333 23
CNUMB Calling Number Delivery 332 23
COOP Console Operations 169 14
CORENET Core Network Module 299 21
CPCI Called Party Control on Internal Calls 310 22
CPGS Console Presentation Group 172 15
CPIO Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81) 298 21
CPND Calling Party Name Display 95 10
CPP Calling Party Privacy 301 21
CPRK Call Park 33 2
CPRKNET Call Park Networkwide 306 22
CSL Command Status Link 77 8
CSLA CSL with Alpha Signalling 85 8
CTY Call Detail Recording on Teletype Terminal 5 1
CUST Multiple-Customer Operation 2 1
CWNT Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911) 225 19
DASS2 Digital Access Signaling System 2 124 16
DBA Data Buffering and Access 351 24
DCON M2250 Attendant Console 140 15
DCP Directed Call Pickup 115 12
DDSP Digit Display 19 1
DHLD Deluxe Hold 71 4
DI Dial Intercom 21 1
DISA Direct Inward System Access 22 1
DKS Digit Key Signaling 180 1
DLDN Departmental Listed Directory Number 76 5
DLT2 M2317 Digital Sets 91 9
DMWI DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication 325 23
DNDG Do-Not-Disturb, Group 16 1

X11 Maintenance
Page 22 of 472 Alphabetical List of Packages

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

DNDI Do-Not-Disturb, Individual 9 1

DNIS Dialed Number Identification System 98 10
DNWK DPNSS Network Services 231 16
DNXP Directory Number Expansion (7 Digit) 150 13
DPNA Direct Private Network Access 250 21
DPNSS189I Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway 284 20
DPNSS Digital Private Network Signaling System 1 123 16
DPNSS_ES DPNSS Enhanced Services 288 21
DRNG Distinctive Ringing 74 4/9
DSET M2000 Digital Sets 88 7
DTI2 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface 129 10
DTD Dial Tone Detector 138 10
DTOT DID to Tie (Japan only) 176 16
EAR Enhanced ACD Routing 214 17
ECCS Enhanced Controlled Class of Service 173 15
ECT Enhanced Call Trace 215 18
EDRG Executive Distinctive Ringing 185 16
EES End-To-End Signaling 10 1
EMUS Enhanced Music 119 12
ENS Enhanced Night Service 133 20
EOVF ACD Enhanced Overflow 178 15
ESA Emergency Services Access 329 23
ESA_CLMP Emergency Services Access Calling Number 331 23
Mapping
ESA_SUPP Emergency Services Access Supplementary 330 23
ETSI_SS Euro Supplementary service 323 22
EURO Euro ISDN 261 20
FAXS HiMail Fax Server 195 18
FCC68 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision 223 17
FCA Forced Charge Account 52 1
FCBQ Flexible Call Back Queuing 61 1
FCDR New Format CDR 234 18
FDID Flexible DID 362 24
FFC Flexible Feature Codes 139 15
FGD Feature Group D 158 17

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Alphabetical List of Packages Page 23 of 472

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

FNP Flexible Numbering Plan 160 14

FRTA French Type Approval 197 15
FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences 125 16
FFCSF Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation) 198 15
FTDS Fast Tone and Digit Switch 87 7
GCM General Call Monitor 344 24
GRP Group Call 48 1
GPRI International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway 167 18
GSCM Global Call Monitoring 344 24
HIST History File 55 1
HOSP Hospitality Management 166 16
HOT Enhanced Hot Line 70 4/10
HSE Hospitality Screen Enhancement 208 17
HVS Meridian Hospitality Voice Service 179 16
IAP3P Integrated Services Digital Network Application 153 13
Module Link for Third Party Vendors
ICDR Internal CDR 108 10
ICP Intercept Computer Interface 143 10
IDA Integrated Digital Access 122 16
IDC Incoming DID Digit Conversion 113 12
IEC Inter-Exchange Carrier 149 13
IMS Integrated Message System 35 2
UST and UMG are part of IMS Package.
INBD International nB+D 255 20
INTR Intercept Treatment 11 1
IPRA International Primary Rate Access 202 15
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network 145 13
ISDN INTL SUP ISDN Supplementary Features 161 14
ISL ISDN signaling Link 147 13
ISPC ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection 313 22
IVR Hold in Queue for IVR 218 18
JDMI Japan Digital Multiplex Interface 136 14
JPN Japan Central Office Trunks 97 9
JTDS Japan Tone and Digit Switch 171 14
JTTC Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee 335 23

X11 Maintenance
Page 24 of 472 Alphabetical List of Packages

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

KD3 Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface 252 20

LAPW Limited Access to Overlays 164 16
L1MF X08 to X11 Gateway 188 15
LLC Line Load Control 105 10
LMAN Automatic Call Distribution Load Management (C2) 43 1
LNK ACDD, Auxiliary Link Processor 51 2
LNR Last Number Redial 90 8
LSCM Local Steering Code Modifications 137 10
LSEL Automatic Line Selection 72 4
MAID Maid Identification 210 17
MASTER Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side 309 22
MAT MAT 5.0 296 22
MC32 Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity 350 24
MCBQ Network callback Queuing 38 2
MCDR Mini CDR 31 1
MCMO Meridian 1 Companion Option 240 19
MCT Malicious Call Trace 107 10
MEET MCDN End to End Transparency 348 24
MFC Multifrequency Compelled Signaling 128 9
MFE Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel 135 10
MINT Message Intercept 163 15
MLIO Multi-Language I/O Package 211 16
MLM Meridian Link Modular Server 209 16
MLMS: Brazilian Brazilian 264 20
MLMS: Chinese Chinese (PRC) 265 20
(PRC)
MLMS: Chinese Chinese (ROC) 266 20
(ROC)
MLMS: Dainish Dainish 267 20
MLMS: Dutch Dutch 268 20
MLMS: Finnish Finnish 269 20
MLMS: Canadian Canadian French 270 20
French
MLMS: European European French 271 20
French

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Alphabetical List of Packages Page 25 of 472

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

MLMS: German German 272 20

MLMS: Italian Italian 273 20
MLMS: Japanese Japanese 274 20
MLMS: Korean Korean 275 20
MLMS: Norwegian Norwegian 276 20
MLMS: Russian Russian 277 20
MLMS: European European Spanish 278 20
Spanish
MLMS: Latin Am. Latin American Spanish 279 20
Spanish
MLMS: Swedish Swedish 280 20
MLWU Multi-Language Wake Up 206 16
MMO M1 Microcellular Option 303 22
MMSN M1 Mobility Multi-Site Networking 314 22
MPH Meridian 1 Packet Handler 248 19
MPO Multi-Party Operations 141 20
MOSR Mobility Server 302 22
MQA Multiple Queue Assignment 297 21
MR PPM/Message Registration 101 10
MSB Make Set Busy 17 1
MSDL Multipurpose Serial Data Link 222 18
MSDL SDI MSDL Serial Data Interface 227 19
MSDL STA MSDL Single Terminal Access 228 19
MULTI_USER Multi-User Login 242 19
MUS Music 44 1
MUSBRD Music Broadcast 328 23
MWC Message Waiting Center 46 1
MWI Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS 219 19
M911 Meridian 911 224 19
NACD Network Automatic Call Distribution 207 15
NARS Network Alternate Route Selection 58 1
NAS Network Attendant Service 159 20
NAUT Network Authorization Code 63 1
NCOS Network Class Of Service 32 1
NFCR New Flexible Code Restriction 49 2

X11 Maintenance
Page 26 of 472 Alphabetical List of Packages

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

NGCC Nortel Symposium Call Center 311 22

NGEN Next Generation Connectivity 324 22
NI2 North America National ISDN Class II Equipment 291 21
NI-2 CBC NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection 334 23
NMCE NGenR2/Meridian Communications Exchange 364 24
Connectivity
NMS Network Message Services 175 16
NSC Network Speed Call 39 2
NSIG Network Signaling 37 2
NTRF Network Traffic Measurements 29 1
NTWK Advanced ISDN Network Services 148 13
NXFR Network Call Transfer 67 3
ODAS Office Data Administration System 20 1
OHOL On Hold On Loudspeaker 196 20
OHQ Off-Hook Queuing 62 1
OOD Optional Outpulsing Delay 79 5
OPAO Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#) 104
OPCB Operator Call Back (China #1) 126 14
OPEN ALARM Open Alarms 315 22
OPTF Optional Features 1 1
ORC_RVQ Remote Virtual Queueing 192 18
OVLP Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO) 184 15
PAGENET Call Page Networkwide 307 22
PAGT Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent 116 12
PBXI 1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface 75 5
PEMD Pulsed E&M (Indonesia, French Colisée) 232 18
PHTN Phantom TN 254 20
PLDN Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL 120 15
PLUGIN Plug-In 366 24
PMSI Property Management System Interface 103 10
POVR Priority Override/Forced Camp-On 186 20
PQUE Network Priority Queuing 60 1
PRA International Primary Rate Access (CO) 146 13
PRI2 2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface 154 14
PXLT Pretranslation 92 8

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Alphabetical List of Packages Page 27 of 472

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

QSIG Q reference signaling point Interface 263 20

QSIG GF QSIG Generic Functional protocol 305 22
QSIG SS QSIG Supplementary service 316 22
RAN Recorded Announcement 7 1
RANBRD Recorded Announcement Broadcast 327 23
RCK Ringing Change Key 193 15
REMOTE_IPE Remote IPE 286
RMS Room Status 100 10
ROA Recorded Overflow Announcement 36 2
RPA Radio Paging 187 15
RPE1.5 1.5 Mbit Remote Peripheral Equipment 15 1
RPE2 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment 165 15
RSDB Resident Debug 82 9
RUSCM Russian Call Monitoring 353 24
RVQ Remote Virtual Queuing 192 18
SACP Semi-Automatic Camp-On 181 15
SAMM Stand-alone Meridian Mail 262 20
SAR Scheduled Access Restrictions 162 20
SCC Tone Detector Special Common Carrier 66 7
SCDR Station Activity Records 251 20
SCI Station Category Indication 80 7
SCMP Station Camp-On 121 20
SECL Series Call 191 15
SLP Station Loop Preemption 106 10
SLST Meridian SL-1 ST Package 96 9
SMS Short Message Service 346 24
SNR Stored Number Redial 64 3
SR Set Relocation 53 1
SSAU Station Specific Authorization Codes 229 19
SS5 500 Set Dial Access to Features 73 4
SS25 2500 Set Features 18 1
SSC System Speed Call 34 2
STA Single Term Access 228 19
SUPP International Supplementary Features 131 9

X11 Maintenance
Page 28 of 472 Alphabetical List of Packages

Mnemonic Feature Name Number Release

SUPV Supervisory Attendant Console 93 8

SVCT Supervisory Console Tones 189 20
SYS_MSG_LKUP System Errors and Events Lookup 245 19
TAD Time and Date 8 1
TAT Trunk AntiTromboning 293 21
TATO Trunk AntiTromboning 312
TBAR Trunk Barring 132 20
TDET Tone Detector 65 7
TENS Multiple-Tenant Service 86 7
TFM Trunk Failure Monitor 182 15
THF Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex) 157 14
TMON Traffic Monitoring 168
TOF Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow 111 10
Queuing
TSET M3000 Digital Sets 89 7
TVS Trunk Verification from Station 110 9.32
TWR1 Tiawan R1 347 24
UIGW Universal ISDN Gateways 283 20
UK United Kingdom 190 16
UWIN Universal Wireless Interactive Networking 345 24
VAWU VIP Auto Wake Up 212 17
VMBA Voice Mailbox Administration 246 19
VNS Virtual Network Services 183 16
XCT0 M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS 204 15
XCT1 M1 Superloop Administration (LD 97) 205 15
XPE Meridian 1 XPE 203 15

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

32

Issued: June 1999

Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 29 of 472

Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login

Overlay loader
The Overlay loader becomes active after the login sequence and password , it
will then accept input commands from the Serial Data Interface Terminals
(SDI) after the “>” prompt (after login but with no overlay executing).

Overlay loader commands (OVL) C-Type Processors

In the system options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C, the operation of the Overlay
loader commands are as follows:

Command Description

ERR Display the last error message given. Only available on systems with
System Errors and Events Lookup package 245 equipped.
ERR x..x Specific system messages are displayed (package 245 required).
Where: x..x = specific error type and number (ex. ERR SCH1001)
LD xxx Load overlay program into the overlay area, then the loaded program
assumes control.
Where: xxx = number of the desired overlay program.
LOF Disable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop
bit).
LOGO Exit overlay loader and Log-off the system.
LON Enable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop
bit).
**** Aborts the current overlay program, allowing another overlay program to
be loaded into the overlay area.

X11 Maintenance
Page 30 of 472 Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login

Overlay loader commands (OVL) Omega Processors

A set of instructions or program used to load the nonresident programs, from
tape or disk. The overlay loader becomes active after the login sequence and
password. It will then accept the following commands from the Serial Data
Interface terminal:

Command Description

DIST Disable the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.
ENLT Enable the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.
LD xx Load overlay programs from tape, disk or cache memory into the overlay
area, then the loaded program assumes control.
Where: xx = number of the desired overlay.
LD xx D Load overlay programs from disk into the overlay area, even if the
program resides in cache memory.
Where:
• xx = number of the desired overlay.
• D = entered as part of command to specify the active disk.
LOGO Exit overlay loader and Log-off the system.
STAT Print the status of the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.
**** Aborts the current overlay program, allowing another overlay program to
be loaded into the overlay area.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login Page 31 of 472

Multi-User Login commands

Multi-User Login enables up to three users to log in, load, and execute
overlay programs simultaneously. These three users are in addition to an
attendant console or maintenane terminal. The Multi-User capeability also
introduces several user commands. With these commands, the user has the
ability to:

— determine who is logged into the system

— communicate with other connected users
— halt and resume background and midnight routines
— initiate and terminate terminal monitoring
— change printer output assignment

Changes for X11 release 22 and later

Prior to X11 release 22, the number of Meridian 1 users allowed to login at
the same time was three. For X11 release 22, this number is increased to five.
A second change has also occurred in X11 release 22. Multiuser capability is
now extended to LD 2 and LD 87.

Multi-User commands
A user can issue any of the commands listed in the following table from
Overlay loader or from within an overlay. Precede the command with an
exclamation point (!) to issue a command from within an overlay.

For example, to issue the WHO command from within an overlay, type:

!
>WHO
> <CR> takes user back to current overlay

X11 Maintenance
Page 32 of 472 Overlay Loader and Multi-User Login

Table 4
Multi-User commands

Command Description

WHO Displays user name, port ID, and overlay loaded for each logged-in
terminal, as well as the user’s MON and SPRT commands (see below).
SEND xx Sends a message to logged-in terminal xx. When the system responds
with a “ SEND MSG: ” prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80
characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is
not written to any log file.
SEND ALL Sends a message to all logged-in terminals. When the system responds
with a “ SEND MSG: ” prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80
characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is
not written to any log file.
SEND OFF Prevents messages sent by other terminals from appearing at the user’s
terminal.
SEND ON Enables messages sent by other terminals to appear at the user’s
terminal.
FORC xx Forces terminal xx to log off (the requesting user must log in with LAPW or
a level 2 password).
HALT Stops background and midnight routines during a login session.
HALT OFF Resumes halted background and midnight routines.
MON xx Initiates monitoring for terminal xx (the requesting user must log in with
LAPW or a level 2 password). The monitored terminal receives a message
at the beginning and end of the monitored period.
MON OFF Turns off the monitor function.
SPRT xx Assigns printer output to port xx.
SPRT OFF Resets printer output assignment.

Note: For complete feature information on Multi-User Login, consult

the Management Applications NTP.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

36

LD 01 LD 01
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 33 of 472

LD 01: Template audit

Templates are used to store data which is common to many telephones. This
includes items such as key functions and Class of Service. The Template
Audit program saves protected memory by eliminating unused or duplicate
telephone templates.

LD 1 also performs the following consistency checks.

User Count Scan

All telephones in the system are scanned to find the total number of users for
a template.

If a template is found to have no users, the entire template is removed with

the warning message 'NO USERS FOUND'. If a template is found to have an
incorrect user count, the correct user count is written to the template, and the
warning message 'USER COUNT LOW' or 'USER COUNT HIGH' is output.
If the user count is accurate, the message 'USER COUNT OK' is output.

Duplicate Template Scan

Each template is checked against every other template for possible
duplication. A template is considered a duplicate of another if all of the
following conditions are met:
— the checksums are the same
— the template lengths and the hunt offsets are the same
— all template entries are the same

If a match is found, the warning message 'DUPLICATE OF xxxx' is output.

A scan is then initiated to locate all users of the current template and move
them to the matched template.

X11 Maintenance
LD 01
Page 34 of 472 Template audit

For each of these users found, the template number in the telephone data
block and the user count is updated. After all of the users of the current
template are moved to the matched template, the current template is removed.

Template Checksum Audit

A checksum is a binary sum of the template length, hunt offset, and template
entries. The checksum is calculated for each template and compared with the
existing template checksum. If the existing checksum is correct, the message
'CHECKSUM OK' is output. Otherwise, the checksum is corrected with the
warning message 'CHECKSUM WRONG'.

Key Lamp Strip Audit

Two checks are made to correct Key Lamp Strip (KLS) corruption. First, the
template length is compared to the number of KLS indicated in the protected
line block. The second check verifies that the last word of the template
reflects a 'NULL' key.

If these checks detect any discrepancies, they are corrected with the warning
message 'CORRUPTED KLS'.

These corrections alter the checksum of the template. This is identified and
corrected by the checksum audit.

Operating parameters
Due to the Real Time impact of this program and the large amount of data
being scanned, the template audit should be run during low traffic hours.

The template audit should not be aborted unless it is critically necessary. If it

does become necessary to interrupt execution of the audit, be aware that the
templates may be corrupted.

If a system initialization occurs during the template audit, the program is

automatically aborted. It should be restarted as soon as possible after this
occurs.

The audit printout only appears on the TTY that requested the template audit
program run.

Template Audit cannot be run as a background task.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 01
Template audit Page 35 of 472

To confirm that extraneous templates have been removed and that all counts
have been corrected to their proper value, re-run the audit program.

A datadump (LD 43) should be run after a template audit is executed.

Sample operation
The audit begins when the program (LD 1) is loaded. All templates are
scanned in the following sequence, beginning with template one:
1 Single line telephones
2 Multi-line telephones

Following is an example of the system information which is generated during

a Template Audit:
TEMPLATE AUDIT
STARTING PBX TEMPLATE SCAN
TEMPLATE 0001 USER COUNT LOW CHECKSUM OK
TEMPLATE 0002 USER COUNT HIGH CHECKSUM OK
TEMPLATE 0003 NO USERS FOUND
•
•
•
STARTING SLl TEMPLATE SCAN
TEMPLATE 0001 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM OK
•
•
•
TEMPLATE 0067 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM WRONG
TEMPLATE 0068 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM OK DUPLICATE
OF 0014
•
TEMPLATE 0082 USER COUNT OK CHECKSUM OK
•
TEMPLATE 0120 USER COUNT OK
TEMPLATE AUDIT COMPLETE

Note: The report does not print out that template inconsistencies have
been corrected.

X11 Maintenance
LD 01
Page 36 of 472 Template audit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

48

LD 30 LD 30
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 37 of 472

LD 30: Network and Signaling Diagnostic

This program is used to maintain Network loops. It may be run in
background, loaded during the daily routines or loaded manually to enter
commands.

Program operation
When invoked automatically by the system, the program performs the
following tests:
— network memory of each enabled network card
— continuity of the speech path to each PE shelf (for enabled loops only)
— signaling channel to each line or trunk card (on enabled loops only)
— signaling channel through each Integrated Services digital line card to
each Digital telephone or data TN
— clock controllers are switched (if either DTI2 or PRI2 are used when
LD 30 is run in midnight mode, clock controllers will not be switched)

For the Integrated Voice Messaging System (IVMS), the program does not
test Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) positions when the positions belong
to IVMS-DN groups.

Digital telephones that pass the signaling test have their date and time updated
to match the system clock.

Any SL-1 telephone or card that fails the signaling test may be disabled by
this program. Use LD 32 to re-enable them.

X11 Maintenance
LD 30
Page 38 of 472 Network and Signaling Diagnostic

If two or more PE cards are disabled on a loop, an NWS101 message is

printed without the associated NWS301 messages to indicate card failures.
However, the shelves that failed are known from the NWS201 messages.
Therefore, the state of the individual cards can be determined by manually
retesting using the SHLF command.

If NWS301 indicates a failure of the Peripheral Buffer or Controller card, the

message may not be correct. Therefore the card should be retested using the
SHLF command.

This program does not test attendant consoles or Automatically Identified

Outward Dialing (AIOD) trunks. Equipment which has been disabled due
either to overload or manual request is not tested.

On Option 11 systems, a continuity test and signaling test on the XPE shelf is
performed when LD 30 is invoked automatically.

How to use LD 30
When invoked manually on systems other than Option 11, the Overlay may
be used to:

— conduct a complete test, as when the program is invoked automatically,

except for switching the clocks
— conduct a test on a specific PE shelf
— get the enable/disable status of network loops
— enable or disable network loops
— clear alarm indications and the maintenance display
— download peripheral software on superloops
— clear contents of the Controller maintenance display
— read contents of the Controller maintenance display

When invoked manually on an Option 11 system, the program may be used

to:

— conduct a complete test, as when the program is invoked automatically,

except for switching the clocks

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 30
Basic commands Page 39 of 472

— clear alarm indications and the maintenance display

— perform a signaling test on a specific card or unit
— perform a continuity test and signaling test on the Option 11 XPE shelf

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to all machines, except Option 11
systems. See the list of Option 11 commands for further information.
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles

DISL loop Disable loop

DISL sl Disable specified superloop.

END Abort current test

ENLL loop Enable network loop
ENLL sl Enable specified superloop.

LDIS List disabled loops

LENL List enabled loops
LOOP loop, ALL Test network memory on one or all loops

SHLF l s Test loop l, shelf s

STAT Get status of all network loops
STAT (loop) Get status of specified loops

TTSM loop x y z Test Time Switch Memory (TSM) of a loop

TTWI loop x y z Test TSM when the timeslot junctor is idle

X11 Maintenance
LD 30
Page 40 of 472 Option 11 commands

Option 11 commands
The following commands are applicable to Option 11 systems:
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles

END Abort current test

TEST Perform a continuity test and signaling test on Option 11 XPE shelf

UNTT c (u) Perform a signaling test on a specified card or unit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 30
Superloop commands Page 41 of 472

Superloop commands
The following commands are used with Controllers (NT8D01) and Network
Cards (NT8D04 or NT8D18).
CPED l s Clear contents of Controller maintenance display on loop l shelf s

DISL loop Disable loop

END Abort current test

ENLL loop (v) Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v

LDIS List disabled loops

LENL List enabled loops
LOOP loop, ALL Test network memory on one or all loops

RPED l s Read contents of the Controller maintenance display

SHLF l s Test loop l, shelf s

STAT Get status of all network loops
STAT (loop) Get status of specified loop

UNTT l s c (u) Do a signaling test on specified card or unit

X11 Maintenance
LD 30
Page 42 of 472 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) commands

Basic Rate Interface (BRI) commands

The following commands are used with Multi-purpose ISDN Signal
Processor (MISP), S/T-Interface Line (SILC), and U-Interface Line (UILC)
cards.
SLFT l s c Invoke self-test on ISDN BRI line card
SLFT l s c type Selftest ISDN BRI line card. The card must be disabled. Response is:
NWS637 selftest passed or NWS632 selftest failed. Where: l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, and type = self-test type (Long or Short)

STEI l s c d Query the Terminal Endpoint Identifiers, and their corresponding USIDs
This command queries the TEIs, and their corresponding USIDs on the
specified DSL with an established D-channel data link layer with the MISP.
Output looks like:
MISP 111
TEI USID
--- ----
nnn nnnn

SLFT loop type Invoke self-test on MISP loop. Where: type = 1 (comprehensive test) or
type = 2 (power on reset)

TEIT l s c d Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7)

Option 11 BRI commands

SLFT card Invoke self-test on ISDN BRI line card.
SLFT card type Invoke self-test on MISP card. Where: type = 1 (comprehensive test) or
type = 2 (power on reset)

TEIT c d Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 30
Alphabetical list of commands Page 43 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMAJ Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power fault basic-1
alarm.

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c.

CPED l s Clear contents of Controller maintenance display on loop l xpe-15

shelf s. This also clears the buffer printed with the command
RPED.

DISL loop Disable loop. basic-1

All calls in progress on this loop are disconnected. Peripheral
cards remain software enabled and no LEDs are lit.

DISL sl Disable specified superloop. basic-21

Active calls on the superloop specified will be disconnected and
line transfer will occur at the remote end.

END Abort current test. If no test is in progress, message NWS002 is basic-1

output.

ENLL loop Enable network loop. basic-1

This enables the network, performs a network memory test and
tests continuity and signaling to all shelves on the loop. If it
passes the test, OK is output. This does not re-enable any
disabled cards on the loop. Use LD 32 ENLS or ENXP
commands or enable each card individually.

When enabling a network loop serving ISDLC cards, the ISDLC

cards must be individually disabled, then re-enabled to ensure
that service is restored to digital telephones. Service may also be
restored to digital telephones by disconnecting and then
reconnecting the telephone's line cord.

X11 Maintenance
LD 30
Page 44 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENLL loop (v) Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v. xpe-15
If version v is not specified, the software downloaded is current
(c) or latest (l) version as defined in LD 97.

ENLL sl Enable specified superloop. basic-21

OK is output if superloop has been enabled. Establishing service
of individual voice-and-data-capable carriers is dependant on the
F/W state of that carrier.

LDIS List disabled loops. Response is: basic-1

• l1, l2, ln: loop is a disabled loop, or
• NONE: if no cards are disabled.

LENL List enabled loops. Response is: basic-1

• l1, l2, ln: l is an enabled loop, or
• NONE: if no cards are enabled.

LOOP loop, ALL

Test network memory on one or all loops. basic- 20
Performs a network memory test, continuity test and signaling
test on the specified loop, which can be either a value from 0 to
159 or ALL. If ALL is specified, every loop currently enabled is
tested. All shelves on each loop are tested (except for attendant
consoles). If no errors are detected, OK is output.
With X11 Release 20 and later, this command is used for XOPS
cards. Out-of-Service units are not tested when this command is
used. The range for units is 0-31, but only 0-7 are allowed on the
XOPS card.

RPED l s Read contents of the Controller maintenance display. xpe-15

This command lists the current and last 15 clock tracking states
of the NT8D01 Controller. The tracking is indicated on the
Controller maintenance display. The possible tracking modes
are:
C0 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 0.
C1 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 1.
C2 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 2.
C3 = Controller is tracking to the network connected to port 3.
CF = Controller is not tracking any network.
See HEX messages for the interpretation of Controller
maintenance display codes.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 30
Alphabetical list of commands Page 45 of 472

SHLF l s Test loop l, shelf s. basic- 20

Performs a network memory test, continuity test and signaling
test only on loop l shelf s. All line cards, idle trunk cards (except
AIOD trunks) and idle SL-1 telephones are tested. If no errors
are detected, OK is output.
With X11 Release 20 and later, this command is used for XOPS
cards. Out-of-service units are not tested when this command is
used.

SLFT card Invoke self-test for ISDN BRI line card. The card must be bri-18
disabled. Response is:
NWS632 self-test failed or NWS637 self-test passed
(Option 11 only)

SLFT l s c Invoke self-test for ISDN BRI line card. The card must be bri-18
disabled.

SLFT l s c type rsc/bri-19

Self-test ISDN BRI line card. The card must be disabled.
Response is:
NWS637 selftest passed, or NWS632 selftest failed, where:
• l = loop
• s = shelf
• c = card
• type = self-test type (Long or Short)

SLFT card type bri-18

Invoke self-test for MISP card on Option 11. The comprehensive
test is run automatically when the MISP is enabled. The card
must be disabled. Response is:
NWS632 self-test failed, or NWS637 self-test
passed
type = 1 (comprehensive), or type = 2 (power-on-reset)

SLFT loop type bri-18

X11 Maintenance
LD 30
Page 46 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Invoke self-test for MISP card.

The comprehensive test is run automatically when the MISP is
enabled. The card must be disabled. Response is:
NWS632 self-test failed or NWS637 self-test
passed
• type = 1 (comprehensive), or
• type = 2 (power-on-reset)

STAT Gives status of network loops (circuits), indicating how many are basic-1
enabled and how many are disabled.
Response is: x ENBL, y DSBL

STAT loop Get status of a network loop. basic-1

Response is one of the following:
1. UNEQ = loop is unequipped.
2. DSBL: RESPONDING = loop is disabled and the Network
card is responding. The loop may have been disabled
because of:
a DISL command
b associated Peripheral Signaling (PS) card is disabled
c overload condition on associated loop. In this case an
OVD message is output. An attempt to enable the loop
may result in a recurrence of the overload.
3. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = loop is disabled and the
Network card is not responding. The card is missing,
disabled by the faceplate switch or is faulty.
4. x BUSY, y DSBL = loop is enabled with x channels busy,
y channels disabled.
5. CTYF l1, l2... = loop specified in the STAT command
cannot receive speech from one or more loops (l1, l2). This
usually indicates the LD 30 continuity test failed. Probable
fault is the network card.

STEI l s c d Query the Terminal Endpoint Identifiers, and their corresponding brsc-19
USIDs

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 30
Alphabetical list of commands Page 47 of 472

This command queries the TEIs, and their corresponding USIDs

on the specified DSL with an established D-channel data link
layer with the MISP. Output looks like:
MISP 111
TEI USID
--- ----
nnn nnnn

TEIT c d Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7) on bri-18

Option 11.
This test is carried out on a single specified DSL interface. It
checks the existence of the defined TEIs and any possible
duplication of TEIs. Duplicate TEIs are removed by the layer 2
task on the MISP.

TEIT l s c d Perform TEI check on Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7). bri-18

This test is carried out on a single specified DSL interface. It
checks the existence of the defined TEIs and any possible
duplication of TEIs. Duplicate TEIs are removed by the layer 2
task on the MISP.

TEST Perform a continuity test and signaling test on Option 11 XPE basic-1
shelf.

TTSM loop x y z basic-1

Test Time Switch Memory (TSM) of a loop.
Tests the Time Switch Memory (TSM) of the network card.
Where:
loop = the network loop that may have a faulty TSM.
x= the network loop of the transmitting party.
y= the junctor used on the transmitting side of the call. Its
value has a range of 0 to 7, unless the two loops are in
the same group, in which case the junctor value to be
entered is 15.
z= the timeslot used on the transmitting side of the call. Its
value has a range of 2 to 31.
The values normally used in this command are the same values
that appeared in the ERR3036 or ERR3037 message during call
processing.

TTWI loop x y z basic-1

X11 Maintenance
LD 30
Page 48 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Test TSM when the timeslot junctors are idle. The command is
usually used if error message NWS800 is output in response to
TTSM.
Where:
loop = the network loop that may have a faulty TSM.
x= the loop ID (range 0 to 159) of the transmitting party.
y= the junctor used on the transmitting side of the call. Its
value has a range of 0 to 7, unless the two loops are in
the same group, in which case the junctor value to be
entered is 15.
z= the timeslot (2-31) used on the transmitting side of the
call.
This command waits for the timeslot z and junctor y to become
available and will then execute the command.

UNTT c (u) Do a signaling test on specified card or unit on Option 11 xpe- 20

UNTT l s c (u) Do a signaling test on specified card or unit. This command xpe- 20
applies only to superloops.
With X11 Release 20 and later, this command is used for XOPS
cards. Out-of-service units are not tested when this command is
used. The range for units is 0-31, but only 0-7 are allowed on the
XOPS card.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

96

LD 31 LD 31
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 49 of 472

LD 31: Telephone and Attendant Console

Diagnostic
This program tests the keys and lamps of telephone sets and attendant
consoles. The tests consist of pressing keys on a telephone and checking for
the correct response. This diagnostic cannot be used for testing the
DISPLAYPHONE 1200, or M3000.

After loading the program, any telephone in the system may invoke the test
by dialing SPRE 92, (SPRE is the Special Service Prefix Code for the
customer). No further inputs from the TTY are needed. If commands are
input, the system responds with TRM001 indicating an invalid command.

To start the test:

1 Load program 31.
2 Dial SPRE 92 from the telephone to be tested.
3 Perform the steps given in the appropriate Table. The expected responses
for LCD lamps, displays and tones are given. Each key need only be
operated momentarily.

The volume keys (VOL UP and VOL DOWN) have eight levels. The level is
adjusted by operating a key once for a change in one level. These keys control
the audible level for ring volume, buzz volume and speech/tone volume.

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 50 of 472 Telephone and Attendant Console Diagnostic

Note 1: When enabling a network loop with ISDLC packs, the ISDLC
packs must be individually disabled and then re-enabled to restore
service to digital telephones. Service may also be restored to digital
telephones by disconnecting then reconnecting the telephone's line cord.

Note 2: Terminal diagnostics are provided by the M3000 itself. Refer to

Meridian M3000 Description, Installation, Operation & Maintenance
(553-2201-115).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test Page 51 of 472

SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

The SL-1 and M1109 key and lamp layout is shown in Figure 2. The test is
provided in Table 5.

Figure 2
SL-1 and M1109 Key and Lamp Layout

9 9 9
DIGIT DISPLAY

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

* 0
#

VOL VOL
UP DOWN HOLD 0 0 0
(Strip A) (Strip B) (Strip B)

SL-1 Telephone QMT1 (single strip) or

QMT2 (double strip)
(maximum 60 keys)

RLS HOLD 8

1 2 3 6
5
4 5 6
4
7 8 9 3
2
* 0
#
1
0
Volume

M1109 Telephone 553-1108

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 52 of 472 SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

After dialing the SPRE code 92 the SL-1 telephone shows all LEDs lit and the
display shows all 8's. For the M1109 press the “*” key first.

Note 1: If a lamp field array module exists on an SL-1 telephone, the

following responses are included: * Key — All lamps on, # Key— All
lamps off, Strip A Key 0 — Diagonal test pattern. (72).

Note 2: Response shown is for a 16-digit display. For an 8-digit display,

only the last eight characters of each response are shown.
Table 5
SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

1 Handset off-hook All LEDs flash blank display

2 Handset on-hook All LEDs fast flash blank display
3 Handset off-hook All LEDs lit 8888888888888888
4 Handset on-hook All LEDs off blank display
5 Handset on-hook All LEDs off
6 Dial Pad key 1 LED A0 lit 1
7 Dial Pad key 2 LED A1 lit 12
8 Dial Pad key 3 LED A2 lit 123
9 Dial Pad key 4 LED A3 lit 1234
10 Dial Pad key 5 LED A4 lit 12345
11 Dial Pad key 6 LED A5 lit 123456
12 Dial Pad key 7 LED A6 lit 1234567
13 Dial Pad key 8 LED A7 lit 12345678
14 Dial Pad key 9 LEDs A0 & A7 lit 123456789
15 Dial Pad key 0 LEDs A1 & A7 lit 1234567890
16 Dial Pad key * All LEDs lit 8888888888888888
17 Dial Pad key # All LEDs off blank display
18 Strip A key 0 LED A0 lit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test Page 53 of 472

Table 5
SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

19 Strip A key 1 LED A1 lit

20 Strip A key 2 LED A2 lit
21 Strip A key 3 LED A3 lit
22 Strip A key 4 LED A4 lit
23 Strip A key 5 LED A5 lit
24 Strip A key 6 LED A6 lit
25 Strip A key 7 LED A7 lit
26 Strip A key 8 LEDs A0 & A7 lit
27 Strip A key 9 (SL-1) LEDs A1 & A7 lit
28 RLS key (M1109) LEDs A1 & A7 lit
29 Strip B key 0 LED B0 lit
30 Strip B key 1 LED B1 lit
31 Strip B key 2 LED B2 lit
32 Strip B key 3 LED B3 lit
33 Strip B key 4 LED B4 lit
34 Strip B key 5 LED B5 lit
35 Strip B key 6 LED B6 lit
36 Strip B key 7 LED B7 lit
37 Strip B key 8 LEDs B0 & B7 lit
38 Strip B key 9 LEDs B1 & B7 lit
Note: If 10-key or 20-key add-on modules are equipped, repeat steps 29 to 38 for each key/lamp strip on
each module before proceeding.
39 HLD key LEDs, A0 to A4 lit Dial tone
40 Handset off-hook All LEDs flash Dial tone from handset only
41 Handset on-hook All LEDs fast flash Dial tone from speaker
42 Vol Up key LEDs A5 to A7 lit Volume up
43 Vol Down key LEDs A5 to A7 off Volume down

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 54 of 472 SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

Table 5
SL-1 and M1109 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

44 HLD key LEDs A0 to A4 lit Buzzer

45 HLD key End of test

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2009, M2018 and M2112 Telephone test Page 55 of 472

M2009, M2018 and M2112 Telephone test

The M2000 key and lamp layout is shown in Figure 3. The test is provided in
Table 6.

Figure 3
M2000 Series Digital Telephone Key and LCD Layout

17 11
16 10
15 9

14 8 11 8 8
13 7 10 7 7
12 6 9 6 6

RLS Hold 5 RLS Hold 5 RLS Hold 5

4 4 4
1 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 2 7 8 9 2 7 8 9 2
* 0 # 1 * 0 # 1 * 0 # 1
0 0 0

M2018 M2112 M2009

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 56 of 472 M2009, M2018 and M2112 Telephone test

M2009, M2018, and M2112 Telephone test

After dialing the SPRE code 92, the M2009 telephone shows all LEDs lit and
the display shows all 8's. For the M2018 and M2112, press the “*” key first.

Table 6
M2009, M2018, and M2112 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

1 Handset off-hook All LCDs flash blank display

2 Handset on-hook All LCDs fast flash blank display
3 Handset off-hook All LCDs lit blank display
4 Handset on-hook All LCDs off blank display
5 Dial Pad key 1 LCD 0 lit 1
6 Dial Pad key 2 LCD 1 lit 12
7 Dial Pad key 3 LCD 2 lit 123
8 Dial Pad key 4 LCD 3 lit 1234
9 Dial Pad key 5 LCD 4 lit 12345
10 Dial Pad key 6 LCD 5 lit 123456
11 Dial Pad key 7 LCD 6 lit 1234567
12 Dial Pad key 8 LCD 7 lit 12345678
13 Dial Pad key 9 LCDs 0 & 7 lit 123456789
14 Dial Pad key 0 LCDs 1 & 7 lit 1234567890
15 Dial Pad key * All LCDs lit (except M2112) 8888888888888888
LCD 6 lit (M2112)
16 Dial Pad key # All LCDs off (except M2112) blank display
Dial Pad key * LCD 7 lit (M2112)?
17 Fixed key 0 LCD 0 lit
18 Fixed key 1 LCD 1 lit
19 Fixed key 2 LCD 2 lit
20 Fixed key 3 LCD 3 lit
21 Fixed key 4 LCD 4 lit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2009, M2018 and M2112 Telephone test Page 57 of 472

Table 6
M2009, M2018, and M2112 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

22 Fixed key 5 LCD 5 lit

23 Fixed key 6 LCD 6 lit
24 Fixed key 7 LCD 7 lit
25 Fixed key 8 LCD 8 lit
26 Fixed key 9 LCD 9 lit
27 Fixed key 10 LCD 10 lit
28 Fixed key 11 LCD 11 lit
29 Fixed key 12 LCD 12 lit
30 Fixed key 13 LCD 13 lit
31 Fixed key 14 LCD 14 lit
32 Fixed key 15 LCD 15 lit
33 Fixed key 16 LCD 16 lit
34 Fixed key 17 LCD 17 lit
35 HLD key LCDs 0 to 4 lit Dial tone
36 Handset off-hook all LCDs flash Dial tone from handset only
37 Handset on-hook all LCDs fast flash Dial tone from speaker
38 Handsfree key LCD 0 to 2 lit

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 58 of 472 M2006 and M2008 Telephone test

M2006 and M2008 Telephone test

The M2006 and M2008 faceplate is shown in Figure 4. The M2006 test is
provided in Table 7. The M2008 test is provided in Table 8.

Figure 4
Meridian M2006 and M2008 set

Filler plate or digit

display (M2008
only)

Speaker
Switchook

Message Waiting
lamp

Rls key
M2008 only
Hold Key

Function keys
and LCDs

Volume
Prime DN
control

553-5055

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2006 and M2008 Telephone test Page 59 of 472

Table 7
Meridian M2006 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Feature keys:
1 Key 0 LCD 0 lit
2 Key 1 LCD 1 lit
3 Key 2 LCD 2 lit
4 Key 3 LCD 3 lit turn on Message Waiting LED
5 Key 4 LCD 4 lit turn off Message Waiting LED
LCD 5 lit, (if key 5 is not a
6 Key 5
Program key for data option)
Keypad keys:
7 Key 1 LCD 0 lit
8 Key 2 LCD 1 lit
9 Key 3 LCD 2 lit
10 Key 4 LCD 3 lit
11 Key 5 LCD 4 lit
12 Key 6 LCD 0 and 4 lit
13 Key 7 LCD 1 and 4 lit
14 Key 8 LCD 2 and 4 lit
15 Key 9 LCD 3 and 4 lit
16 Key 0 LCD 1 and 4 lit
17 Key * all LCDs lit
18 Key # all LCDs off
Fixed keys:
19 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit dial tone
20 Release all LCDs off
21 Off-hook all LCDs flash dial tone from handset only
22 On-hook all LCDs fast flash dial tone form speaker

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 60 of 472 M2006 and M2008 Telephone test

Table 7
Meridian M2006 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

23 Off-hook all LCDs lit

24 On-hook all LCDs off
25 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit buzzer
26 HLD end of test

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2006 and M2008 Telephone test Page 61 of 472

Table 8
Meridian M2008 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Feature keys:
1 Key 0 LCD 0 lit display upper case letters
2 Key 1 LCD 1 lit display lower case letters
3 Key 2 LCD 2 lit display clear
4 Key 3 LCD 3 lit display darkens
5 Key 4 LCD 4 lit top line of display darkens
6 Key 5 LCD 5 lit turn Message Waiting LED on
7 Key 6 LCD 6 lit turn Message Waiting LED off
8 Key 7 LCD 7 lit

Keypad keys:
9 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 1 on display
10 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 2 on display
11 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 3 on display
12 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 4 on display
13 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 5 on display
14 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 6 on display
15 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 7 on display
16 Key 8 LCD 0 and 6 lit 8 on display
17 Key 9 LCD 1 and 6 lit 9 on display
18 Key 0 LCD 2 and 6 lit 0 on display
19 Key * all LCDs lit bottom line of display darkens
20 Key # all LCDs off display clear

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 62 of 472 M2006 and M2008 Telephone test

Table 8
Meridian M2008 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Fixed keys:
21 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit
22 Release all LCDs off display clear
23 Off-hook all LCDs flash dial tone from handset only
24 On-hook all LCDs fast flash dial tone form speaker
25 Off-hook all LCDs lit display darkens
26 On-hook all LCDs off display clear
27 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit buzzer
28 HLD end of test

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2216, M2016S and M2616 Telephone test Page 63 of 472

M2216, M2016S and M2616 Telephone test

The set faceplate is shown in Figure 5. The M2216 test is provided in Table 9.
The M2016S and M2616 set test is provided in Table 10.

Figure 5
M2216, M2016S and M2616 set

Filler plate

Brandline insert

Speaker
Switchook
Message Waiting
lamp

Rls key

Hold key

16 Function keys
with 8 LCDs

Microphone
(2616)
Volume
control
Prime DN

553-1852

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 64 of 472 M2216, M2016S and M2616 Telephone test

Table 9
M2216 Telephone test
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones
Note: Do not test key 7
Feature keys:
1 Key 0 LCD 0 lit display upper case letters
2 Key 1 LCD 1 lit display lower case letters
3 Key 2 LCD 2 lit display clear
4 Key 3 LCD 3 lit display darkens
5 Key 4 LCD 4 lit top line of display darkens
6 Key 5 LCD 5 lit turn Message Waiting LED on
7 Key 6 LCD 6 lit turn Message Waiting LED off
8 Key n>7 LCD n lit

Keypad keys:
9 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 1 on display
10 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 2 on display
11 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 3 on display
12 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 4 on display
13 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 5 on display
14 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 6 on display
15 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 7 on display
16 Key 8 LCD 0 and 6 lit 78 on display
17 Key 9 LCD 1 and 6 lit 9 on display
18 Key 0 LCD 2 and 6 lit 0 on display
19 Key * all LCDs lit bottom line of display darkens
20 Key # all LCDs off display clear

Fixed keys:
21 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit dial tone
22 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit buzzer
23 HLD end of test

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2216, M2016S and M2616 Telephone test Page 65 of 472

Table 10
M2016S and M2616 Telephone test
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Note: Do not test key 7

Feature keys:
1 Key 0 LCD 0 lit display upper case letters
2 Key 1 LCD 1 lit display lower case letters
3 Key 2 LCD 2 lit display clear
4 Key 3 LCD 3 lit display darkens
5 Key 4 LCD 4 lit top line of display darkens
6 Key 5 LCD 5 lit turn Message Waiting LED on
7 Key 6 LCD 6 lit turn Message Waiting LED off
8 Key n>7 LCD n lit
Keypad keys:
9 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 1 on display
10 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 2 on display
11 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 3 on display
12 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 4 on display
13 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 5 on display
14 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 6 on display
15 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 7 on display
16 Key 8 LCD 0 and 6 lit 8 on display
17 Key 9 LCD 1 and 6 lit 9 on display
18 Key 0 LCD 2 and 6 lit 0 on display
19 Key * all LCDs lit top line of display darkens
20 Key # all LCDs off display clear
Fixed keys:
LCD 15 lit (with no display)
21 Handsfree
LCD 0-2 lit (with display)
22 Release all LCDs off

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 66 of 472 M2216, M2016S and M2616 Telephone test

Table 10
M2016S and M2616 Telephone test
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

23 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit dial tone from speaker

24 Off-hook all LCDs flash dial tone from handset
25 On-hook all LCDs fast flash dial tone from speaker
26 Off-hook all LCDs lit display darkens
27 On-hook all LCDs off display clear
28 HLD LCD 0 to 4 lit buzzer
29 HLD end of test

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2317 Telephone test Page 67 of 472

M2317 Telephone test

The key and LCD layout is shown in Figure 6. The test is provided in
Table 11.

Figure 6
M2317 Series Telephone Key and LCD Layout

2 LIN E X 40 C H ARA CT ER /LIN E L CD DI SPLAY

SOFT KE Y 0 SOFT KE Y 1 SOFT KE Y 2 SOFT KE Y 3 SOFT KE Y 4

R LS H OLD PR OGRA MMA BLE

HAN DS FR EE
KEY 5

PR OGRA MMA BLE PROGR AM MABL E

1 2 3
KEY 10 KEY 4

4 5 6 PR OGRA MMA BLE PR OGRA MMA BLE

KEY 9 KEY 3
7 8 9
PR OGRA MMA BLE PR OGRA MMA BLE
* 0 # KEY 8 KEY 2

PROGR AM MABL E PROGR AM MABL E

KEY 7 KEY 1
Vo lu me
PR OGRA MMA BLE PROGR AM MABL E
KEY 6 KEY 0

553-12 74

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 68 of 472 M2317 Telephone test

Table 11
M2317 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

1 Press * All LCD are lit Blank

2 Off-hook All LCDs flash 192
(except Key 11)
3 On-hook All LCDs fast flash 192
(except Key 11)
4 Off-hook All LCDs lit All 80 character elements (40
characters x 2 lines) are fully lit.
Each character element is made up
of 35 dots in a 5 x 7 dot array.
5 On-hook All LCDs off All 80 character elements are off

Dial Pad Keys:

6 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 1
7 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 12
8 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 123
9 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 1234
10 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 12345
11 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 123456
12 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 1234567
13 Key 8 LCD 7 lit 12345678
14 Key 9 LCDs 0 & 7 lit 123456789
15 Key 0 LCDs 1 & 7 lit 1234567890
16 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 12345678901
17 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 123456789012
18 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 1234567890123
19 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 12345678901234
20 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 123456789012345
21 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 1234567890123456
22 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 12345678901234567

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2317 Telephone test Page 69 of 472

Table 11
M2317 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

23 Key 8 LCD 7 lit 123456789012345678

24 Key 9 LCDs 0 & 7 lit 1234567890123456789
25 Key 0 LCDs 1 & 7 lit 12345678901234567890
26 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 12345678901234567890
1
27 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 12345678901234567890
12
28 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 12345678901234567890
123
29 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 12345678901234567890
1234
30 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 12345678901234567890
12345
31 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 12345678901234567890
123456
32 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 12345678901234567890
1234567
33 Key 8 LCD 7 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678
34 Key 9 LCDs 0 & 7 lit 12345678901234567890
123456789
35 Key 0 LCDs 1 & 7 lit 12345678901234567890
1234567890
36 Key 1 LCD 0 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
1
37 Key 2 LCD 1 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
12
38 Key 3 LCD 2 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
123
39 Key 4 LCD 3 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
1234

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 70 of 472 M2317 Telephone test

Table 11
M2317 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

40 Key 5 LCD 4 lit 12345678901234567890

12345678901234567890
12345
41 Key 6 LCD 5 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
123456
42 Key 7 LCD 6 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
1234567
43 Key 8 LCD 7 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
12345678
44 Key 9 LCDs 0 & 7 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
123456789
45 Key 0 LCDs 1 & 7 lit 12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
1234567890
46 Key * All LCD lit 88888888888888888888
(except Key 11) 88888888888888888888

47 Key # All LCD go off Display clears

Programmable Keys:
48 Key 0 LCD 0 lit Blank
49 Key 1 LCD 1 lit Blank
50 Key 2 LCD 2 lit Blank
51 Key 3 LCD 3 lit Blank
52 Key 4 LCD 4 lit Blank
53 Key 5 LCD 5 lit Blank
54 Key 6 LCD 6 lit Blank
55 Key 7 LCD 7 lit Blank
56 Key 8 LCD 8 lit Blank

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2317 Telephone test Page 71 of 472

Table 11
M2317 Telephone test

Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

57 Key 9 LCD 9 lit Blank

58 Key 10 LCD 10 lit Blank

Soft Keys:
59 Key 0 LCD 0 flashes ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ
60 ipm RSTUVWXYZABCDEFGH
60 Key 1 LCD 1 flashes Display clears
60 ipm
61 Key 2 LCD 2 flashes abcdefghijklmnopqrst
60 ipm uvwxyzabcdefghijklmn
62 Key 3 LCD 3 flashes Display clears
60 ipm
63 Key 4 LCD 4 flashes Display clears
60 ipm
64 Press HOLD key LCD 0 to 4 light steadily Dial tone heard through speaker
(Key 11 lit)
65 Handset off-hook All LCD flash at 60 ipm Dial tone heard through handset
(Key 11 off)
66 Handset on-hook All LCD fast flash at Dial tone heard through speaker
120 ipm (Key 11 on)
67 Press LCD 0 to 2 light steadily
HANDSFREE key
68 Press RELEASE All LCD go off
key
69 Press HOLD key LCD 0 to 4 light steadily Buzz heard through speaker
70 Press HOLD key End of test

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 72 of 472 QCW-type Attendant Console test

QCW-type Attendant Console test

This is the procedure for testing the basic Attendant Console used with most
Meridian systems. Start these tests with the headset/handset plugged in.
Tones, except for Buzz, are heard from the headset/handset.

Figure 7 show the optional lamp field array. Table 12, “QCW-type Attendant
Console test,” on page 74. Figure 7 shows the layout of the keys and LEDs
on a console.

Figure 7
Lamp Field Array Response

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10
11
12
13
14

15
16
17
18

19

20
21

22
23
24

553-1555

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
QCW-type Attendant Console test Page 73 of 472

Figure 8
SL-1 Console Key and LED Layout

A B C D E F G

9 9 9 9 9

8 8 8 NC 8 8

7 7 7 7 7

6 6 6 6 6

5 5 5 5 5

4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3
1 2 3

2 2 2 4 5 6 2 2

1 1 1 7 8 9 1 1

0 0 0 * 0 # 0 0

A B C D E DIAL PAD F G

= 4-STATE LAMPS,
533-1556
= 2-STATE LAMP—MINOR ALARM LAMP
= 5-STATE LAMPS,
NC = NO CONNECITON—MAJOR ALARM LAMP

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 74 of 472 QCW-type Attendant Console test

QCW-type Attendant Console test

Note 1: If the console has a 16-digit display, test all digits by repeating
the dial pad sequence. On 8-digit display consoles, only the last 8 digits
are shown.

Note 2: This is the test of the conference circuit. EXCL DEST controls
the DESTINATION port, EXCL SRC controls the SOURCE ports and
RLS the ATTENDANT port. Each key activation reverses the
enable/disable status of the port.

Table 12
QCW-type Attendant Console test

Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

1 Select an idle loop key

on the Console to be
tested.
2 Enter SPRE 92 All lit (except F0-5, 8-9, D0, All field array LEDs are lit
7-9 and E0)
3 Dial Pad Key # All unlit Display is blank, all lamp field
array LEDs are off
4 Dial Pad Key 1 D1 lit 1
5 Dial Pad Key 2 E1 lit 12
6 Dial Pad Key 3 D2 lit 123
7 Dial Pad Key 4 E2 lit 1234
8 Dial Pad Key 5 D3 lit 12345
9 Dial Pad Key 6 E3 lit 123456
10 Dial Pad Key 7 D4 lit 1234567
11 Dial Pad Key 8 E4 lit 12345678
12 Dial Pad Key 9 D5 lit 123456789
13 Dial Pad Key 0 E5 lit 1234567890 (See Note 1)
14 Dial Pad Key * All lit (except F0-5, 8-9, D0, 8888888888888888
7-9 and E0) All field array LEDs are lit
15 Dial Pad Key # all unlit Blank, all lamp field array LEDs
are off
16 Strip A key 0 A0 lit
17 Strip A key 1 A1 lit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
QCW-type Attendant Console test Page 75 of 472

Table 12
QCW-type Attendant Console test
Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

18 Strip A key 2 A2 lit

19 Strip A key 3 A3 lit
20 Strip A key 4 A4 lit
21 Strip A key 5 A5 lit
22 Strip A key 6 A6 lit
23 Strip A key 7 A7 lit
24 Strip A key 8 A8 lit
25 Strip A key 9 A9 lit
26 Strip B key 0 B0 lit
27 Strip B key 1 B1 lit
28 Strip B key 2 B2 lit
29 Strip B key 3 B3 lit
30 Strip B key 4 B4 lit
31 Strip B key 5 B5 lit
32 Strip B key 6 B6 lit
33 Strip B key 7 B7 lit
34 Strip B key 8 B8 lit
35 Strip B key 9 B9 lit
36 Strip C key 0 C0 lit
37 Strip C key 1 C1 lit
38 Strip C key 2 C2 lit
39 Strip C key 3 C3 lit
40 Strip C key 4 C4 lit
41 Strip C key 5 C5 lit
42 Strip C key 6 C6 lit
43 Strip C key 7 C7 lit
44 Strip C key 8 C8 lit

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 76 of 472 QCW-type Attendant Console test

Table 12
QCW-type Attendant Console test
Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

45 Strip C key 9 C9 lit

46 Strip G key 0 G0 lit Lamp field array displays a
diagonal pattern as shown in
Figure 7
47 Strip G key 1 G1 lit All field array LEDs are off
48 Strip G key 2 G2 lit
49 Strip G key 3 G3 lit
50 Strip G key 4 G4 lit
51 Strip G key 5 G5 lit
52 Strip G key 6 G6 lit
53 Strip G key 7 G7 lit
54 Strip G key 8 G8 lit
55 Strip G key 9 G9 lit

Note: If console is equipped with 10- or 20-button modules, proceed to Step 56. If not, go to Step 66.

56 Strip H key 0 H0 lit

57 Strip H key 1 H1 lit
58 Strip H key 2 H2 lit
59 Strip H key 3 H3 lit
60 Strip H key 4 H4 lit
61 Strip H key 5 H5 lit
62 Strip H key 6 H6 lit
63 Strip H key 7 H7 lit
64 Strip H key 8 H0 and H7 lit
65 Strip H key 9 H1 and H7 lit

Note: Test all remaining key strips in a similar manner to H before testing strip F. H7 remains lit for strip I
test.

66 Strip F key 0 B0 to B4 lit. H7 and I7 lit. Busy tone

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
QCW-type Attendant Console test Page 77 of 472

Table 12
QCW-type Attendant Console test
Step Key operated LCD location & response Display and Tones

67 Strip F key 1 All lit (except D0, 7-9, E8, 8888888888888888

F0-5, F8-9)
68 Strip F key 1 All Fast Flash at 120 ipm Blank
(except D0, 7-9, E8, F0-5,
F8-9)
69 Strip F key 1 All Flash at 60 ipm (except Blank
D0, 7-9, E8, F0-5, F8-9)
70 Strip F key 1 C1-6, D1-6, E1-6, and
G0-1 Slow Flash at 30 ipm.
71 Strip F key 2 All strip A lit Blank
72 Strip F key 3 All strip B lit
73 Strip F key 4 All off
74 Strip F key 5 B0 to B4 lit Busy tone and dial tone
(See Note 2)
75 Strip F key 6 B0 to B4 off Dial tone only
(See Note 2)
76 Strip F key 5 B0 to B4 lit No tone
(See Note 2)
77 Strip F key 6 B0 to B4 off Busy tone only
(See Note 2)
78 Strip F key 7 B0 to B4 lit No tone
(See Note 2)
79 Strip F key 7 B0 to B4 off Busy tone
(See Note 2)
80 Handset out B0 to B4 off Speaker on (all keys disabled on
QCW4E only)
81 Handset in B0 to B4 lit Speaker off, tone in handset
receiver
82 Strip F key 0 B0 to B4 lit Buzz in speaker
83 Strip F key 9 F7 lit Volume up
84 Strip F key 8 F6 lit Volume down
85 Strip F key 0 End of test
86 Repeat test for all remaining consoles

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 78 of 472 M1250 Console test

M1250 Console test

The M1250 and M2250 faceplate is shown in Figure 9. The tests are provided
in the following tables:
Table 13 — M1250 console test
Table 14 — M1250 console test in QMT2 mode
Table 15 — M2250 console test
QMT2 mode for M1250 Console
When console is configured for the QMT2 mode, the two left most keystrips
imitate add-on keystrips QMT2 of QCW-type consoles when in shift mode.
For the M1250 console to operate in the QMT2 mode, Option IC2 must be
assigned in the Customer Data Block (LD 15).

To place the M1250 into QMT2 mode:

1 Unplug the console from the wall jack.
2 Open the console faceplate and the set dip-switch on the top circuit board
to ON. Refer to the NTP titled Installation Procedures for Telephone
Sets and Attendant Consoles .
3 Replace the console faceplate.
4 Plug the console into the wall jack.
5 Put the M1250 console in an idle state, with handset or headset plugged
in.
6 Press SHIFT to put the console into shift mode.
7 Enter diagnostics mode by pressing F6 function key.
8 From the diagnostics menu on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen,
select the QMT2 option by keying in the number (3) from the dial pad,
then check for ON confirmation on line 2 of the LCD screen.
9 Exit the diagnostics menu by pressing the octothorpe (# ) key.
10 Return to the operating mode by pressing the # key again.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test Page 79 of 472

Figure 9
SL-1 M1250 and M2250 Console — Key and LCD Layout

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 80 of 472 M1250 Console test

M1250 Console test

Note 1: Refer to Table 14 for M1250 test in the QMT2 mode.

Note 2: An “Active” LCD display shows the date and time on line 1,
digits on line 2, and the word ACTIVE on line 4.

Note 3: Where “headset” is written, the word “handset” may be

substituted.

Note 4: The volume keys for adjusting the speaker volume (alerting
tones) have eight levels. Volume levels are adjusted by pressing the
Volume Up key (Icon key 2 in Shift mode) or the Volume Down key
(Icon key 3 in Shift mode) once for each change in level.

Table 13
M1250 Console test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

1 Select an idle loop key

on the M1250 Attendant
Console to be tested.
2 Enter SPRE 92 All LCD indicators are lit as Display screen appears as
illustrated in Figure 9. shown in Figure 9.
3 Press Key # All LCD key indicators are Active
blank
Note: When lines 1 and 4 are Active, line 2 displays digits.
4 Press Key 1 D1 lit 1
5 Press Key 2 E1 lit 12
6 Press Key 3 D2 lit 123
7 Press Key 4 E2 lit 1234
8 Press Key 5 D3 lit 12345
9 Press Key 6 E3 lit 123456
10 Press Key 7 D4 lit 1234567
11 Press Key 8 E4 lit 12345678
12 Press Key 9 D5 lit 123456789

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test Page 81 of 472

Table 13
M1250 Console test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

13 Press Key 0 E5 lit 1234567890

Note: Only 16 integers (maximum) are displayed, even though the display line has a total capacity of 40
characters. If steps 4 to 13 are repeated, line 2 displays the numbers 1 to 0 as shown here. The display
appears where the field is filled with eights (8's) in Figure 9. After key 7 is pressed, one number is truncated
off the right of the display for each number added on the left. Avoid this scrolling condition as it may disrupt
the rest of the test.
14 Press Key * All LCD indicators are lit as Display screen appears as
illustrated in Figure 9, except shown in Figure 9.
FK0-4.
15 Press Key # All LCD key indicators are Active
blank
16 Press AK key 0 A0 blank Active
17 Press AK key 1 A1 blank Active
18 Press AK key 2 A2 blank Active
19 Press AK key 3 A3 blank Active
20 Press AK key 4 A4 blank Active
21 Press AK key 5 A5 blank Active
22 Press AK key 6 A6 blank Active
23 Press AK key 7 A7 blank Active
24 Press AK key 8 A8 blank Active
25 Press AK key 9 A9 blank Active
26 Press BK key 0 B0 lit Active
27 Press BK key 1 B1 lit Active
28 Press BK key 2 B2 lit Active
29 Press BK key 3 B3 lit Active
30 Press BK key 4 B4 lit Active
31 Press BK key 5 B5 lit Active
32 Press BK key 6 B6 lit Active
33 Press BK key 7 B7 lit Active

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 82 of 472 M1250 Console test

Table 13
M1250 Console test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

34 Press BK key 8 B8 lit Active

35 Press BK key 9 B9 lit Active
36 Press CK key 0 C0 lit Idle
37 Press CK key 1 C1 lit Active
38 Press CK key 2 C2 lit Active
39 Press CK key 3 C3 lit Active
40 Press CK key 4 C4 lit Active
41 Press CK key 5 C5 lit Active
42 Press CK key 6 C6 lit Active
43 Press Icon key (1) C/H and Active
44 Press Icon key (2) BUSY/NIGHT
Note: BUSY or NIGHT display is dependent on how many consoles are configured in the system, and the
state of those consoles at the time of the test.
1. BUSY = Standard consoles are POS BUSY — M1250 is IDLE
2. NIGHT = all consoles are POS BUSY
45 Press FK key 1 F1 lit BUSY/NIGHT
46 Press Icon key (2) F1 lit BUSY/NIGHT
47 Press FK key 1 F1 off BUSY/NIGHT
48 Press GK key 0 G0 lit Active
49 Press GK key 1 G1 lit Active
50 Press GK key 2 G2 lit Active
51 Press GK key 3 G3 lit Active
52 Press GK key 4 G4 lit Active
53 Press GK key 5 G5 lit Active
54 Press GK key 6 G6 lit Active
55 Press GK key 7 G7 lit Active
56 Press GK key 8 G8 lit Active

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test Page 83 of 472

Table 13
M1250 Console test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

57 Press GK key 9 G9 lit Active

58 Press FK key 1 G9 and F1 lit Active
59 Press AK key 0 A0 and F1 lit Active
60 Press AK key 1 A1 and F1 lit Active
61 Press AK key 2 A2 and F1 lit Active
62 Press AK key 3 A3 and F1 lit Active
63 Press AK key 4 A4 and F1 lit Active
64 Press AK key 5 A5 and F1 lit Active
65 Press AK key 6 A6 and F1 lit Active
66 Press AK key 7 A7 and F1 lit Active
67 Press AK key 8 A8 and F1 lit Active
68 Press AK key 9 A9 and F1 lit Active
69 Press BK key 0 B0 and F1 lit Active
70 Press BK key 1 B1 and F1 lit Active
71 Press BK key 2 B2 and F1 lit Active
72 Press BK key 3 B3 and F1 lit Active
73 Press BK key 4 B4 and F1 lit Active
74 Press BK key 5 B5 and F1 lit Active
75 Press BK key 6 B6 and F1 lit Active
76 Press BK key 7 B7 and F1 lit Active
77 Press BK key 8 B8 and F1 lit Active
78 Press BK key 9 B9 and F1 lit Active
79 Press FK key 0 B0-4, and F1 lit Active
80 Press FK key 0 Active tone
81 Press FK key 0 C0 and F1 lit BUSY/NIGHT

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 84 of 472 M1250 Console test

Table 13
M1250 Console test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Note: BUSY or NIGHT display is dependent on how many consoles are configured in the system, and the
state of those consoles at the time of the test.
1. BUSY = Standard consoles are POS BUSY — M1250 is IDLE
2. NIGHT = all consoles are POS BUSY
82 Press CK key 1 C1 and F1 lit BUSY/NIGHT
83 Dial SPRE 92 As shown in Figure 9. As shown in Figure 9.
84 Press key # F1 lit while all other LCDs are Active
blank.
85 Press FK key 0 B0-4 and F1 lit Active
86 Press FK key 1 F1 goes blank Active
(B0-4 still lit)
87 Press FK key 2 All LCDs are lit as in Figure Night
8, except F1.
88 Press FK key 2 All LCDs Fast Flash at 120 Fast Flash Active/Night
ipm.
89 Press FK key 2 All LCDs Flash at 60 ipm. Flash Active/Night
90 Press FK key 2 These LCDs are lit:
C1-6, D/E1-6, G0-1 Slow
Flash at 30 ipm.
91 Press FK key 3 All of Key Strip A is lit Active
92 Press FK key 4 All LCDs in strip B are lit Active
93 Press Icon key (8) All LCDs are blank Active
94 Press Icon key (7) B0-4 lit Active
95 Press Strip FK key 5 B0-4 lit Active
96 Press Icon key (7) All LCDs are blank Active
97 Press FK key 5 B0-4 are lit Active
98 Press FK key 6 B0-4 lit Active
99 Press FK key 6 B0-4 are blank Active

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test Page 85 of 472

Table 13
M1250 Console test

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

100 Remove the headset All LCDs are blank Active

jack (unplug the
headset)
101 Replace the headset B0-4 lit Active
jack (plug-in the
headset)
102 Press FK key 0 B0-4 lit Buzz tone to the Attendant
display is active
103 Press FK key 0 C0 lit BUSY/NIGHT
104 Press FK key 0 End of test NIGHT

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 86 of 472 M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Note 1: An “Active” LCD display shows the date and time on line 1,
digits on line 2, and the word ACTIVE on line 4.

Note 2: Where “headset” is written, the word “handset” may be

substituted.

Note 3: The volume keys for adjusting the speaker volume (alerting
tones) have eight levels. Volume levels are adjusted by pressing the
Volume Up key (Icon key 2 in Shift mode) or the Volume Down key
(Icon key 3 in Shift mode) once for each change in level.

Note 4: Ensure console is not in shift mode when beginning test.

Table 14
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones
1 Select an idle loop key
on the M1250 console
to be tested.
2 Enter SPRE 92 All LCD indicators are lit as The display screen is activated
illustrated in Figure 9. AA and and shows all alphanumerics as
BB lit on both sides. indicated in Figure 9.
3 Dial Pad Key # All LCD indicators are blank. Active
4 Dial Pad Key 1 D1 lit 1
5 Dial Pad Key 2 E1 lit 12
6 Dial Pad Key 3 D2 lit 123
7 Dial Pad Key 4 E2 lit 1234
8 Dial Pad Key 5 D3 lit 12345
9 Dial Pad Key 6 E3 lit 123456
10 Dial Pad Key 7 D4 lit 1234567
11 Dial Pad Key 8 E4 lit 12345678
12 Dial Pad Key 9 D5 lit 123456789

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode Page 87 of 472

Table 14
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

13 Dial Pad Key 0 E5 lit 1234567890

Note: Only 16 integers (maximum) are displayed, even though the display line has a total capacity of 40
characters. If steps 4 to 13 are repeated line 2 displays the numbers 1 to 0 as shown here. The display
appears where the field is filled with eights in Figure 9. After key 7 is pressed, one number is truncated off the
right of the display for each number added on the left. Avoid this scrolling condition as it may disrupt the rest
of the test.
14 Dial Pad Key * All LCD indicators are lit as Display screen is activated and
illustrated in Figure 9. displays alphanumerics as
indicated in Figure 9.
15 Dial Pad Key # All LCD indicators are blank Active
16 Strip AK key 0 A0 lit Active
17 Strip AK key 1 A1 lit Active
18 Strip AK key 2 A2 lit Active
19 Strip AK key 3 A3 lit Active
20 Strip AK key 4 A4 lit Active
21 Strip AK key 5 A5 lit Active
22 Strip AK key 6 A6 lit Active
23 Strip AK key 7 A7 lit Active
24 Strip AK key 8 A8 lit Active
25 Strip AK key 9 A9 lit Active
26 Strip BK key 0 B0 lit Active
27 Strip BK key 1 B1 lit Active
28 Strip BK key 2 B2 lit Active
29 Strip BK key 3 B3 lit Active
30 Strip BK key 4 B4 lit Active
31 Strip BK key 5 B5 lit Active
32 Strip BK key 6 B6 lit Active
33 Strip BK key 7 B7 lit Active
34 Strip BK key 8 B8 lit Active

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 88 of 472 M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Table 14
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

35 Strip BK key 9 B9 lit Active

36 Strip CK key 0 C0 lit Active
37 Strip CK key 1 C1 lit Active
38 Strip CK key 2 C2 lit Active
39 Strip CK key 3 C3 lit Active
40 Strip CK key 4 C4 lit Active
41 Strip CK key 5 C5 lit Active
42 Strip CK key 6 C6 lit Active
43 Icon key (1) — C/H and Active
44 Icon key (2) — BUSY
45 Strip FK key 1 F1 lit BUSY
46 Icon key (2) F1 lit NIGHT
47 Strip FK key 1 — NIGHT
48 Strip GK key 0 G0 lit Active
49 Strip GK key 1 G1 lit Active
50 Strip GK key 2 G2 lit Active
51 Strip GK key 3 G3 lit Active
52 Strip GK key 4 G4 lit Active
53 Strip GK key 5 G5 lit Active
54 Strip GK key 6 G6 lit Active
55 Strip GK key 7 G7 lit Active
56 Strip GK key 8 G8 lit Active
57 Strip GK key 9 G9 lit Active
58 Strip FK key 1 G9 and F1 lit Active
59 Strip AK key 0 A0 and F1 lit Active
60 Strip AK key 1 A1 and F1 lit Active

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode Page 89 of 472

Table 14
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

61 Strip AK key 2 A2 and F1 lit Active

62 Strip AK key 3 A3 and F1 lit Active
63 Strip AK key 4 A4 and F1 lit Active
64 Strip AK key 5 A5 and F1 lit Active
65 Strip AK key 6 A6 and F1 lit Active
66 Strip AK key 7 A7 and F1 lit Active
67 Strip AK key 8 A7, A0 and F1 lit Active
68 Strip AK key 9 A7, A1 and F1 lit Active
69 Strip BK key 0 A7, B0 and F1 lit Active
70 Strip BK key 1 A7, B1 and F1 lit Active
71 Strip BK key 2 A7, B2 and F1 lit Active
72 Strip BK key 3 A7, B3 and F1 lit Active
73 Strip BK key 4 A7, B4 and F1 lit Active
74 Strip BK key 5 A7, B5 and F1 lit Active
75 Strip BK key 6 A7, B6 and F1 lit Active
76 Strip BK key 7 A7, B7 and F1 lit Active
77 Strip BK key 8 A7, B7, B0 and F1 lit Active
78 Strip BK key 9 A7, B0, B1 and F1 lit Active
79 Strip FK key 0 A7, B7, B0 to B4 and F1 lit Active and busy tone
80 Strip FK key 0 A7, B7, B0 to B4 and F1 lit Active and tone from speaker
81 Strip FK key 0 C0 and F1 lit NIGHT
82 Strip FK key 1 C0 lit NIGHT
83 Strip CK key 1 All LCD key indicators are Display screen is activated and
blank shows all alphanumerics as
indicated in Figure 9.
84 Dial Pad Key # All LCD key indicators remain Active
blank

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 90 of 472 M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Table 14
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

85 Strip FK key 0 B0 to B4 lit Active and busy tone

86 Strip FK key 2 All LCD indicators are lit as Display is activated and displays
illustrated in Figure 9. all alphanumerics as indicated in
Figure 9.
87 Strip FK key 2 As in Step 86, but LCD As in Step 86, but LCD display
indicators Fast Flash at Fast Flashes at 120 ipm.
120 ipm.
88 Strip FK key 2 As in Step 86, but LCD As in Step 86, but LCD display
indicators Flash at 60 ipm. Flashes at 60 ipm.
89 Strip FK key 2 All 5-state LCD indicators Active
(strips C and D/E) Slow Flash
at 30 ipm.
90 Strip FK key 3 All LCD indicators in strip A/A Active
are lit
91 Strip FK key 4 All LCD indicators in strip B/B Active
lit
92 Icon key (8) All LCD indicators go off Active
93 Icon key (7) LCD indicators B0 to B4 lit Active and dial tone, then busy
tone
94 Strip FK key 5 LCD indicators B0 to B4 go Active and dial tone
off
95 Icon key (7) LCD indicators B0 to B4 lit Active
96 Strip FK key 5 LCD indicators B0 to B4 go Active and busy tone
off
97 Strip FK key 6 LCD indicators B0 to B4 lit Active
98 Strip FK key 6 LCD indicators B0 to B4 go Active and busy tone
off
99 Handset unjacked All LCD indicators go off Active
100 Handset jacked in B0 to B4 lit Active and busy tone
101 Handset unjacked All LCD indicators go off Active
102 Handset jacked in at B0 to B4 lit Active and busy tone
other side of console

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode Page 91 of 472

Table 14
M1250 Console test in QMT2 mode

Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

103 Strip FK key 0 B0 to B4 lit Active and tone from speaker

104 Strip FK key 0 C0 lit NIGHT
End of test. Repeat for all additional consoles in QMT2 mode.

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 92 of 472 M2250 Console

M2250 Console
Table 15
M2250 Console
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

1 Select idle loop key

2 Enter SPRE code 92 All LCDs lit except F1 888888888888888888. . .
888888888888888888. . .
3 Press dial pad # All off Active
4 Press dial key 1 D1 lit 1
5 Press dial key 2 E1 lit 12
6 Press dial key 3 D2 lit 123
7 Press dial key 4 E2 lit 1234
8 Press dial key 5 D3 lit 12345
9 Press dial key 6 E3 lit 123456
10 Press dial key 7 D4 lit 1234567
11 Press dial key 8 E4 lit 12345678
12 Press dial key 9 D5 lit 123456789
13 Press dial key 0 E5 lit 1234567890
14 Repeat step 4 until 12345678901234567. . .
both lines of the 12345678901234567. . .
display are full
15 Press dial pad * All LCDs lit except F1 888888888888888888. . .
888888888888888888. . .
16 Press dial pad # All LCD blank ACTIVE
17 Press AK key 0 A0 lit ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP. . .
NOPQRSTUVWXYZAB. . .
18 Press AK key 1 A1 lit abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
wnopqrstuvwxyzabcdefg
19 Press AK key 2 A2 lit Display shows series of dark
squares
20 Press AK key 3 A3 lit ACTIVE
21 Press AK key 4 A4 lit ACTIVE

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2250 Console Page 93 of 472

Table 15
M2250 Console
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

22 Press AK key 5 A5 lit ACTIVE

23 Press AK key 6 A6 lit ACTIVE
24 Press AK key 7 A7 lit ACTIVE
25 Press AK key 8 A8 lit ACTIVE
26 Press AK key 9 A9 lit ACTIVE
27 Press BK key 0 B0 lit ACTIVE
28 Press BK key 1 B1 lit ACTIVE
29 Press BK key 2 B2 lit ACTIVE
30 Press BK key 3 B3 lit ACTIVE
31 Press BK key 4 B4 lit ACTIVE
32 Press BK key 5 B5 lit ACTIVE
33 Press BK key 6 B6 lit ACTIVE
34 Press BK key 7 B7 lit ACTIVE
35 Press BK key 8 B8 lit ACTIVE
36 Press BK key 9 B9 lit ACTIVE
37 Press CK key 0 C0 lit IDLE
38 Press CK key 1 C1 lit ACTIVE
39 Press CK key 2 C2 lit ACTIVE
40 Press CK key 3 C3 lit ACTIVE
41 Press CK key 4 C4 lit ACTIVE
42 Press CK key 5 C5 lit ACTIVE
43 Press CK key 6 C6 lit ACTIVE
44 Press Icon key 1 C/H and ACTIVE
45 Press Icon key 2 BUSY
46 Press CK key 0 C1 lit IDLE
47 Press GK key 0 GO lit ACTIVE

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 94 of 472 M2250 Console

Table 15
M2250 Console
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

48 Press GK key 1 G1 lit ACTIVE

49 Press GK key 2 G2 lit ACTIVE
50 Press GK key 3 G3 lit ACTIVE
51 Press GK key 4 G4 lit ACTIVE
52 Press GK key 5 G5 lit ACTIVE
53 Press GK key 6 G6 lit ACTIVE
54 Press GK key 7 G7 lit ACTIVE
55 Press GK key 8 G8 lit ACTIVE
56 Press GK key 9 G9 lit ACTIVE
57 Press FK key 1 G9 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
58 Press AK key 0 A0 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
59 Press AK key 1 A1 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
60 Press AK key 2 A2 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
61 Press AK key 3 A3 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
62 Press AK key 4 A4 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
63 Press AK key 5 A5 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
64 Press AK key 6 A6 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
65 Press AK key 7 A7 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
66 Press AK key 8 A8 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
67 Press AK key 9 A9 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
68 Press GK key 0 G1 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
69 Press GK key 1 G2 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
70 Press GK key 2 G3 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
71 Press GK key 3 G4 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
72 Press GK key 4 G4 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
73 Press GK key 5 G5 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 31
M2250 Console Page 95 of 472

Table 15
M2250 Console
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

74 Press GK key 6 G6 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE

75 Press GK key 7 G7 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
76 Press GK key 8 G8 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
77 Press GK key 9 G9 and F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
78 Press Hold key F1 and B0-4 lit [S] Busy tone in handset
79 Press Hold key F1 and B0-4 lit [S] Buzz in speaker
80 Press Hold key F1 and C0 lit [S] NIGHT or BUSY
81 Press CK key 1 F1 and C1 lit [S] NIGHT or BUSY
82 Dial SPRE 92 All LCDs lit 888888888888888888. . .
888888888888888888. . .
83 Press dialpad # F1 lit [S] ACTIVE
84 Press FK key 1 ACTIVE
85 Press FK key 2 All LCDs lit except F1 888888888888888888. . .
888888888888888888. . .
86 Press FK key 2 LCDs Flash at 120 ipm Flash ACTIVE/NIGHT
87 Press FK key 2 LCDs Flash at 60 ipm Flash ACTIVE/NIGHT
88 Press FK key 2 LCDs Flash at 30 ipm Flash ACTIVE/NIGHT
89 Press Icon key 8 All LCDs off ACTIVE
90 Press Icon key 7 B0-4 lit ACTIVE, dial tone
91 Press FK key 5 All LCDs off ACTIVE, dial tone
92 Press Icon key 7 B0-4 lit ACTIVE
93 Press FK key 5 All LCDs off ACTIVE
94 Press FK key 6 B0-4 lit ACTIVE
95 Press FK key 6 All LCDs off ACTIVE
96 Handset out All LCDs off ACTIVE
97 Handset in B0-4 lit ACTIVE
98 Handset out All LCDs off ACTIVE

X11 Maintenance
LD 31
Page 96 of 472 M2250 Console

Table 15
M2250 Console
Step Key operated LCD location and response Display and Tones

99 Handset in other side B0-4 lit ACTIVE

of console
100 Press Hold key B0-4 lit ACTIVE, busy tone
101 Press Hold key B0-4 lit ACTIVE, Buzz in speaker
102 Press Hold key C0 lit NIGHT
103 End of test

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

144

LD 32 LD 32
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 97 of 472

LD 32: Network and Peripheral

Equipment Diagnostic
LD 32 performs checks and maintenance functions on network and Peripheral
Signaling equipment. LD 32 will allow commands to be used for XTD cards.
The STAT command will produce an output which has XTD, LDC or LGD
appended where required.

On an Option 11 system, this program can be used to:

— get the status of peripheral equipment cards and units

— enable and disable peripheral equipment cards and units
— test message waiting lamps on 500/2500 telephone sets
— print set and card IDs on superloops
— convert packed TNs in hex to the card and unit format

On systems other than Option 11, this program is used to:

— get the status of Peripheral Signaling (PS), Controller and network cards
— get the status of PE shelves cards and units
— disable and enable PS, Controller and network cards
— disable and enable PE shelves, cards and units
— test message waiting lamps on 500/2500 sets
— list TNs of 500/2500 sets with faulty message waiting lamps on specified
shelf (not applicable from X11 Release 5.24 and later).
— test Message Waiting Lamps (MWL) on 2500 sets during midnight
routines (Release 8 and later)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 98 of 472 Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

— print set and card IDs on superloops

— convert packed TNs in hex to the loop, shelf, card, unit format

Note 1: Disabled DID trunks are placed in the answer state while
disabled.

Note 2: If Recorded Telephone Dictation (RTDT) cards are to be

software enabled or disabled, the Out-of-Service (OS) lead should be
connected to ground. On completion of the task, ground can be removed.

Note 3: Card ID information is presented as follows:

CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS
Where:
CCCCCCCC = is the order code
RR = is the release number
SSSS = is the serial number
Note 4: After making any changes to the route data block, IPE TRUNK
CARDS MUST BE DOWNLOADED by issuing the ENLC l s c
command.

Note 5: When getting the status of a card relating to a trunk error

(STAT), the term RVSD may appear with the trunk information. RVSD
indicates that the software detected a reversed wired trunk for that unit.

Overlay 32 Linkage
With Release 19 and later software, Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are
linked, thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once
one of the aforementioned Overlays has been loaded, it is possible to add,
print and obtain the status of a set without having to exit one Overlay and load
another.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Network and Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic Page 99 of 472

Input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:)
allow the user to enter either:

1 a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<cr>)

This entry will present you with a list of valid responses to that prompt.
2 An abbreviated response
The system responds to this entry with the nearest match. If there is more
than one possible match, the system responds with SCH0099, the input
followed by a question mark, and a list of possible responses. The user
can then enter a valid response.

Using Enable/Disable commands

All units on a loop go into maintenance busy mode when disabled using the
DISL command. The shelves on a loop must be individually re-enabled via
the ENLS command. Any telephones that were in lockout mode show as idle,
then go into lockout mode again 30 seconds after any unit on the shelf
requests dial tone.

On Option 11 systems, the DISL and ENLL commands are not available.
Instead, use the DISS, ENLC, DISC and ENLS commands as described
below.

When enabling a network loop serving ISDLC cards, the ISDLC cards must
be individually disabled then re-enabled to ensure that service is restored to
digital telephones. Service may also be restored to digital telephones by
disconnecting, and then reconnecting the telephone's line cord.

Note 1: When the Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package is enabled, a

failed trunk is displayed as BUSY. The enable/disable command does
not enable or disable the failed trunk unit (it stays in the BUSY state).

Note 2: When the French Type Approval package (FRTA 197) is

enabled then CO trunk units are not busied when they are disabled.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 100 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
Table of contents

Section Page

Basic commands 100

Superloop commands 103
ISDN BRI MISP commands 104
ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands 106
ISDN BRI BRSC commands 108
Option 11 commands 102
Option 11 BRI MISP commands 105
Option 11 BRI SILC/UILC commands 107

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to all machines, except Option 11
systems. See the list of Option 11 commands for further information.

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)
CONV tn Convert packed TN (in hex) to loop, shelf, card and unit format
CONV l s c u Convert loop, shelf, card and unit format to packed TN (in hex)
CPWD l s c u Clear directory password for M3000 set
M3903, M3904 and M3905 set with Release 24

DISC l s c Disable specified DTR/MFR card

DISI l s c Disable specified card when it is idle
DISL loop Disable network loop
DISR l s c u Disable specified DTR/MFR card or unit
DISN loop Disable network card containing specified loop
DISS l s Disable specified shelf
DISU l s c u Disable specified unit
DSCT l Disable automatic background continuity tests for superloop

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Basic commands Page 101 of 472

DSNW loop Disable network card containing specified loop

DSPS x Disable Peripheral Signaling card x
DSXP x Disable controller x and all connected cards

END Abort current test

ENLC l s c Enable and reset specified DTR/MFR card
ENLG x Enable group x
ENLL loop Enable network loop
ENLN loop Enable network card with specified loop
ENLR l s c u Enable specified DTR/MFR card or unit.
ENLS l s Enable specified shelf
ENLU l s c u Enable specified unit
ENNW loop Enable network card with specified loop
ENPS x Enable PS card x and associated loops

LBSY l s List TNs of all busy units on specified shelf

LDIS l s List TNs of all disabled units on specified shelf
LIDL l s List TNs of all idle units on specified shelf
LLBD l s List TNs of 500/2500 sets with defective MWLs
LMNT l s List TNs of all maintenance busy units on specified shelf

MFR l s c u Test specified MFR card or unit.

MFR l Test all MFR units on loop l.
MFR <cr> Test all MFR units

PBXH Message Waiting lamp maintenance

PBXT ALL Test all Message Waiting lamps
PBXT l (s c u) Test Message Waiting lamps on loop (or shelf or card or unit)

SDLC l s c Get status of specified ISDLC card

SDTR l s c u List status of specified DTR/MFR card or unit.
SDTR <cr> List the TN of all disabled DTR/MFR units
STAT Get status of all configured loops in system
STAT (loop) Give status of one or all loops
STAT l s Get idle, busy or disabled status of units on specified shelf
STAT l s c Get status of specified card
STAT l s c u Get status of specified unit
STAT NWK loop Check status of network card with specified loop
STAT PER x Get status of PS card x

TRK l s c u Seize specified trunk for outpulsing

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 102 of 472 Option 11 commands

Option 11 commands
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c
CONV tn Convert packed TN (in hex) to c u
CONV c u Convert c u to packed TN (in hex)
CPWD c u Clear directory password for M3000 set
M3903, M3904 and M3905 set with Release 24

DISC card Disable specified DTR/MFR card

DISI card Disable specified card when it is idle
DISS x Disable module
DISU c u Disable specified unit

END Abort current test

ENLC card Enable and reset specified DTR/MFR card
ENLR c u Enable specified DTR/MFR card or unit.
ENLS x Enable module
ENLU c u Enable specified unit

IDC card Print card ID

IDU c u Print set ID

LBSY m List TNs of all busy units in specified module

LDIS m List TNs of all disabled units in specified module
LIDL m List TNs of all idle units in specified module
LMNT m List TNs of all maintenance busy units in specified module

MFR c u Test specified MFR card or unit.

MFR c Test MFR units on card c

PBXT c (u), ALL Test message waiting lamps

SDTR c u List status of specified DTR/MFR card or unit.

STAT (card) Get status of specified or all cards
STAT c u Get status of specified unit

TRK c u Seize specified trunk for outpulsing

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Superloop commands Page 103 of 472

Superloop commands
Note: The Loop level commands are not supported for Option 11 and
11C.

DISL sl Disable specified superloop

DSCT sl Disable automatic background continuity tests for a superloop
DSXP x Disable Controller x and all associated PE cards

ENCT sl Enable automatic background continuity tests for a superloop

ENLL sl (v) Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v
ENLL sl Enable specified Superloop
ENXP x (v) Enable Controller x and associated PE cards, download software version v
ENXP XPC x (v) Enable Controller x, do not enable the associated PE cards, download
software version v

IDC sl Print Card ID for superloop and associated Controller(s)

IDC l s c Print card ID for PE card
IDC sl Get card id of LCI sl and its associated RCI
IDCS x Print card ID for all cards on shelf controlled by Controller x
IDU l s c u Print set ID
LBSY l s List TNs of all busy units on specified shelf

LDIS l s List TNs of all disabled units on specified shelf

LIDL l s List TNs of all idle units on specified shelf

STAT sl Get status of superloop and separate carriers on that superloop

SUPL (sl) Print data for one or all superloops

XNTT sl Do self-test of Network card for specified superloop

XPCT x Do self-test on Controller x
XPEC (x) Print data for one or all Controllers

Note: If a trunk unit is controlled by APNSS, the STAT commands will

indicate this is an APNSS trunk and will also display the status of the
D-channel. The display format remains the same.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 104 of 472 ISDN BRI MISP commands

ISDN BRI MISP commands

The following commands are available for ISDN Basic Rate Interface
Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) cards.

DISL loop Disable MISP loop

DISL (appl) loop Disable specified application on MISP loop
DISL (appl) loop 1 Disable and remove specified application from MISP loop
DISL (appl) loop REM Disable and remove specified application from MISP loop

DLIF loop x Download an UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to an MISP loop

ENLL loop Enable MISP loop

ENLL loop FDL Enable specified MISP loop and force download (FDL) basecode
ENLL (appl) loop Enable specified application on MISP loop
ENLL (appl) loop 1 Enable specified application on MISP loop and force download the
application loadware onto the MISP
ENLL (appl) loop FDL Enable specified application on MISP loop and force download the
application loadware onto the MISP

IDC loop Print MISP card ID

PERR loop Upload error log for specified MISP

STAT l s Get idle, busy or disabled status of units on specified shelf

STAT (appl) loop Get status of MISP loop (and application)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Option 11 BRI MISP commands Page 105 of 472

Option 11 BRI MISP commands

DISC card Disable Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) loop
DISC (appl) card Disable specified application on MISP loop
DISC (appl) card REM Disable and remove specified application from MISP
DLIF card Download a UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to MISP card

ENLC card Enable Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) loop

ENLC card FDL Enable specified MISP card and force download (FDL) basecode
ENLC (appl) card Enable specified application on MISP card
ENLC (appl) card FDL Enable specified application on MISP card and force download the
application loadware onto the MISP

IDC card Print MISP card ID

PERR card Upload error log for specified MISP

STAT (appl) card Get status of MISP card (and application)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 106 of 472 ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands

ISDN BRI SILC/UILC commands

The following commands are available for ISDN Basic Rate Interface
S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) cards and the associated
Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL).
DIS AUTO l s c u Disable automatic link recovery option of a DSL
DISC l s c Disable S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) card
DISI l s c Disable specified card when it is idle
DISU l s c d Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) (0-7)
DSRB l s c d Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL
DSTS l s c d Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk DSL

ENL AUTO l s c u Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL

ENLC l s c Enable S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) card
ENLU l s c d Enable specified unit Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) (0-7)
ENRB l s c d Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL
ENTS l s c d Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for the specified BRI Trunk DSL
ESTU l s c d Establish D-channel link for specified DSL

FDIS NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_ID>

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection

IDC l s c Print SILC/UILC card ID

PCON l s c d Print configuration and LAPD parameters for specified BRI Trunk DSL
PERR l s c Print protocol log for specified BRI line card
PLOG l s c d Print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL
PMES l s c d Print Layer 3 message log for specified BRI Trunk DSL
PTAB l s c d Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for specified BRI
Trunk DSL
PTAB l s c d <tbl #> Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration IE table
PTRF l s c d Print traffic data for specified BRI Trunk DSL

RLBT l s c d Perform Remote Loop Back test on specified BRI Trunk DSL
RLSU l s c d Release D-channel link for specified DSL

STAT l s c Get status of specified SILC or UILC

STAT l s c d Get status of specified Digital Subscriber Loop 0-7

STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#>

List all current call-independent connections on a given BRIT DSL
STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_ID>
List information pertaining to a specific call-independent connection

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Option 11 BRI SILC/UILC commands Page 107 of 472

Option 11 BRI SILC/UILC commands

DIS AUTO c d Disable automatic link recovery option of a DSL
DISC card Disable S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) card
DISI card Disable specified card when it is idle
DISU c u Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) (0-7)
DSRB c d Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL
DSTS c d Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk DSL

ENL AUTO c d Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL

ENLC card Enable S/T-Interface line (SILC) or U-Interface line (UILC) card
ENLU c d Enable specified unit Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7)
ENRB c d Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL
ENTS c d Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for the specified BRI Trunk DSL
ESTU c d Establish D-channel link for specified DSL

FDIS NCAL <c DSL#> <conn_id>

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection (as defined by
its connection ID number)

IDC card Print SILC/UILC card ID

PCON c d Print configuration and LAPD parameters for specified DSL

PERR card Print protocol log for specified card
PLOG c d Print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL
PMES c d Print Layer 3 message log for specified BRI Trunk DSL
PTAB c d Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for specified BRI
Trunk DSL
PTAB c d <tbl #> Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for
specified BRI Trunk DSL
PTRF c d Print traffic data for specified BRI Trunk DSL

RLBT c d Perform Remote Loop Back test on specified BRI Trunk DSL
RLSU c d Release D-channel link for specified DSL

STAT card Get status of specified SILC or UILC

STAT c d Get status of specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7)
STAT NCAL <c DSL#>
List all current call-independent connections on a given BRIT DSL

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 108 of 472 ISDN BRI BRSC commands

ISDN BRI BRSC commands

The following commands are available for the ISDN Basic Rate Signaling
Concentrator (BRSC) card, available with X11 Release 19 or later.
DISC BRI l s c Disable the BRSC ISDN BRI application.
DISC (BASE) l s c Disable specified card.

ENLC (BASE) l s c (FDL/NST) Enable specified card.

ENLC BRI l s c (FDL) Enable the BRSC ISDN BRI application.

IDC l s c Print BRSC card and loadware version.

STAT l s c Get status of specified card.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 109 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c. (not applicable for Release 22)

CONV tn, CONV c u xpe-15

Convert packed TN (in hex) to l s c u, or vice versa.
(Option 11)

CONV tn, CONV l s c u xpe-15

Convert packed TN (in hex) to l s c u, or vice versa. The
command format is:
• CONV tn - convert packed TN
• CONV l s c u - convert unpacked TN

CPWD c u Clear directory password for M3000 set. (Option 11) basic-1
M3903, M3904 and M3905 set with Release 24

CPWD l s c u Clear directory password for M3000 set. basic-1

Allows the M3000 Directory password of the specified M3000
set to be cleared. This allows a user to access the M3000
Directory if the password has been forgotten or if the user
wants to change the current password.
M3903, M3904 and M3905 set with Release 24

DIS AUTO c d Disable automatic link recovery option of a DSL (Option 11) bri-18

DIS AUTO l s c u Disable automatic link recovery option of a DSL. bri-18

DISC (app) card Disable application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling bri-18

Processor (MISP). (Option 11).
Where: appl =BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), BRIT (Basic
Rate Interface Trunk), or BRIE (UIPE Basic Rate Interface
Trunk)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 110 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DISC (appl) card REM bri-18

Disable and remove application from Multi-purpose ISDN
Signaling Processor (MISP). (Option 11)
Where: appl =BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), BRIT (Basic
Rate Interface Trunk), or BRIE (UIPE Basic Rate Interface
Trunk)

DISC (BASE) l s c Disable specified BRSC card. With X11 Release 19 and later, bri-18
this command is also used to disable the ISDN Basic Rate
Interface Signaling Concentrator (BRSC) card.
Where:
• BASE = Disable only the basecode. If not specified,
both the basecode and application are disabled. The
application is disabled first unless BASE is entered.
• l = loop
• s = shelf
• c = card

The card faceplate LED is turned on to indicate the card is

disabled, and the IPC channel is eliminated. The “.” prompt is
given when the process is complete.

DISC BRI l s c Disable the BRSC ISDN BRI application. This command is bri-18
available with X11 Release 19 and later. Where:
• BRI = the BRSC ISDN BRI application
• l = loop
• s = shelf
• c = card
All active and transient ISDN BRI calls are dropped, and all
signaling and packet channels are torn down. The DSL
software state remains the same, but the ISDN BRI line cards
receive a disable message.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 111 of 472

DISC card Disable specified DTR/MFR card. (Option 11) basic-1

This command is also used for Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling
Processor (MISP).
If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the
user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,
where # = unit 0-7
For Option 11C: DISC 0 disables all configured units on
card 0

DISC l s c Disable specified DTR/MFR card. basic-1

If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the
user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,
where # = unit 0-7

DISI card Disable specified card when it is idle. (Option 11) basic-1
If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the
user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,
where # = unit 0-7

DISI l s c Disable specified card when it is idle. basic-1

If BRI reference clock source is configured on this SILC the
user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON DSL #, PROCEED? ,
where # = unit 0-7

DISL (appl) loop Disable application on MISP loop. Where appl = bri-18
• BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), or
• BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk)
•
DISL (appl) loop 1 Disable MISP loop. bri-18
Where: appl =BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line), BRIT (Basic
Rate Interface Trunk), or BRIE (UIPE Basic Rate Interface
Trunk).
Applicable if SUPP package 131 is not equipped.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 112 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DISL (appl) loop (FDL) bri-18

Disable MISP application and loop. Where:
• appl = optional application name (BRIL)
• loop = loop number
• FDL = force download the application
With X11 Release 18, entering 1 rather than FDL force
downloads the application.

DISL (appl) loop REM bri-18

Disable and remove application from Multi-purpose ISDN
Signaling Processor (MISP). Applicable if SUPP package 131
is equipped.

DISL loop Disable network loop. See “Using the Enable/Disable basic-1
commands” in the introduction. This command is also used
for superloops and MISPs.

DISL sl Disable specified superloop. Active calls on the superloop will basic-21
be disconnected and line transfer will occur at the remote
end.

DISN loop Disable network card containing specified loop, where “loop”
is the number of the even or odd loop. Not applicable to
superloops.

DISR l s c u Disable specified DTR/MFR card or unit. The LED should be basic-21
lit on the XMFR card in response to this command.

DISS l s Disables specified shelf. See “Using the Enable/Disable basic-1

commands” in the introduction.

DISS m Disables specified module. Where: m = 0 for Main or m = 1-4 basic-1

for Expansion module. (Option 11) See “Using the
Enable/Disable commands” in the introduction.

DISU BRI l s c Disable ISDN BRI BRSC card. brit-19

DISU c d Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). (Option 11). bri-18
If BRI reference clock source is configured on the DSL, the
user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON THIS DSL, PROCEED?

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 113 of 472

DISU c u Disables specified unit. See “Using the Enable/Disable basic-1

commands” in the introduction. (Option 11)
For Option 11C: 0-15 may be accepted as input for card 0.

DISU l s c d Disable specified Digital Subscriber Loop 0-7. bri-18

If BRI reference clock source is configured on the DSL the
user will be prompted with:
CLOCK SOURCE ON THIS DSL, PROCEED?

DISU l s c u Disable specified unit. See “Using the Enable/Disable basic-1

commands” in the introduction.

DLIF card Download a UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to MISP card bri-18
(Option 11).

DLIF loop x Download an UIPE BRI trunk interface data file to a MISP bri-18
loop. The MISP specified must have the BRIT UIPE loadware
application. Where x may be:
• (0) = UIPE SL1
• 1 = ETSI QSIG
• 2 = ISO QSIG
• .
• .
• 28 = ETSI QSIG GF
• 29 = ISO QSIG GF
To achieve a successful download:
1. the MISP basecode must be enabled
2. the specified MISP must have the UIPE BRI trunk
loadware configured
3. the interface must be inactive (interpret this to mean
that either the UIPE BRI trunk application must be
disabled or no DSL of this interface type can be
enabled)

DSCT loop Disable automatic background continuity tests for a xpe-15

superloop.

DSIF L PDL2 l s c Disables the SAPI 16 interface number for BRSC on l s c for bri-19
the MPH on loop L.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 114 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DSIF L PDL2 L1 Disables SAPI 16 interface number for BRIL on Loop L1 for bri-19
MPH on loop L.

DSIF l s c DSL BCH x

Disables the link interface for B-channel x for DSL l s c bch. bri-19
Where: x = 1–2

DSIF l s c DSL DCH x

Disables the link interface number for USID x for the DSL on bri-19
l s c dch.

DSIF loop PDNI Y Disable the link interface number Y for PDNI on Loop Y (1-3) bri-19

DSNW loop Disable network card containing specified loop, where “loop” basic-1
is the number of the even or odd loop. Not applicable to
superloops.

DSPS x Disables Peripheral Signaling (PS) card x and loops serviced basic-1
by the card. Disabling PS card 0 interrupts service on loops
0 to 15. To re-enable the card, use the ENPS x command.
If this fails, a system initialization may be required. Use the
disable command with discretion. Disabling a PS card
disables up to 16 loops.

The following lists the group/PS/loop relationship:

Group PS Loops
0 0 0 to 15
0 1 16 to 31
1 2 32 to 47
1 3 48 to 63
2 4 64 to 79
2 5 80 to 95
3 6 96 to 111
3 7 112 to 127
4 8 128 to 143
4 9 144 to 159

DSRB c d Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL bri-18
(Option 11)

DSRB l s c d Disable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL bri-18

DSTS c d Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk bri-18
DSL (Option 11)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 115 of 472

DSTS l s c d Disable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk bri-18
DSL

DSXP x Disable Controller x and all connected cards. xpe-15

ENCT loop Enable automatic background continuity tests for loop. xpe-15

END Abort current test. Stops outputting. Stops current test. basic-1

ENIF L PDL2 l s c Enables the SAPI 16 interface number for BRSC on l s c for bri-19
MPH on loop L.

ENIF l s c DSL BCH x

Enables the link interface for B-channel x for DSL l s c bch. bri-19
Where: x = 1–2

ENIF l s c DSL DCH x

Enables the link interface number for USID x for the DSL on bri-19
l s c dch.

ENIF loop PDNI Y Enables the link interface number Y for PDNI on Loop Y (1-3). bri-19

ENL AUTO c d Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL (Option 11) bri-18

ENL AUTO l s c u Enable automatic link recovery option of a DSL. bri-18

ENLC (appl) card bri-18

Enable specified application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling
Processor (MISP) card. (Option 11). Where:
• appl = optional application name BRIL (Basic Rate
Interface Line) or BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk)

ENLC (appl) card FDL bri-18

Enable and force download loadware for specified application
on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card.
(Option 11). Where appl =
• BRIL (optional application name: Basic Rate Interface
Line), or
• BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk)
•
ENLC (BASE) l s c (FDL/NST) brit-19

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 116 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Enable specified card.

If the card resides on a disabled shelf, the status is output and
enable is not performed. If card has been disabled by
overload, the overload status entry is cleared.
Used to enable the ISDN Basic Rate Interface Signaling
Concentrator (BRSC) card. The command format is shown
here. ENLC (BASE) l s c u (FDL/NST)

Where:
• BASE = enable only the BRSC basecode. If not
specified, both the basecode and the application will be
enabled.
• l = loop
• s = shelf
• c = card
• FDL = force download the basecode
• NST = No self-test
The card faceplate is turned off to indicate the card is
enabled, and the IPC channel is built.

ENLC BRI l s c (FDL) brit-19

Enable the BRSC ISDN BRI application. Where:
• BRI = the BRSC ISDN BRI application
• l = loop
• s = shelf
• c = card
• FDL = force download the application

The application is force downloaded if:

— FDL is entered, or
— No application currently exists on the BRSC card, or
— There is a version number mismatch between the
applications in the software and on the card.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 117 of 472

ENLC card Enable and reset specified DTR/MFR card. (Option 11) basic-1
If the card resides on a disabled shelf, the status is output and
enable is not performed. If card has been disabled by
overload, the overload status entry is cleared.
This command is also used for Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling
Processor (MISP)., S/T-Interface (SILC), and U-Interface
(UILC) line cards.
For Release 21, this command causes the pack to perform a
self test. If the pack self test passes, the LED will blink 3
times. If it fails, the LED will be lit solidly. A XMI message will
be issued to indicate that the XMFR pack has powered up.
This command can be used to enable a XMFR card.
For Options 11C and 11E: ENLC 0 enables all units (0-15) on
card 0 if TDS 0 is already enabled. For Slot 0, the TDS must
first be enabled by entering the command ENLX 0 in LD 34.

ENLC card FDL Enable Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) and bri-18
force download basecode.(Option 11)

ENLC l s c Enable and reset specified DTR/MFR card. basic-1

If the card resides on a disabled shelf, the status is output and
enable is not performed. If card has been disabled by
overload, the overload status entry is cleared.
For Release 21, this command causes the pack to perform a
self test. If the pack self test passes, the LED will blink 3
times. If it fails, the LED will be lit solidly. A XMI message will
be issued to indicate that the XMFR pack has powered up.
This command can be used to enable a XMFR card.
This command is also used for the S/T-Interface (SILC) and
U-Interface (UILC) line cards.

ENLG x Enable group x. Equivalent to two ENPS commands. Refer to basic-1

DSPS command for the relationships of groups, PS cards and
loops.

ENLL (appl) loop Enable specified application on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling bri-18
Processor (MISP) loop. Where appl =
• BRIL (Basic Rate Interface Line) or
• BRIT (Basic Rate Interface Trunk)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 118 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENLL (appl) loop (FDL) bri-18

Enable MISP application, and loop. Where:
• appl = optional application name (BRIL)
• loop = loop number
• FDL = force download the application
For Release 18, entering 1 rather than FDL force downloads
the application.

ENLL (appl) loop FDL bri-18

Enable and force download loadware for specified application
on Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) loop.
Applicable if SUPP package 131 is equipped.

ENLL (appl) loop 1 bri-18

Enable MISP loop. Where:
• appl = optional application name (BRIL)
• 1 = force downloads the application
• Applicable if SUPP package 131 not equipped.

ENLL loop Enable network loop. basic-1

See “Using the Enable/Disable commands” in the
introduction. This command is also used for Multi-purpose
ISDN Signaling Processors (MISP).

ENLL loop FDL Enable MISP and force download basecode. bri-18

ENLL loop (v) Enable superloop, download peripheral software version v. If xpe-15
version v is not specified, the software downloaded is current
(c) or latest (l) version as defined in LD 97.

ENLL sl Enable specified Superloop. OK is output if the operation is basic-21

successful.

ENLN loop Enable network card with specified loop, where loop is the
even or odd numbered loop on the network card. Not
applicable to superloops.

ENLR c u Enable the specified DTR/MFR card. (Option 11) basic-21

Meridian 1 software will issue a message to request XMFR to
perform an echo test only when ENLR is issued to enable the
XMFR card.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 119 of 472

ENLR l s c u Enable the specified DTR/MFR card. basic-21

Meridian 1 software will issue a message to request XMFR to
perform an echo test only when ENLR is issued to enable the
XMFR card.

ENLS l s Enable specified shelf. Where: l = loop and s = shelf. If the basic-1
shelf is disabled by overload, the overload status entry is
cleared.

ENLS m Enable the specified module. (Option 11). Where: m = 0 for basic-1
base module or m = 1-4 for expansion module. If the module
is disabled by overload, the overload status entry is cleared.

ENLU c d Enable Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7) (Option 11) bri-18

ENLU c u Enable specified unit. (Option 11) basic-1

ENLU c u accepts units 0-15 as input. Units can only be
enabled if TDS 0 is enabled.
For Options 11E and 11C: For Slot 0, the TDS must first be
enabled by entering the command ENLX 0 in LD 34.

ENLU l s c d Enable Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). bri-18

ENLU l s c u Enable specified unit. basic-1

If the unit resides on a disabled shelf or card, the status is
output and enable is not performed. If the unit to be enabled is
a 500/2500 message waiting telephone, test the unit prior to
enabling.

ENNW loop Enable network card with specified loop, where loop is the basic-1
even or odd numbered loop on the network card. Not
applicable to superloops.

ENPS x Enables PS card x and all loops that were enabled at time of basic-1
last DSPS command. Refer to DSPS command to find the
relationships of groups, PS cards and loops.

ENRB c d Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18
(Option 11)

ENRB l s c d Enable Remote Loop Back for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 120 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENTS c d Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk bri-18
DSL. (Option 11)

ENTS l s c d Enable Remote Loop Back test mode for specified BRI Trunk bri-18
DSL.

ENXP x (v) Enable Controller x and associated PE cards, download xpe-15

software version v.
Enable all PE cards connected to Controller x and the
Controller itself. If version v is not specified, the software
downloaded to the Controller is current (c) or latest (l) version
as defined in LD 97.

ENXP XPC x (v) Enable Controller x, do not enable the associated PE cards, xpe-15
download software version v.
The cards connected to the Controller are not enabled by this
command. If version v is not specified, the software
downloaded to the Controller is current (c) or latest (l) version
as defined in LD 97.

ESTU c d Establish D-channel link for the specified Digital Subscriber bri-18
Loop (0-7). (Option 11)

ESTU l s c d Establish D-channel link for the specified Digital Subscriber bri-18
Loop (0-7).

FDIS NCAL <c DSL#> <conn_id> qsig gf-22

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection
(as defined by its connection ID number)
Note that the command format for an Option 11C is:
STAT NCAL <c 0 0 DSL#><conn_id#>

FDIS NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_id> qsig gf-22

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection
(as defined by its connection ID number)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 121 of 472

IDC card Print MISP or XPE card ID. (Option 11) bri-18
The MISP card ID output format is:
• CARDID: xxx. . . x
• BASECODE VERSION: xxx. . . x
• BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx. . . x
• BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx. . . x
The MISP card ID output format is:
• CARDID: xxx. . . x
• BASECODE VERSION: xxx. . . x
• BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx. . . x
• BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx. . . x

IDC l s c Print BRSC card and loadware version. brit-19

This command, with X11 Release 19 and later, queries the
BRSC card ID, the basecode, and the application version
number. Where: l = loop, s = shelf, and c = card.
Output example:
• BOOTCODE VERSION xx . . . x
• BASECODE VERSION xx . . . x
• BRI APPL VERSION xx . . . x

IDC l s c Print MISP or XPE card ID. bri-18

The MISP card ID output format is:
• CARDID: xxx. . . x
• BASECODE VERSION: xxx. . . x
• BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx. . . x
• BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx. . . x
The XPE card ID output format is:
=> XXXX CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS

Where:
• XXXX = card type (i.e., XDTR, XUT, etc.)
• CCCCCCCC = order code
• RR = release number
• SSSS = is the serial number

IDC l s c d Print ID of Digital Subscriber Loop 0-7. bri-18

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 122 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

IDC sl For Copper Connections in Release 21: xpe-15

Print Network ID and Controller for a superloop.
Output format for superloop card ID:
XNET VERS => xxx
RUNNING FROM yyy
FW IS SANE
CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS
XPEC0 VERS => xxx
RUNNING FROM yyy
FW IS SANE
XPECz CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS
XPEC1 VERS => xxx
RUNNING FROM yyy
FW IS SANE
XPECz CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS
Where:
• xxx = loadware version
• yyy = RAM or ROM
• z = 2 or 4
• CCCCCCCC = order code
• RR = release number
• SSSS = is the serial number

IDC sl For Carrier Connections in Release 21: rem_ipe-21

Get card id of Local Carrier Interface (LCI) superloop and its
associated Remote Carrier Interface (RCI).
Output format for LCI superloop card ID:
LCI VERS => xxx
FW IS SANE
aaaaaaaaaaaa
Output format for RCI superloop card ID:
XPEC VERS=>xxx
FW IS SANE
aaaaaaaaaaaa
Where:
• xxx = loadware version
• aaaaaaaaaaaa = contents of ID EEPROM (LCI or
RCI)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 123 of 472

IDC sl For Fibre Connections in Release 22: rem_ipe-22

Print card ID of optical packets and main boards for Fibre
superloop and associated Controller(s)
The output format for the superloop card ID including optical
packets is:
FNET VERS => xxx
FW IS SANE
aaaaaaaaaaaaa
PRIM: pppppppp
SEC: ssssssss
XPEC VERS => xxx
FW IS SANE
aaaaaaaaaaa
PRIM: pppppppp
SEC: ssssssss
Where:
1. xxx = loadware version
2. aaaaaaaaaaaaa = contents of ID EEPROM (FNET
or FPEC)
3. PRIM: pppppppp = contents of ID EEPROM primary
packet (if present)
4. SEC: ssssssss = contents of ID EEPROM secondary
packet (if present)

IDC l s c Print card ID for PE card. The format is: xpe-15

IDC l s c — print ID of specified line card
The format of the card ID is CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS, where:
• CCCCCCCC = order code
• RR = release number
• SSSS = serial number

For example, a Network Card (NT8D04AA) with a release of

01 and serial number of 00001 will have a card ID with:
NT8D04AA-010001
For BRI MISP cards, the output is:
• CARDID: xxx...x
• BASECODE VERSION: xxx...x
• BRI LINE/TRUNK VERSION: xxx...x
• BOOTCODE VERSION: xxx...x

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 124 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

IDCS x Print card ID for all cards on shelf controlled by Controller x. xpe-15
The card ID for all cards in shelf controlled by Controller x is
output. The XPE card ID output format is:
=> XXXX CCCCCCCC-RRSSSS
Where:
• XXXX = card type (i.e., XDTR, XUT, etc.)
• CCCCCCCC = order code
• RR = release number
• SSSS = is the serial number

IDU c d Print set ID for Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7) (Option 11) bri-18

IDU l s c d Print set ID for Digital Subscriber Loop d (0-7) bri-18

IDU c u Print set ID (Option 11) basic-1

IDU l s c u Print set ID. Print ID applies to the following set types: M2006, xpe-15
M2008, M2016, M2216 and M2616.
The output format of the set ID (M2008 for example) is:
• ARIES TN: l s c u
• TN ID CODE: M2008
• NT CODE: NT2K08WC
• COLOR CODE: xx
• RLS CODE: xx
• SER NUM xxxxxx (X11 Release 18 and later)
The color codes are:
• 03 is black
• 35 is chameleon ash
• 93 is dolphin grey

LBSY l s List TNs of all busy units on specified shelf. basic-1

LBSY m List TNs of all busy units in specified module. (Option 11). basic-16
Where: m = 0 for Base module or 1 for Expansion module.

LDIS l s List TNs of all disabled units on specified shelf. basic-1

LDIS m List TNs of all disabled units on specified module. (Option 11). basic-16
Where: m = 0 for Base module or 1 for Expansion module.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 125 of 472

LIDL l s List TNs of all idle units on specified shelf. basic-1

LIDL m List TNs of all idle units in specified module. (Option 11).
Where: m = 0 for Base module or 1 for Expansion module.

LLBD l s Lists TNs of all 500/2500-type units for specified loop and basic-1
shelf with message waiting lamps seen by the system as
defective (not available after Release 5. 24).

LMNT l s List TNs of all maintenance busy units on specified shelf. basic-1

LMNT m List TNs of all maintenance busy units on specified module.

(Option 11). Where: m = 0 for Base module or m = 1 for
Expansion module.

MFR c Test all MFR units on card c basic-21

During the MFR test, faulty MFR/XMFR packs are disabled
and MFRxxx error messages are output.

MFR c u Test specified MFR card or unit. basic-21

During the MFR test, faulty MFR/XMFR packs are disabled
and MFRxxx error messages are output.

MFR l s c u Test specified MFR card or unit. basic-21

During the MFR test, faulty MFR/XMFR packs are disabled
and MFRxxx error messages are output.

MFR l Test all MFR units on loop l basic-21

During the MFR test, faulty MFR/XMFR packs are disabled
and MFRxxx error messages are output.

MFR <cr> Test all MFR units basic-21

During the MFR test, faulty MFR/XMFR packs are disabled
and MFRxxx error messages are output.

PBXH Message Waiting lamp maintenance. basic-1

PBXT (c u), ALL basic-1

Tests 500/2500 Message Waiting lamp on specified card or
unit. This is required after failed lamp is fixed. (Option 11)

PBXT ALL Test all Message Waiting lamps. basic-5

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 126 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

PBXT l (s c u) Tests 500/2500 Message Waiting lamp on specified loop, basic-5

shelf, card or unit. This is required after failed lamp is fixed.

PCON c d Upload and print configuration and LAPD parameters for bri-18
specified DSL. (Option 11)

PCON l s c d Upload and print configuration and LAPD parameters for bri-18
specified DSL. This command requires the specified DSL to
be configured for the BRI Trunk Application. See example
below:
PCON 6 0 0 6
.DSL: 6 0 0 6 LINL PARAM CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10
INTERFACE: SL-1
OPER MODE: USR
T200: 2
T203: 20
N200: 3
N201: 260
K: 1
PROT #: 1

PERR card Upload and print Layer 2 error log for specified SILC, UILC or bri-18
MISP card. (Option 11)

PERR loop Upload and print Layer 2 error log for specified MISP. bri-18

PERR l s c Upload and print Layer 2 error log for specified SILC or UILC. bri-18
This command requires the specified MISP or line card to be
configured for the BRIT Application.
If error log is requested for a line card the error log for each
DSL is printed. If error log is requested for a MISP the
application global log is also printed.
Interpretation of error logs:
1st byte is DSL number or “80” for Application log.
2nd byte is number of non-zero logs.
If errors were logged the subsequent information is printed for
each error type:
• 3rd byte is counter type code
• 4th byte is “HIGH” byte of count
• 5th byte is “LOW” byte of count

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 127 of 472

Examples follow :
PERR 6
.DSL: 6 0 0 6 ERR LOG CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10
00 00 01 00 06 00 07 00
^ ^ ^ ^
DSL 0 DSL 1 DSL 6 DSL 7 (no errors
for all DSLs)

PERR 3
.DSL: 5 0 0 2 ERR LOG CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10
80 01 4D 00 09
Where:
• 1st byte - 80 - indicates Application global log
• 2nd byte - 01 - is number of error logs
• 3rd byte - 4D - is counter type code
• 4th bye - 00 - is “HIGH” byte count
• 5th byte - 09 - is “LOW” byte counts for all DSLs

PLOG c d Upload and print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18
(Option 11)

PLOG l s c d Upload and print protocol log for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18
The protocol log keeps record of up to 32 protocol types. Only
non-zero counters are uploaded and printed.
This command requires the specified MISP or line card to be
configured for the BRIT Application. See example below:
PLOG 6 0 0 6
.DSL: 6 0 0 6 PROTOCOL CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10
17 117 <--Counter 17 shows 117 SABME frames
received with incorrect C/R bit
18 141 <--Counter 18 shows 141 supervisory
frames received with F=1
19 84 <--Counter 19 shows 84 unsolicited DM
responses with F=1

PMES c d Upload and print Layer 3 message log for specified DSL. bri-18
(Option 11)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 128 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

PMES l s c d Upload and print Layer 3 message log for specified DSL. This bri-18
command requires the specified DSL to be configured for the
BRI Trunk Application.
Each time a valid Layer 3 message is received by the MISP, a
counter for that particular message is incremented. The log
keeps track of up to 20 message types.
Only non-zero items are uploaded and printed. Making trunk
calls will create a printable log. In the following example, 2
calls were made:

PMES 6 0 0 6
.DSL: 6 0 0 6 MSG LOG CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10
ALERT: 2
PROC: 2
CONNECT: 2
DISCONN: 2
REL COP: 2

PTAB c d Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for bri-18
specified BRI trunk DSL. (Option 11)

PTAB l s c d Upload and print Layer 3 Message configuration IE table for bri-18
specified BRI trunk DSL. PTAB uploads what was
downloaded when the Application was enabled.

PTAB c d <tbl #> Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration IE bri-18
table for specified BRI trunk DSL.
Where: <tbl #> = table number. (Option 11)

PTAB l s c d <tbl #> bri-18

Upload and print specified Layer 3 Message configuration IE
table for specified BRI trunk DSL. PTAB uploads what was
downloaded when the Application was enabled.
Where: <tbl #> = table number.

PTRF c d Upload and print traffic report for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18
(Option 11)
The following traffic information is output:
CONNECTED NCALLS : Total number of established
call-independent connections

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 129 of 472

PTRF l s c d Upload and print traffic report for specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18
This command requires the specified DSL to be configured
for the BRI Trunk Application. See example below:

PTRF 6 0 0 6
.DSL: 6 0 0 6 TRAFFIC CONFIRM TIME: 0:02:10
PEAK_I_US: 0 <-- Peak link usage (over a 5 second period)
for incoming traffic since the last time the traffic data was
uploaded. An integer 0 - 100 which represents the percentage
of the link capacity used.
AVRG_I_US: 0 <-- Average link usage for incoming traffic
since the traffic was last uploaded.
PEAK_O_US: 0 <-- Peak link usage (over a 5 second period)
for outgoing traffic since the last time the traffic data was
uploaded. An integer 0 - 100 which represents the percentage
of the link capacity used.

AVRG_O_US: 0 <-- Average link usage for outgoing traffic

since the traffic was last uploaded.
TIME: 0 <-- time since last traffic upload query
CONNECTED CALL: 2 <-- number of successfully
connected trunk calls

RLBT c d Perform Remote Loop Back Test on specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18
(Option 11)

RLBT l s c d Perform Remote Loop Back Test on specified BRI Trunk DSL. bri-18

RLSU c d Release D-channel link for specified Digital Subscriber Loop bri-18
(0-7). (Option 11)

RLSU l s c d Release D-channel link for specified Digital Subscriber Loop bri-18
(0-7).

RMIF L PDL2 l s c Disables and removes the SAPI 16 interface number for bri-19
BRSC on l s c for MPH on loop L.

RMIF L PDL2 L1 Disables and removes the SAPI 16 interface number for BRIL bri-19
on Loop L1 for MPH on loop L.

RMIF l s c DSL BCH x bri-19

Disables and removes the link interface for B-channel x for
DSL l s c bch; where: x = 1–2

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 130 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

RMIF loop PDNI Y Disables and removes the link interface number Y for PDNI bri-19
on Loop Y (1-3)

SDLC l s c Get status of specified ISDLC card. basic-7

SDTR c u List status of specified DTR/MFR card or unit. basic-21

SDTR l s c u List status of specified DTR/MFR card or unit. basic-21

SDTR <cr> List status of all disabled DTR/MFR units basic-21

STAT Get status of all configured loops in system basic-1

STAT (appl) card Get status of MISP card and application. (Option 11) See bri-18
STAT (appl) loop for possible responses.

STAT (card) Get status of all cards or (specified card). (Option 11) See basic-1
STAT (loop) and STAT l s c for possible responses.
For Option 11C: STAT 0 provides the status of TDS 0 and
units 0-15 for card 0.

STAT c d Get status of specified DSL. (Option 11) bri-18

See STAT l s c d for possible responses.

STAT c u Get status of specified unit. (Option 11) See STAT l s c u basic-1
command for possible responses.
For Option 11C: STAT c u accepts units 0-15 as input for
card 0.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 131 of 472

STAT (appl) loop Get status of MISP loop and application. bri-18
If appl = BRIL, the status of the BRI Line application is output.
If appl = BRIT, the status of the BRI Trunk application is
output.
Typical response is:
loop = MISP loop for non-Option 11
mm DSBL nn BUSY
MISP lll : ENBL ACTIVATED timestamp
BRIL : ENBL
BRIT : ENBL
If the card has been manually disabled, the response is:
loop = MISP loop for non-Option 11
DISABLED RESPONDING
MAN DSBL

If the card has been disabled by the system, the response is:
loop = MISP loop for non-Option 11
DISABLED RESPONDING
SYS DSBL - aaa...a
Where aaa...a is the reason as follows:
a BOOTLOADING = basecode is being downloaded to
the MISP
b FATAL ERROR = MISP has a serious problem
c OVERLOAD = MISP overload (card inoperable)
d RESET THRESHOLD = too many resets (card
inoperable)
e SELF TESTING = card is performing self-test
f SELFTEST FAILED = self-test failed
g SELFTEST PASSED = successfully completed
self-test
h SHARED RAM TEST FAILED = MISP memory
problem (card inoperable)
i STUCK INTERRUPT = MISP hardware failure
(replace card)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 132 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

With the STAT BRIL or STAT BRIT option, the response is

one of the following:
1. APPLICATION ENBL
2. APPLICATION NOT CONFIGURED
3. APPLICATION NOT RESPONDING
4. APPLICATION MAN DSBL (manually disabled)
5. APPLICATION SYS DSBL - aaa..a (system
disabled)

Where: aaa...a is the reason as follows:

a CLOSED = application is closed by basecode on the
card
b CLOSED ERR = error in closing the application
c CORRUPTED = application is corrupted on the card
d DOWNLOADING = application is being downloaded
e ENABLED = application is in active state
f INACTIVE = application is in inactive state
g MNT BUSY = application is in maintenance busy
state
h WAIT DSBL = application is in process of being
disabled
i WAIT ENABLE = application is in process of being
enabled
j WAIT ERASE = application is being erased from the
card
k WAIT REMOVE = application is being removed from
the card

STAT (loop) Give status of one or all loops. Response is one of the basic-1
following:
1. x BUSY, y DSBL = loop enabled with x channels busy
and y channels disabled.
2. UNEQ = loop unequipped.
3. CTYF: l1 l2 = loop specified in STAT command is
unable to receive data from loops l1, l2, etc. (i.e.,
continuity test failed in most recent LD 45 loop test).
Probable fault in network card.
4. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = loop disabled. Network
card not responding. Card missing, disabled by switch
or faulty.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 133 of 472

5. DSBL: RESPONDING = loop disabled but the network

card responds. loop may have been disabled due to:
a manual request (DISL)
b associated Peripheral Signaling card being disabled
c overload condition on associated loop
Note 1: Overload conditions are indicated by OVD messages. An
attempt to enable a loop which was disabled due to overload may
result in a recurrence of the overload condition: the system's service
may be impaired for about 2 minutes.
Note 2: For MISP loops see STAT (appl) loop command.

STAT l s Get idle, busy or disabled status of units on specified shelf. basic-1
Displays number of units idle, busy, disabled and
maintenance busy for the specified shelf.

STAT l s c Get status of any specified PE/IPE card. (e.g., digital line, bri-18
analog, DTR, etc.)
When getting the status of a card relating to a trunk error
(STAT), the term RVSD may appear with the trunk
information. RVSD indicates that the software has detected a
reversed wired trunk for that unit.
When getting the status of a card where ACD sets are
defined, the printout will include MSB LOG OUT, MSB LOG
IN, LOG IN, OR LOG OUT, according to the ACD set state.
The output format for either a S/T-Interface line card (SILC) or
an U-Interface line card (UILC) is:
For BRI trunks:
ll = UNIT ll = DSL/UNIT number on the card =
swstate type L2_state L1_state dch_state clk
(mode)

For BRI lines:

ll = UNIT ll = DSL/UNIT number on the card =
swstate type L2_state L1_state
If you are analyzing a SILC or an UILC card, Table 16 on
page 135 lists and defines output fields and field responses.
An output example can be found page 134.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 134 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

The output format for an ISDN BRI card is: brsc/basic-19

loop = UNIT sw_state DSL misp_state LC_state

With ISDN BRI BRSC cards, the basecode and application
status are output.

APPLICATION MAIN STATE SUB STATE/ACTIVATION

TIME

+---------------------+------------------------+---------------------------------------+
BASECODE ENABLED xx/xx/xx x:xx
BRI ENABLED xx/xx/xx x:xx

+---------------------+-------------------------+--------------------------------------+
IDLE 0 BUSY 0 DISABLED 8
MSBY 0
TOTAL DSLS CONFIGURED 8
If you are analyzing an ISDN BRI card , see “STAT l s c d”
command for a list of possible states.

Output Example:
00 = UNIT 00 = IDLE LINE ESTA UP
01 = UNIT 01 = IDLE TRNK ESTA UP ESTA SREF (TE)
02 = UNIT 02 = IDLE LINE ESTA DOWN
03 = UNIT 03 = UNEQ
04 = UNIT 04 = UNEQ
05 = UNIT 05 = UNEQ
06 = UNIT 06 = DSBL TRNK DSBL UNEQ RLS (NT)
7 = UNIT 07 = DSBL TRNK DSBL UNEQ RLS (TE)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 135 of 472

Table 16: STAT l s c Field and Response Definitions

Field Field Definition Response Response Definition

swstate state of DSL/UNIT in IDLE no active call

software BUSY active with a call
UNEQ unequipped
MBSY maintenance busy
type DSL type LINE BRI line
TRNK BRI trunk
L2_state Layer 2 state of DSL/UNIT in UNEQ unequipped
MISP loadware IDLE no active call
BUSY active with a call
MBSY maintenance busy
DSBL disabled
ESTA D-channel link is established
RLSU D-channel link is released
TEST test mode
RLBT remote loop back
APDB application disabled
MPDB associated MISP disabled
MPNR associated MISP not responding
UTSM unable to send message to MISP
L1_state Layer 1 state of line card UNEQ unequipped
DOWN Layer 1 is down
LCNR line card not responding
UP Layer 1 is up
UNDN undefined DSL state
XPDB Associated XPEC is disabled
UTSM unable to send message to MISP
dch_state State of D-channel link in ESTA D-channel link is established
software RLSU D-channel link is released
TEST-IDLE test mode idle
TEST-RLBT test mode remote loop back
clk Clock mode DSBL disabled
PREF primary reference
SREF secondary reference
mode Layer 1 mode of DSL NT Network Termination
TE Terminal Equipment

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 136 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT l s c d Get status of specified Digital Subscriber Loop (0-7). bri-18

When getting the status of an unit where ACD sets are defined,
the printout will not include MSB LOG OUT, MSB LOG IN, LOG
IN, OR LOG OUT, according to the ACD set state.
If SUPP package 131 is not equipped, Tthe output format is:
DSL sw_state misp_state lc_state B1 status
B2 status

If SUPP package 131 is equipped, the output format is:

DSL type: swstate L2_state L1_state dch_state
clk b1_state b2_state

Table 17 defines output fields. Table 18 on page 137 lists and

defines possible responses. when SUPP package 131 is not
equipped. Table 19 on page 138 lists and defines possible
responses when SUPP package 131 is equipped.
Table 17
STAT l s c d Field Definitions

Field Definition

sw_state DSL software state

misp_state DSL state on the MISP card
lc_state DSL state on the BRI line card

swstate State of DSL/UNIT in software

L2_state Layer 2 state of DSL/UNIT in MISP loadware
L1_state Layer 1 state of line card
dch_state* State of D-channel link in software
clk* Clock mode
b1_state State of first B-channel
b2_state State of second B-channel

* these fields are output only for BRI trunks

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 137 of 472

Table 18
STAT l s c d Response Definitions: SUPP package 131 is not equipped

Response Definition

APDB MISP call application is disabled

BUSY Call is active
DOWN Link layer is not established
DSBL DSL is disabled
ESTA Link layer is established
IDLE No active calls
LCNR Line card is not responding
MBSY DSL is in maintenance busy mode
MPDB MISP is disabled
MPNR MISP not responding or message is lost
NTAN DSL is not assigned to a MISP
RLS Link layer is not established
UNDN DSL is in an undefined state
UNEQ Unequipped
UP Link layer is established
UTSM CPU is unable to send message to MISP
or line card
XTDB Superloop is disabled
XPDB Controller is disabled

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 138 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Table 19: STAT l s c d Response Definitions when SUPP package 131 is equipped

Field Response Definition

type LINE BRI line

TRNK BRI trunk

swstate IDLE no active call

BUSY active with a call
UNEQ unequipped
MBSY maintenance busy

L2_state UNEQ unequipped

IDLE no active call
BUSY active with a call
MBSY maintenance busy
DSBL disabled
ESTA D-channel link is established
RLSU D-channel link is released
TEST test mode
RLBT remote loop back
APDB application disabled
MPDB associated MISP disabled
MPNR associated MISP not responding
UTSM unable to send message to MISP

L1_state UNEQ unequipped

DOWN Layer 1 is down
LCNR line card not responding
UP Layer 1 is up
UNDN undefined DSL state
XPDB associated XPEC is disabled
UTSM unable to send message to MISP

dch_stat ESTA D-channel link is established

e
RLSU D-channel link is released
TEST-IDLE test mode idle
TEST-RLBT test mode remote loop back
(Part 1 of 2)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 139 of 472

Table 19: STAT l s c d Response Definitions when SUPP package 131 is equipped

Field Response Definition

clk DSBL disabled

PREF primary reference
SREF secondary reference

b1_state UNEQ unequipped

BUSY active with a call
DSBL disabled
MBSY maintenance busy
IDLE no active call

b2_state UNEQ unequipped

BUSY active with a call
DSBL disabled
MBSY maintenance busy
IDLE no active call
(Part 2 of 2)

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 140 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT l s c u Get status of specified unit. Table 20 on page 140 lists and basic-1
defines possible responses to STAT lscu. The response may be
normal, abnormal, or caused by an invalid equipment choice.
Table 20
STAT lscu Responses
Type Response Definition

Normal IDLE Idle

MBSY Maintenance busy
DSBL Disabled
DSBL Virtual terminal on Meridian 1 / Meridian SL-1 disabled by
Server
BUSY In use by call processing
BUSY BARRED Barring is applied to trunk with BARA Class of Service
UNEQ Terminal not defined in software
L500 Line is 500/2500 type
MBCS Maintenance set
BCS Normal SL-1 telephone
TRK Trunk
ATTN Attendant console
DTR Digitone Receiver
PWR Console power unit
Abnormal CARD x DSBL (OVD) Card x disabled due to overload
DND xxx xxx Do Not Disturb feature is active
SHELF DSBL Shelf disabled due to overload
(OVD)
SIG FAULT Outgoing signal fault detected on PS card under examination.
WARNING: CRPTR TN's data is corrupted. Check BUG messages relating to the
NOT IN RANGE TN.
Responses caused by invalid equipment choice:
EXT DSBL Extender disabled
LOOP NOT TERM Loop is not a terminal loop
LOOP UNEQ Loop is unequipped
SHELF UNEQ Shelf is unequipped
SHELF UNEQ No 500 cards on shelf
W/PBX CARDS
CARD UNEQ Card is unequipped
CARD NOT PBX Card is not a PBX card
UNIT UNEQ FOR MW Unequipped for Message Waiting
PER UNEQ PS card is unequipped
UNIT UNEQ Unit is unequipped

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 141 of 472

STAT NCAL <c DSL#> qsig gf-22

List all current call-independent connections on a given BRIT
DSL. (Option 11)
The response format is as follows:
• NCALL CONN ID: a number in the range of 1-9999 that
identifies the call independent connection on a given
DSL
• CREF: call reference number in HEX identifying
independent connection
• STATE: current state of all call-independent connections
(IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST)
• TIME: year month day hour:minute:second (the time
when call independent connection request is made)
• APPL: applications using the call-independent
connection (e.g., NACD, NMS,...)
• ORIG: originator
• DEST: destination
Note that the command format for an Option 11C is:
STAT NCAL <c 0 0 DSL#>

STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#> qsig gf-22

List all current call-independent connections on a given BRIT
DSL.
The response format is as follows:
• NCALL CONN ID: a number in the range of 1-9999 that
identifies the call independent connection on a given
DSL
• CREF: call reference number in HEX identifying
independent connection
• STATE: current state of all call-independent connections
(IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST)
• TIME: year month day hour:minute:second (the time
when call independent connection request is made)
• APPL: applications using the call-independent
connection (e.g., NACD, NMS,...)
• ORIG: originator
• DEST: destination
To enter this command, QsigGF package 305 is required.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 142 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT NCAL <l s c DSL#> <conn_ID> qsig gf-22

List information pertaining to a specific call-independent
connection (as defined by its connection ID)
The response format is as follows:
• NCALL CONN ID: a number in the range of 1-9999 that
identifies the call independent connection on a given
DSL
• CREF: call reference number in HEX identifying
independent connection
• STATE: current state of all call-independent connections
(IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST)
• TIME: year month day hour:minute:second (the time
when call independent connection request is made)
• APPL: applications using the call-independent
connection (e.g., NACD, NMS,...)
• ORIG: originator
• DEST: destination
To enter this command, QsigGF package 305 is required.

STAT NWK loop basic-1

Check status of network card with specified loop, where loop is
the even or odd numbered loop on the network card.

STAT PER x Get status of PS card x. basic-1

If the PS card is disabled, the response is changed from DSBL
to either:
1. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = PS card x is either missing,
faulty or disabled via the faceplate switch.
• If there is a fault in the extender pair for the network
shelf, the status of the PS card will also be:
DSBL: NOT RESPONDING.
2. DSBL: RESPONDING = The PS card is disabled and
responding to the CPU. The PS may have been disabled
by manual request (DSPS) or the associated extender
pair may have been manually disabled.
If neither of these conditions exists, the card may have been
disabled because of an overload condition on the associated
shelf. Check for OVD messages appearing in previous TTY
output.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 32
Alphabetical list of commands Page 143 of 472

An attempt to enable a PS card which was disabled because of

an overload may result in a recurrence of the overload
condition: the system's service may be impaired for
approximately 2 minutes.

STAT sl Get current status of superloop and separate carriers on that rem_ipe-21
superloop, based on data previously sent by the Carrier
Interface F/W (LCIM).
For each carrier, the following fields will be displayed:
S/W State, SPARE Status, NND Status, TSA (Time
Slot Availability) and CALS.
TTSA = Number of Traffic Timeslots currently available for voice
and data calls out of a possible: 21 for T-1 and 27 for T-E.
SPARE Status indicates whether the carrier is spared and
which carrier it is spared in.
NND Status indicates whether new data calls are disallowed
on the timeslots being transmitted by the carrier.

STIF L PDL2 l s c bri-19

Displays link status for SAPI 16 interface of BRSC l s c for MPH
on loop L.

STIF L PDL2 L1 bri-19

Displays the link status for SAPI 16 interface of BRIL L1 for
MPH on loop L.

STIF l PDNI y Displays the link status for interface Y for PDNI. bri-19
Where: Loop Y = 1-3

STIF l s c DSL DCH x bri-19

Displays the link status for B-channel X for the DSL l s c D.
Where: BCH stands for B-channel and X = 1–2.

SUPL (loop) Print data for all or specified superloop(s). xpe-15

TRK c u Seize specified trunk for outpulsing. (Option 11) basic-1

TRK l s c u Seize specified trunk for outpulsing. basic-1

Command is valid at a maintenance telephone only. The
specified trunk is connected to the maintenance telephone and
a test call may be performed on the trunk. When the test call is
completed, access sequence SPRE 91 must be redialed to use
the maintenance telephone to input more commands.

X11 Maintenance
LD 32
Page 144 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

XNTT loop Do self-test of Network card for specified superloop. The xpe-15
Network card must be disabled before the self-test.

XPCT x Do self-test on Controller x. The NT8D01 Controller must be xpe-15

disabled before the self-test.

XPEC (x) Print data for all or specified Controller(s). xpe-15

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

158

LD 33 LD 33
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 145 of 472

LD 33: Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic

for 1.5 Mb/s RPE and Fibre Remote IPE
This module contains commands to perform diagnostic tests of 1.5 Mb/s
remote peripheral equipment and fibre remote intelligent peripheral
equipment.

Note: Program 33 is not supported on Option 11 systems.

1.5 Mb/s RPE diagnostic

The 1.5 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic (RPD) is loaded
manually or as one of the daily routines. It should be included in the daily
routines for any system having Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE).

Program operation during daily routines

When loaded as part of the daily routines, the program will, for each RPE
loop in the system:
— reset internal counts of carrier failures which are used to determine
whether carriers should be automatically re-enabled if a temporary
carrier fault occurs
— test the connection memory on the local network pack
— test the signaling channel to the Local Carrier Buffer (LCB) pack
— test the connection memory of the Remote Peripheral Switch (RPS) pack
— test the continuity of the speech path to the remote site using all idle
channels
— switch the primary carrier function from the current primary carrier to the
other one, then repeat the above tests

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 146 of 472 1.5 Mb/s RPE diagnostic

If faults are detected during the above tests, the primary carrier is selected to
give the greatest number of working speech timeslots, provided that the
signaling channel works on this carrier.

Purpose of 1.5 Mb/s RPE commands

When loaded manually, the program may be used to:
— conduct a test of a specific RPE loop, similar to the automatic tests
— enable or disable a RPE loop, or either carrier associated with a RPE loop
— enable or disable the automatic carrier status monitoring function on a
RPE loop
— give timeslot numbers of speech channels which could not be
successfully transmitted by a specified carrier
— switch the primary carrier function from one carrier to the other
— obtain the status of RPE loops and/or carriers
— obtain a list of equipped RPE loops
— clear minor alarms and the maintenance display on the active CPU

Speech timeslots used by each carrier

If primary carrier = 0
— Speech channels carried by primary carrier = 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 20, 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
— Speech channels carried by secondary carrier = 2, 3, 8, 9, 16-19, 24, 25

If primary carrier = 1
— Speech channels carried by primary carrier = 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16,
17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29
— Speech channels carried by secondary carrier = 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 22,
23, 30, 31

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 33
Fibre Remote IPE diagnostic Page 147 of 472

Fibre Remote IPE diagnostic

The craftsperson may complete any of the following Fibre Remote IPE
maintenance operations:

1 Enable or disable optical packlets.

2 Manually invoke protection switching, at the local or remote side.
3 Query status of cards and optical packlets.
4 Conduct the loop-back test on the optical receiver-transmitter (EOI) to
determine the source of the fault as being the optical fibre span or Fibre
remote equipment.
5 Run loopback test and continuity tests on optical interface.

Midnight routine operation

Overlay 33 can be scheduled to run at midnight if included in midnight
routines. The following actions take place during midnight operation:

1 Send Time of Day message to loadware (L/W).

2 Print performance monitoring report.
3 Run non-service-impacting test on the standby link.
4 Run MNSN and MNSP commands to cause protection switching. When
these commands are run, continuity tests check both links alternately.

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 148 of 472 Basic commands for 1.5 Mb/s RPE

Basic commands for 1.5 Mb/s RPE

CDSP Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Resets minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for all customers
CMIN c Resets minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)

DISC loop c Disable carrier c on RPE loop

DISI loop c Disable carrier c on RPE loop when idle
DISL loop Disable specified RPE loop
DISM loop Disable carrier status monitoring on RPE loop
END Abort current command
ENLC loop c Enable carrier c on RPE loop
ENLL loop Enable RPE loop
ENLM loop Enable carrier status monitoring on RPE loop
LDIS loop c List all speech channels that failed continuity test on RPE loop carrier c
LOOP loop Perform various tests on RPE loop
LRPE List all equipped RPE loops

NCAR loop Get number of “carrier status change” messages for RPE loop

SCAR loop Switch primary carrier on RPE loop

STAT Get number of busy channels on specified carrier in the active DISI request
STAT loop Get status of RPE loop
STAT loop ALL Get status of the RPE loop, carriers and RPS card
STAT loop c Give status of carrier c on RPE loop
STAT loop RPS x Get status of RPS card x on specified RPE loop

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 33
Basic commands for Fibre Remote IPE Page 149 of 472

Basic commands for Fibre Remote IPE

AHIN sl Print all history file (log file) of Fibre superloop sl
AHIP pc Print all history file of Fibre Peripheral Controller pc

CDSP Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Resets minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for all customers
CLPM sl Clears all performance monitoring counters of Fibre superloop sl (FNET)
and its associated FPEC

DSOP sl PRI Disable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Primary
DSOP sl SEC Disable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Secondary

ENOP sl PRI Enable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Primary
ENOP sl SEC Enable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Secondary

FDEF sl Query default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fibre superloop sl

FNET ALL Print current status of all Fibre superloops

FNET sl Print status of Fibre superloop sl (FNET) and its optical packlets

FNTT sl Test specified Fibre superloop sl (FNET)

FPCT pc Test specified Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC)
FPEC pc Print status of Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC) and its optical packlets

FSTA sl Print the transmission test status of Fibre superloop sl

FSTP sl Stop the transmission test. Print test status of Fibre superloop sl.
FTST sl test (h/m/s) Perform a transmission test of Fibre superloop sl for time h/m/s

MNSN sl Manual switch on Fibre superloop sl (FNET)

MNSP sl Manual switch on Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC)

NHIN sl Print new history file of Fibre superloop sl (FNET)

NHIP pc Print new history file of Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC)
PRPM sl Print performance monitoring report for Fibre superloop sl (FNET) and its
associated FPEC

SDEF sl LOC Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fibre superloop sl: MMI
mode (Local)
SDEF sl REM Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fibre superloop sl: SL-1
mode (Remote)

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 150 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

AHIN sl Print all history file (log file) of Fibre superloop sl. rem_ipe-22

AHIP pc Print all history file of Fibre Peripheral Controller pc. rem_ipe-22

CDSP Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. rpe-1

CLPM sl Clears all performance monitoring counters of Fibre superloop rem_ipe-22

sl (FNET) and its associated FPEC.

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Resets minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for all rpe-1
customers.

CMIN c Reset minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for rpe-1

customer c (not applicable for Release 22).

DISC loop c Disable carrier c on RPE loop. Any active calls using this rpe-1
carrier will be disconnected.

DISI loop c Disable carrier c on RPE loop when idle. rpe-1

Disables the carrier as soon as it has become idle. The number
of channels still busy on the carrier may be checked using the
STAT command. The message RPD018 indicates that the
disable operation is complete.

DISL loop Disable specified RPE loop. Any active calls on the loop are rpe-1
disconnected and line transfer occurs at the remote end.

DISM loop Disable carrier status monitoring on RPE loop. rpe-1

Carrier failures are not detected while this command is in
effect. The command is canceled by the ENLM or ENLL
commands.

DSOP sl PRI Disable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Primary. rem_ipe-22
If that link is active, protection switching occurs. If protection
switching is not available, and the FNET is enabled, the
command is refused.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 33
Alphabetical list of commands Page 151 of 472

DSOP sl SEC Disable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Secondary. rem_ipe-22
If that link is active, protection switching occurs. If protection
switching is not available, and the FNET is enabled, the
command is refused.

END Abort current command. If no command is in progress, the rpe-1

active DISI command (if any) is canceled.

ENLC loop c Enable carrier c on RPE loop. If the operation is successful, OK rpe-1
is output.

ENLL loop Enable RPE loop. Implies ENLM also. If the operation is rpe-1
successful, OK is output. If the loop is already enabled,
RPD007 is output.

ENLM loop Enable carrier status monitoring on RPE loop. rpe-1

ENOP sl PRI Enable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Primary. The rem_ipe-22
command fails if the packet is not physically there.

ENOP sl SEC Enable optical link of Fibre superloop sl, link Secondary. The rem_ipe-22
command fails if the packlet is not physically there.

FDEF sl Query default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fibre rem_ipe-22
superloop sl. The system response is:
FNET: L/R
FPEC: L/R
Where: L = local and R = remote

FNET ALL Print current status of all Fibre superloops. The same as rem_ipe-22
FNET sl but repeated for all Fibre superloops in the system.

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 152 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

FNET sl Print status of Fibre superloop sl (FNET) and its optical rem_ipe-22
packlets. The first line prints the general status of the card and
includes:
1. enable/disable status (known by Software)
2. PLL status
3. NNDC (indicates that new data calls are disallowed on
this superloop)
The next two lines print the status of the packlets:
1. enable/disable status (known by Firmware)
2. activity (if selected as active for incoming voice/data)
3. ALM_LVL - alarm level
4. ALM_EOI - alarm Electro-Optical Interface (EOI)
Presented below is an example of this general Output format,
showing possible values. Bold characters indicate fixed titles.

FNET: n enabled/disabled locked/unlocked NNDC/ <blank>

PACKLETS: F/W State Activity ALM_LVL ALM_EOI

Primary: enabled RCV unequipped Rx
disabled idle S.F. Tx
transmission tested S.D. Rx Tx
No alarm No alarm
Secondary: enabled RCV unequipped Rx
disabled idle S.F. Tx
transmission tested S.D. Rx Tx
No alarm No alarm

Where:
1. unequipped = the optical packlet is physically absent.
Firmware treats this as Signal Fail.
2. S.F. = Signal Fail = Out of service. Loadware either
switches to the other link or declares “No active link” if
Protection Switching (PS) was not possible.
3. S.D. = Signal Degradation = Deteriorated performance.
Firmware either switches to the other link, or else the
data calls are disallowed if Protection Switching (PS)
was not possible. Software handles this state as NNDC.
4. Rx = Receiver alarm
5. Tx = Transmitter alarm

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 33
Alphabetical list of commands Page 153 of 472

FNTT sl Test specified Fibre superloop sl (FNET). The Firmware rem_ipe-22

performs a self-test of hardware components and reports
results to software. Optical packlets, if present, are also tested.
If the FNET is enabled, only the non-active packlet is tested
without affecting service.
The response may be:
TEST PASSED or TEST FAILED REASON <reason#>

FPCT pc Test specified Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC). The rem_ipe-22

Firmware performs a self-test of hardware components and
reports results to software. Optical packlets, if present, are also
tested.
If the FPEC is enabled, only the non-active packlet is tested
without affecting service.
The response may be:
TEST PASSED or TEST FAILED REASON <reason#>

FPEC pc Print status of Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC) and its rem_ipe-22
optical packlets. The first line prints the general status of the
card. The next two lines print the status of the packlets. See
FNET description for more detail.

FSTA sl Print the transmission test status of Fibre superloop sl. rem_ipe-22

FSTP sl Stop the transmission test. Print test status of Fibre rem_ipe-22
superloop sl.

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 154 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

FTST sl test (h/m/s) rem_ipe-22

Perform specified transmission test of Fibre superloop sl for
time tm. Where:
1. test = 1 for FNET primary packlet ; 2 for FPEC primary
packlet ; 3 for FNET secondary packlet ; 4 for FPEC
secondary packlet
2. tm = H/M/S = test duration. This field is optional. The
duration can be either:
a H for hours (1-24)
b M for minutes (1-255)
c S for seconds (1-255)
If a duration is not entered, then Firmware performs a quick
test and reports the results to software. The system response
will then be TEST SUCCESS or TEST FAILED.
If duration is entered, then firmware starts testing and sends an
acknowledge message to software. The system response will
be TEST STARTED.
These transmission tests can only be executed on the standby
or disabled link.

LDIS loop c List all speech channels that failed continuity test on RPE loop, rpe-1
carrier c.
If no channels failed, response is NONE. The response is based
on the results of the most recent tests (via the LOOP
command) of the carrier.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 33
Alphabetical list of commands Page 155 of 472

LOOP loop Perform various tests on RPE loop. rpe-1

Performs the following tests:
1. tests idle timeslots of network connection memory
2. tests signaling channel to the LCB pack
3. tests idle timeslots of the RPS connection memory
4. tests speech continuity to remote site, using idle
channels
If all tests pass, system response is OK. Any connection
memory or channel faults detected results in the affected
channel being disabled.
To completely check the loop, this command may be run twice,
once with each carrier being primary, by using the SCAR
command between tests.
This command does not test signaling to PE packs on the loop.
To test signaling, use LD 30 or LD 45.

LRPE List all equipped RPE loops. If no RPE loops exist, the rpe-1
response is NONE.

MNSN sl Manual switch on Fibre superloop sl (FNET). The FNET rem_ipe-22

loadware switches between the active link and the standby
link.

MNSP pc Manual switch on Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC). The rem_ipe-22

FPEC loadware switches between the active link and the
standby link.

NCAR loop Get number of “carrier status change” messages for RPE loop. rpe-1
This outputs the number of messages received from the RPE
loop since the most recent running of the midnight routines,
initialize or loop enable.
Response is:
• LCB: XX
• CAR 0: YY, CAR 1: ZZ
The Local Carrier Buffer (LCB) pack gives the total number of
messages received. CAR 0 and CAR 1 indicate the number of
those messages which indicated a change of state of the
corresponding carrier. The count for each carrier is reset when
the carrier is manually enabled or at midnight.

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 156 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

A large number of messages received (particularly on one

carrier only), may indicate a transient fault on the affected
carrier.

NHIN sl Print new history file of Fibre superloop sl (FNET) rem_ipe-22

NHIP pc Print new history file of Fibre peripheral controller pc (FPEC) rem_ipe-22

PRPM sl Print performance monitoring report for Fibre superloop sl rem_ipe-22

(FNET) and its associated FPEC.

SCAR loop Switch primary carrier on RPE loop. rpe-1

This command is allowed only if the current non-primary carrier
is enabled, and no faults exist on the current non-primary
carrier (which would reduce the number of working speech
channels if it becomes the primary carrier).

SDEF sl LOC Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of Fibre rem_ipe-22
superloop sl : MMI mode (Local)

SDEF sl REM Set default MMI mode on FNET and FPEC of rem_ipe-22
Fibre superloop sl : SL-1 mode (Remote)

STAT Get number of busy channels on specified carrier in the active rpe-1
DISI request. If no DISI request is active, error code RPD022 is
output.

STAT loop Get status of RPE loop. rpe-1

Response will be one or more of the following:
1. x BUSY, x DSBL = number of busy/disabled speech
channels on the loop.
2. x NWK MEM FLTS = number of speech channels
disabled due to fault in connection memory of network.
3. LCB DSBL = carrier monitoring function of LCB pack
disabled
4. CTYF: l1 l2 = cannot receive speech from loops l1, l2,
etc., based on most recent test run by the background
diagnostic (LD 45).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 33
Alphabetical list of commands Page 157 of 472

5. DSBL: RESPONDING = loop is disabled but can still

communicate with the CPU. The loop may have been
disabled manually, as the result of the disabling of some
other pack (e.g., associated Peripheral Signaling pack)
or by an overload condition. If the loop was disabled
because of overload, the overload condition may recur if
the loop is re-enabled.
6. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = loop is disabled and cannot
communicate with the CPU. The Network pack may be
missing or faulty, or not responding because of the
removal or failure of other packs, e.g., CE extenders.

STAT loop ALL Get status of the RPE loop, carriers and RPS card. rpe-1
Response is:
x BUSY, y DSBL
CAR 0: x BUSY, y DSBL PRIME
CAR 1: x BUSY, y DSBL
RPS: x MEM FLTS
Where:
x BUSY, y DSBL = number of busy and disabled channels for
the RPE loop and each carrier (CAR0 and CAR1).
PRIME = indicates which carrier is currently the primary one.
RPS: x MEM FLTS = number of faults in the memory
connection of the RPS card.

STAT loop c Give status of carrier c on RPE loop. rpe-1

Response is one or more of:
1. x BUSY, y DSBL = number of busy channels and
number of channels having continuity failure on this
carrier
2. PRIME = indicated carrier is currently the primary one.
3. DSBL = carrier is disabled.
4. LOOP DSBL = loop is disabled.

STAT loop RPS x rpe-1

Get status of RPS card x on specified RPE loop.

X11 Maintenance
LD 33
Page 158 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Results are based on the most recent tests. Response is one

of:
1. x MEM FLTS = number of faults in the connection
memory of the RPS card
2. NOT RESPONDING = card failed to respond (this
message does not necessarily indicate a RPS fault)
3. LOOP DSBL = loop is disabled.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

172

LD 34 LD 34
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 159 of 472

LD 34: Tone and Digit Switch and

Digitone Receiver Diagnostic
This program tests circuit cards used in generating and detecting tones in the
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 system. If loaded automatically in background or
as part of the daily routines, it tests the hardware and performs fault detection
and isolation. If invoked manually, commands can be issued to conduct the
entire test or only certain parts of the test and to change card status.

The program tests the following circuit cards:

— Tone and Digit Switch (TDS)
— Flexible Tone and Digit Switch
— Digitone Receiver (DTR)
— Tone Detector
— Dial Tone Detector
— Extended Tone Detector (XTD)

TDS circuit card outpulsers and channels are checked for timing errors,
memory faults and Digitone frequency accuracy. Digitone receivers are
checked for response to all Digitone frequencies. Tones and outpulses are
tested from a maintenance set.

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 160 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to all machines, except Option 11
systems. See the list of Option 11 commands for further information.
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank

CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DISD l s c Disable the specified Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 Tone Detector card
DISD l s c u Disable specified Dial Tone Detector

DISL loop Disable tone and digit loop

DISR l s c (u) Disable specified DTR/MFR card or unit. Applies to DTR or XTD packs.
DISX l Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1
DTD l s c u Test specified Dial Tone Detector unit. Applies to DTD and XTD packs.
DTR l s c (u) Test specified Digitone receiver card or unit. Applies to DTR and XTD
packs.

END Stop execution of current command

ENLD l s c (u) Enable Tone Detector on specified card or unit
ENLL loop Enable tone and digit loop
ENLR l s c (u) Enable the DTR/MFR card or unit. Applies to DTR and XTD packs.
ENLX l Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1

MFR Test all Automatic Number Identification Feature Group D Multifrequency

receiver units
MFR loop Test all Automatic Number Identification Feature Group D Multifrequency
receiver units on specified loop
MFR l s c (u) Test Automatic Number Identification Feature Group D Multifrequency card
or unit

SDTR l s c (u) Get status of specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit.

STAD List all disabled Tone Detector units
STAD l s c (u) Get status of Tone Detector card or unit
STAT List TNs of all disabled DTRs and MFRs
STAT loop Get status TDS loop

TDET l s c (u) Perform self-test and tone detection on specified card or unit
TDS loop Test outpulsers and channels on specified loop

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 34
Option 11 commands Page 161 of 472

Option 11 commands
The following commands are applicable to Option 11 systems:
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DISR c (u) Disable specified DTR/MFR card or unit

DISX c Disable the TDS/MFS card
DISX l Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1
DTR c (u) Test specified Digitone receiver card or unit

END Stop execution of current command

ENLR c (u) Enable DTR/MFR card or unit
ENLX c Enable the TDS/MFS card
ENLX l Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1

MFR Test all Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency receiver units
MFR c Test all MFR units on card c (Option 11)
MFR c (u) Test ANI Feature Group D Multifrequency card or unit (Option 11)

SDTR List all disabled DTR units

SDTR c (u) Get status of specified DTR or XTD unit(s) on the CPU, SSTD, or XTD card
STAT List TNs of all disabled DTRs and MFRs
STAT c Show TDS status and number of disabled or busy tone transmitter
channels.

TDS card Test outpulsers and channels

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 162 of 472 Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands

Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands

The following commands are applicable to the NT5K20 and NT5K48 XTD
cards:
DISR l s c (u) Disable the specified XTD card (or unit)
DTR l s c u Test the specified XTD unit as a Digitone receiver unit

ENLR l s c (u) Enable the specified XTD card (or unit)

SDTR List Terminal Numbers (TN) of all disabled DTR units

SDTR l s c (u) List the status of the specified XTD card (or unit)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 34
Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands Page 163 of 472

Maintenance telephone commands

The following commands are used from a Maintenance telephone to test and
hear the various tones. Both the command and the dial pad equivalents (in
parantheses) are shown.

ANNx#loop## (266x#loop##) basic-6

Provides signals coming through source number x of KAPSCH
Digital Announcer or Music Interface. Where loop = Tone and
Digit Switch loop number)

BSY#loop## (279#loop##) basic-1

Provide busy tone from tone and digit loop.

C## (2##) Remove any active tone. basic-1

CMP#loop## (267#loop##) basic-1

Provide Camp-On tone from loop.

CUST#xx## (2878#xx##) basic-1

Test outpulsing for customer XX.

CWG#loop## (294#loop##) basic-1

Give call waiting tone from loop.

DIA#loop## (342#loop##) basic-1

Provide dial tone from tone and digit loop.

DRNG#loop## (3764#loop##) basic-1

Provide distinctive ringing from loop.

ITN#loop## (486#loop##) basic-1

Provide intrusion tone from loop.

JDRG#loop## (5374#loop##) basic-8

Provide distinctive ringing from loop.

JIDT#loop## (5438#loop##) basic-8

Provide interrupted dial tone from loop.

OPS#loop#x## (677#loop#x##) basic-1

Test outpulsing from Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to idle trunk.

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 164 of 472 Extended Tone Detector (XTD) commands

ORD#loop## (673#loop##) basic-1

Provide override tone from loop.

OVF#loop## (683#loop##) basic-1

Provide overflow tone from loop.

PCRT#loop## (7278#loop##) pcr-7

Test the Paid Call Restriction (PCR) tone after the TABL
command.

RBK#loop## (725#loop##) basic-1

Provide ringback tone from loop.

RNG#loop## (764#loop##) basic-1

Provide ring tone from loop.

SDL#loop## (735#loop##) basic-1

Give special dial tone from loop.

TABL#xx## (8225#xx##) basic-1

Select table number xx. If this command is not issued before
any tone request command, then table 0 is assumed (Generic
X11 with supplementary features).

TLP#loop## (857#loop##) basic-4

Provide tone to last party from the tone and digit loop.

TST#loop## (878#loop##) basic-1

Provide test tone from loop.

XCTT#loop#t#c## (9288#loop#t#c##) xct-15

Test tone and cadence number on Conference/TDS/MFS card.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 34
Alphabetical list of commands Page 165 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ANNx#loop## (266x#loop##) basic-6

Provides signals coming through source number x of KAPSCH
Digital Announcer or Music Interface. Where: loop = Tone and
Digit Switch loop number.

BSY#L## (279#L##)
Provide busy tone from tone and digit loop L. basic-1

C## (2##) Remove any active tone. basic-1

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMAJ Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power basic-1
fault alarm.

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c.

CMP#loop## (267#loop##) basic-1

Provide Camp-On tone from loop.

CUST#xx## (2878#xx##) basic-1

Test outpulsing for customer XX.

CWG#loop## (294#loop##) basic-1

Give call waiting tone from loop.

DIA#L## (342#L##)
Provide dial tone from tone and digit loop L. basic-1

DISD l s c Disable the specified Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 Tone Detector basic-1
card. Disables both units and lights the LED. (not supported on
Option 11)

DISD l s c u Disable specified Dial Tone Detector. basic-1

If both units on the card are disabled, the LED lights.
(not supported on Option 11)

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 166 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DISL loop Disable tone and digit loop. basic-1

For Conference/TDS/MFS cards see note with ENLL
command.

DISR c (u) Disable specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit. (Option 11) xtd-8
For Option 11C: this command applies to any units on card 0
regardless of its configured type.

DISR l s c (u) Disable specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit. xtd-8

DISX c Disable the TDS/MFS card (Option 11) basic-22

For Option 11C: this command disables TDS and all units
(0-15) on card 0.

DISX l Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1. xct-15

Disables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit
Switch, and MF Sender (NT8D17) card. Both the even
numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are
disabled. loop = 0, 2, 4,. . . 158

The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even

number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only
prevents the loop from being used by software and does not
affect the hardware status of the card.
The DISX and ENLX commands are recommended. The ENLX
command must be used if the DISX command was used to
disable the card.
This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.

DRNG#loop## (3764#loop##) basic-1

Provide distinctive ringing from loop.

DTD l s c u Test specified Dial Tone Detector unit. xtd-8

Applies to DTD and XTD packs. The Dial Tone Detector Test
(DTDT) parameters must be configured in the configuration
record (LD 17). Faulty DTD packs are disabled. Only 50% of all
Dial Tone Detectors in the system may be disabled.

DTR c (u) Test specified unit on Digitone receiver card or unit. (Option 11) basic-1
For Option 11C: this command is applicable to DTR units 0-7
and 8-15.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 34
Alphabetical list of commands Page 167 of 472

DTR l s c (u) Test specified unit on Digitone receiver card or unit . xtd-8
This test may be performed while the card is enabled or
disabled. If a disabled card passes the test, it is enabled
automatically. This command also applies to the XTD.

END Stop execution of current command. basic-1

ENLD l s c (u) Enable Tone Detector on specified card or unit. (not supported basic-1
on Option 11)

ENLL l Enable tone and digit switch loop l. basic-1

For Conference/TDS/MFS cards the DISX and ENLX
commands must be used whenever the faceplate switch of the
card has been toggled. ENLL will software enable the card but
the card will not be properly reset.

ENLR c (u) Enable the DTR/MFR or XTD card or specified unit. (Option 11) xtd-8
For Option 11C: this command applies to any units on card 0
regardless of its configured type.

ENLR l s c (u) Enable the DTR/MFR or XTD card or specified unit. xtd-8

ENLX c Enable the TDS/MFS card basic-22

For Option 11C: This command enables TDS and alll units on
card 0. For Card 0, this command initiates the card reset
sequence: it downloads any parameters required for any
configured MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6 units.

ENLX l Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1. xct-15

This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.
Enables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit
Switch, and MF Sender (NT8D17) card. Both the even
numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are
enabled. (loop = 0, 2, 4,. . . 158) The Conf/TDS card is not
enabled automatically when it is inserted.
Both loops must have been previously disabled. This command
initiates card tests and the download of software.

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 168 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even

number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only
prevents the loop from being used by software and does not
affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX
commands are recommended. The ENLX command must be
used if the DISX command was used to disable the card.
Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause the
system to lock-up.

ITN#loop## (486#loop##) basic-1

Provide intrusion tone from loop.

JDRG#loop## (5374#loop##) basic-8

Provide distinctive ringing from loop.

JIDT#loop## (5438#loop##) basic-8

Provide interrupted dial tone from loop.

MFR Test all Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency fgd-17

receiver units.
For Option 11C: this command includes card 0 MFR units

MFR c Test all MFR units on card c (Option 11) fgd-17

For Option 11C: this command is applicable to card 0 units if
they are MFR units

MFR c (u) Test Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency fgd-17

receiver card or unit. (Option 11)
For Option 11C: this command is applicable to card 0 units if
they are MFR units

MFR loop Test all Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency fgd-17
receivers on this loop.

MFR l s c (u) Test Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Multifrequency fgd-17

receiver card or unit.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 34
Alphabetical list of commands Page 169 of 472

OPS#L#xx## (677 #L #xx##) basic-1

Test outpulsing from Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to idle trunk.

Outpulses from tone and digit loop l using the 10 or 20 pps

outpulser to any idle trunk. This command connects the
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 maintenance telephone to the trunk,
permitting a test call on the trunk to be made using the
outpulsers selected.

Where :
• xx = 10 or 20 representing the trunk class of service
(LD 14 CLS = P10 or P20).
When the test call is completed, LD 34 must be reloaded by
dialing SPRE + 91 before entering another command.

ORD#loop## (673#loop##) basic-1

Provide override tone from loop.

OVF#L## (683#L##)
Provide overflow tone from loop L. basic-1

PCRT#loop## (7278#loop##) pcr-7

Test the Paid Call Restriction (PCR) tone after the TABL
command.

RBK#L## (725#L##)
Provide ringback tone from loop L. basic-1

RNG#L## (764#L##)
Provide ring tone from loop L. basic-1

SDL#loop## (735#loop##) basic-1

Give special dial tone from loop.

SDTR List the TNs of all disabled DTR/MFR or XTD units xtd-8

SDTR List all disabled DTR units basic-1

SDTR c (u) Get status of specified DTR or XTD card or unit. (Option 11) basic-1
For Option 11C: This command provides the status of all units
0-11 or 0-15 for card 0, regardless of configured type.

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 170 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

SDTR l s c (u) Get status of specified DTR/MFR or XTD card or unit. basic-1
If no parameters are entered, a list of all DTR/MFR TNs is
output. If l s c is input, the status of the DTR/MFR units on the
specified card are output. If l s c u is input, the status of the
specified unit is output. Applies to DTR and XTD packs.

STAD List all disabled Tone Detector units. (not supported on basic-1
Option 11)

STAD l s c (u) Get status of Tone Detector card or unit. basic-1

The status is either idle, busy, maintenance busy or not
equipped.

STAT List TNs of all disabled Digitone Receivers. NONE is output if basic-1
there are no disabled Digitone Receivers.
For Option 11C: this command lists TNs of all disabled DTRs
and includes all card 0 DTR/XTD units.

STAT c Show TDS status and number of disabled or busy tone basic-1
transmitter channels. The STAT c command is used for the
SSTD or CPU card.

STAT loop Get status TDS loop. basic-1

The response may include OPS DSBL, indicating that the
outpulsing function of the TDS card has been disabled.

TABL#xx## (8225#xx##) basic-1

Select table number xx. If this command is not issued before
any tone request command, then table 0 is assumed (Generic
X11 with supplementary features).

TDET l s c (u) Perform self-test and tone detection on specified card or unit. basic-1
Performs the self-test and basic tone detection functions of the
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 Tone Detector card or unit. This test
may be performed while the card is enabled or disabled. If a
disabled card passes the test, it is enabled automatically.

TDS loop Test outpulsers and channels on specified loop. basic-1

Tests the outpulsers and channels of the tone and digit switch
at loop. Outpulsers and tones are tested with a maintenance
telephone (see commands from maintenance telephone).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 34
Alphabetical list of commands Page 171 of 472

TDS card Test outpulsers and channels on specified card. (Option 11) basic-1
When the Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS) package 87 is
equipped, it:
— tests the outpulsers and channels of the tone and digit
switch
— outpulses 32 digits to a DTR, receives and stores the 32
digits from the DTR
— tests that the time to outpulse 32 digits is within an
acceptable range
— compares the outpulsed 32 digits with those received and
displays OK if they match

TLP#loop## (857#loop##) basic-4

Provide tone to last party from the tone and digit loop.

TST#loop## (878#loop##) basic-1

Provide test tone from loop.

XCTT# L#t#c## (9288# L#t#c##) xct-15

Test tone and cadence number on Conference/TDS/MFS card.
Where:
• L = loop number of Conference/TDS/MFS (NT8D17)
card
• t = tone number
• c = cadence number

Refer to Flexible Tone and Digit Switch cards (553-2711-180)

for the Conference/TDS tone and cadence numbers.

X11 Maintenance
LD 34
Page 172 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

182

LD 35 LD 35
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 173 of 472

LD 35: Common Equipment Diagnostic

This program is used to maintain the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and
related cards. It can be run in background, during the daily routines, or loaded
manually to enter commands. Problems are reported by CED messages.

The CED program is used to:

— clear the maintenance display to 00 or blank
— switch CPUs in dual-CPU systems
— test the idle CPU in dual-CPU systems
— display the status of CPU and buses
— enable, disable, test, and display status of memory and CMA cards
— enable, disable and display the status of CE extenders

When loaded during daily routines, memories cards are tested. If there are
two CPUs, a CPU switchover is made.

This Overlay applies to all systems EXCEPT Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C.
Refer to LD 135 for Core Common Equipment Diagnostics.

X11 Maintenance
LD 35
Page 174 of 472 Common Equipment Diagnostic

Extender designations
Extender Codes for LD 35 (CED)

0M0—from CPU 0 to Memory Shelf 0

0M1—from CPU 0 to Memory Shelf 1
1M0—from CPU 1 to Memory Shelf 0
1M1—from CPU 1 to Memory Shelf 1

0G0—from CPU 0 Network Group 0

0G1—from CPU 0 Network Group 1
0G2—from CPU 0 Network Group 2
0G3—from CPU 0 Network Group 3
0G4—from CPU 0 Network Group 4

1G0—from CPU 1 Network Group 0

1G1—from CPU 1 Network Group 1
1G2—from CPU 1 Network Group 2
1G3—from CPU 1 Network Group 3
1G4—from CPU 1 Network Group 4

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 35
Basic commands Page 175 of 472

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to all machines, except Option 11
systems. See the list of Option 11 commands for further information.

BATT Check status of memory battery backup (STE and Option 21E only)
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DIS xx Disable memory card xx

DIS CMA x Disable Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) x
DIS EXT xxx Disable the specified extender pair
DIS SBE Disable the Segmented Bus Extender (SL-1 MS only)
DSPL Get contents of maintenance display on the active CPU

END Terminate test in progress

ENL xx Enable and perform a memory test on card x
ENL CMA x Enable Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) x
ENL EXT xxx Enable specified extender pair
ENL SBE Enable Segmented Bus Extender (SL-1 MS only)

FCNT Print soft failure counts of all memory modules

IDC ICM Print card ID for Integrated CPU with 4Meg Memory (ICM). (STE and
Option 21E only)
IDC MSPS Print card ID for Misc/SDI and PS (MSPS). (STE and Option 21E only)

LDIS List disabled memories

LENL List enabled memories

MEM xx Perform memory test on module xx

MIDN Run midnight (daily) routines once CED is aborted and the user logs off

REPL xx Enable new memory card xx

SCPU Make inactive CPU the active CPU

SHLF X Perform memory decode fault test on CPU x
STAT CMA x Get status of CMA x
STAT CPU Output status of both CPUs
STAT EXT Output extender pair designations
STAT EXT xxx Output status of specified extender
STAT MEM Output status of all memory cards

X11 Maintenance
LD 35
Page 176 of 472 Basic commands

STAT MEM xx Output status of memory card xx

STAT SBE Print status of Segmented Bus Extender (SL-1 MS)

TCPU Test inactive CPU in a dual CPU system

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 35
Option 11 commands Page 177 of 472

Option 11 commands

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank

CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DSPL Get contents of maintenance display

END Terminate test in progress

MEM 0 Perform memory test on module 0

MIDN Run midnight (daily) routines once CED is aborted

STAT MEM Output status of all memory cards

STAT MEM xx Output status of memory card xx

X11 Maintenance
LD 35
Page 178 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

BATT Check status of memory battery backup. (STE and Option 21E basic-18
only). The response is OK or CED503.

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMAJ Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power basic-1
fault alarm.

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c.

DIS xx Disable memory card xx. (xx is a 2-digit number) basic-1

The first digit specifies which CPU the card is associated with
and the second specifies the memory card number. All memory
cards associated with that CPU must be disabled before
removing the card.

DIS CMA x Disable Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) x. basic-1

Disables the specified Changeover and Memory (CMA) card.
The CMA must be on the idle CPU and all memories served by
the CMA must be disabled.

DIS EXT xxx Disables the extender pair specified by xxx. basic-1
Only extenders on the nonactive CPU may be disabled. The
extender is marked as unusable by the system and it will not
attempt to use it, i.e., a CPU changeover will not be permitted.
LEDs on the card faceplates do not reflect this command.
See introduction for extender designations.

DIS SBE Disable the Segmented Bus Extender (SL-1 MS only). basic-1

DSPL Get contents of maintenance display. If the maintenance basic-1

display is blank, 000 will be output.

END Terminate test in progress. basic-1

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 35
Alphabetical list of commands Page 179 of 472

ENL xx Perform memory test on Memory card xx. (xx is a 2-digit basic-1
number) The first digit specifies which CPU the card is
associated with and the second specifies the card number.
The card must not be in use by the system. Dual CPU systems
only. System response of OK is output and card is enabled if
the test is passed.

ENL CMA x Enable Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) x. The CMA basic-1
must be on the idle CPU.

ENL EXT xxx Enable specified extender pair. basic-1

Only extenders on the nonactive CPU may be enabled. See
introduction for extender designations. The state of the LED on
the circuit card faceplate does not reflect this command.

ENL SBE Enable Segmented Bus Extender (SL-1 MS only). basic-1

FCNT Print soft failure counts of all memory modules. Response is basic-1
either (sample):

1. For system Options NT, RT, XT, 51, 61 and 71:

CD MTR FCNT
0 0 0
0 1 0
0 2 0
Where: CD = memory card number, MTR = Memory Trouble
Register on 768K memory board, and FCNT = fault counts on
that MTR.

2. For all other system options:

CD PAGE LFC HFC

0 0 3 1
0 1 0 2
0 2 3 2
1 5 2 0
1 6 0 1
Where: CD = memory card number, PAGE = page number,
LFC = fault count of low card module, and HFC = fault count of
high card module.
Not applicable to SL-1 MS, S, ST or system Option 21.

X11 Maintenance
LD 35
Page 180 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

IDC ICM IDC MSPS basic-18

Print card ID for ICM and Print card ID for MSPS. The
Integrated CPU with 4Meg Memory (ICM) or Misc/SDI and PS
(MSPS) card ID is output in the following format:
PPPPPPPPAA RRSSSS cccccccc@DDDDD
Where:
• PPPPPPPP = PEC code
• AA = Attribute code
• RR = Release number
• SSSS = Serial number
• cccccccc = Comments (optional)
• @ = HEX 01 ASCII SOH character (non printing)
• DDDDD = Design code

LDIS List disabled memories. Not applicable to SL-1 MS, S, ST or basic-1

system Options 11 and 21.

LENL List enabled memories. Not applicable to SL-1 MS, S, ST or basic-1

system Options 11 and 21.

MEM 0 Perform memory test on module 0. (Option 11) basic-1

MEM xx Perform memory test on module xx. basic-1

Performs a memory test on module xx, which is a 1- or 2-digit
number specifying the card to be tested. If only one digit is
entered the memory in CPU 0 is tested. The card does not
have to be in the configuration record (CFN) to pass the test.
System outputs K if test is passed.
The module must be disabled first with the DIS xx command.

MIDN Run midnight (daily) routines once CED is aborted. MIDN basic-1
causes midnight routines to be run after CED is aborted or
logged out.

REPL xx Enable new memory card xx. (xx is a 2-digit number) basic-1
The first digit specifies which CPU the module is associated
with and the second specifies the memory module number.
This command is used to enable a new memory module after
inserting it into the shelf. It sets the soft memory failure count
zero and tests the module. If the tests are successful the
module is enabled.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 35
Alphabetical list of commands Page 181 of 472

SCPU Make inactive CPU the active CPU. basic-1

In a dual CPU system, this command causes the inactive CPU
to become the active CPU. If the changeover is successful, OK
is output. This command cannot be used when the active CPU
is in maintenance mode.
Caution: Indiscriminate use of this command should be
avoided as system reload may occur.

SHLF x SHLF x performs a memory decode fault test on the disabled basic-1
memories corresponding to the specified CPU x (0 or 1).
To use this test, disable the memory cards that are to be
included in the test and issue the command to the appropriate
shelf. If individual tests of memory cards using the MEM
command pass but the SHLF test fails on the same modules,
then the CMA or controller is probably faulty.

STAT CMA x Get status of CMA x. Response is: basic-1

CMA x ACTIVE y MEM = CMA is being used
CMA x DSBL y MEM = CMA is disabled
CMA x ENBL y MEM = CMA is enabled but in a standby state
Ignore the value y for memory. Use STAT MEM to check
memory status.

STAT CPU Outputs the status of both CPUs. Responses are: basic-1
• ENBL = CPU is running
• IDLE = CPU is in standby
• DSBL = CPU is disabled
Not applicable to Meridian SL-1 MS or S.

STAT EXT Output extender pair designations. basic-1

This command outputs the extender pair designation and if
disabled indicates the number of devices on the network shelf
connected to the extender that would become inaccessible if a
CPU changeover occurs.
If the extender has been disabled by using the DIS EXT
command, then the number output will be equal to the number
of devices on the shelf.
See introduction for extender designations.

X11 Maintenance
LD 35
Page 182 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT EXT xxx Output status of specified extender. For extenders to network basic-1
shelves, the response is:
• x <status> <y NET>
Where:
1. x <status> = status of extender x and can be one of:
a ENBL = the extender is enabled.
b DSBL = the extender is disabled.
c LEFT DSBL = only the left half of the group served by
the extender is disabled; i.e., shelf 0.
d RIGHT DSBL = only the right half of the group served
by the extender is disabled; i.e., shelf 1
2. y NET = the number of network and PS cards that do not
respond when accessed using the specified extender but
do respond when the extender from the other CPU is
used.

STAT MEM Outputs the status of all Memory cards, i.e., how many cards basic-1
enabled and how many disabled. Use STAT MEM xx for status
of a specific card.

STAT MEM xx Output status of memory card xx. (xx is a 2-digit number) basic-1
The first digit specifies which CPU the module is associated
with and the second specifies the memory module number.
Responses are:
• ENBL = module is enabled
• ENBL BUT FAULTY = module is enabled but faulty
• REPL = module is replaced
• DSBL = module is disabled
• UNEQ = module is missing or not configured

STAT SBE Print status of Segmented Bus Extender (SL-1 MS only). basic-1

TCPU Test inactive CPU in a dual CPU system. basic-1

This command tests the inactive CPU. If the CPU passes, OK
is output. This command cannot be used when the active CPU
is in maintenance mode.
Caution: Indiscriminate use of this command should be
avoided as system reload may occur.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

192

LD 36, 41 LDs 36, 41

Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 183 of 472

LDs 36, 41: Trunk Diagnostic

Insufficient space in the Overlay area requires the trunk diagnostic to be split
into two programs. Overlay 41 is an extension of Overlay 36. Overlay 41 is
not applicable with X11 Release 20 and later software.

The programs allow trunks to be tested from either the Meridian 1/Meridian
SL-1 site or a remote test center.

When testing from a Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 site, individual trunks can be
seized and a test call can be performed on the trunk in the normal manner.

When testing from a remote test center, a speech path must be set up to
monitor the testing. This is accomplished by having the Meridian 1/Meridian
SL-1 system call a directory number (DN) at the test center. This allows for
dial tone, outpulsing and test tones to be monitored as tests are performed on
other trunks by inputting commands at the TTY.

When a trunk is seized, the system prompts DN? for a DN. When the DN is
input, the system calls that number automatically. When the call is answered
a pure tone indicates the validity of the speech path. New trunks can be tested
in the same manner with the maintenance telephone.

Note 1: When the French (FRTA) package 197 is enabled the units on
CO trunks are not busied when they are disabled.

Note 2: When the Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package 182 is

enabled, a failed trunk is displayed as BUSY. The enable/disable
command does not enable or disable the failed trunk unit (it stays in the
BUSY state).

X11 Maintenance
LDs 36, 41
Page 184 of 472 Trunk Diagnostic

When to use LD 36 and LD 41

Use either LD 36 or LD 41 to:
— clear minor alarms and the maintenance display
— query threshold overflows for specific customers and routes
— reset thresholds for specific trunks

Use LD 36 to:
— query number of days since an incoming call was received for a specific
customer and route or trunk
— query the trunk with the most number of idle days for a specific customer
and route
— query trunks for which no disconnect supervision was received
— test Automatic Number Identification (ANI) trunks.

Note: When defined as a midnight routine, this program searches for

trunks not used during the day and updates the total number of days the
trunks have been idle.

Use LD 41 to:
— test AIOD (Automatically Identified Outward Dialing) trunks in the
system
— enable, disable and request the status of Trunk circuit cards. (Disabled
DID trunks are placed in the answer state)

Note: LD 36 and LD 41 can only be used for analog trunks, LD 60 must

be used for diagnostics on digital trunks.

Trunk Error Thresholds

Resident programs monitor all calls and note apparent errors. The errors are
accumulated and, if they occur consistently (exceed a threshold) on any trunk,
a diagnostic message which identifies the trunk is output to the TTY or
printer. The trunk should be suspected of trouble and a manual test should be
performed on the trunk.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 36, 41
Trunk Diagnostic Page 185 of 472

A record is kept in memory for each threshold violation error message. At any
time, all trunks which have been identified by such a message may be listed
by entering the command LOVF for any trunk route. Once an identifying
message has been printed, it will not be repeated for that trunk until the RSET
command is entered for that trunk or an initialization has occurred.

Potentially, a trunk may fail by not detecting incoming calls. The

Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 threshold mechanism cannot be used to detect
such failures so the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 maintains for each trunk a
count of the number of days since an incoming call was received on each
trunk.

Thus, customer reports that indicate incoming calls are not being processed
can initiate a check for the trunk which has been without an incoming call for
the longest interval via the LMAX command. This trunk should be tested
first.

It is possible to determine for each trunk the number of days since an

incoming call was processed via the LDIC command. Subsequent trunk tests
should be performed on those trunks showing the highest counts until the
trouble is located.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 36, 41
Page 186 of 472 Basic commands (LD 36)

Basic commands (LD 36)

The following commands are applicable to all machines, except Option 11
systems. See the list of Option 11 commands for further information.

CALL Set up monitor link with test center

CALL l s c u Set monitor link with test center on this trunk
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)

DISC l s c Disable specified card for replacement

DISU l s c u Disable specified unit

END Terminate test in progress

ENLC l s c Enable specified card
ENLU l s c u Enable specified unit

LDIC c r List number of days since last incoming call for specified customer and
route
LDIC l s c u List number of days since last incoming call on specified trunk
LMAX c r List trunk with maximum idle days for specified customer and route
LNDS c r List trunks with no disconnect supervision for specified customer and route
LOVF c r List threshold overflows for specified customer and route

RAN c r Test recorded announcement device for specified customer and route
RLS Release trunk being tested
RSET l s c u Reset thresholds for specified trunk

STAT l s c Check card's software status

TRK l s c u Seize trunk for testing
TPPM l s c u Test the specified PPM trunk

Note: If a trunk unit is controlled by APNSS, the STAT command will

display the status of the D-channel.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 36, 41
Option 11 commands Page 187 of 472

Option 11 commands

CALL Set up monitor link with test center

CALL c u Set monitor link with test center on this trunk
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DISC card Disable specified card for replacement

DISU c u Disable specified unit

END Terminate test in progress

ENLC card Enable specified card
ENLU c u Enable specified unit

LDID c r List of days since last incoming call for specified customer (c) and route (r).
LMAX c r List trunk with maximum idle days for specified customer and route
LNDS c r List trunks with no disconnect supervision for specified customer and route
LOVF c r List threshold overflows for specified customer and route

RAN c r Test recorded announcement device for specified customer and route
RLS Release trunk being tested
RSET c u Reset thresholds for specified trunk

STAT card Check card's software status

TRK c u Seize trunk for testing

X11 Maintenance
LDs 36, 41
Page 188 of 472 Basic commands (LD 41)

Basic commands (LD 41)

Overlay 41 is not available with X81 Phase 6 and later software or X11
Release 20 and later software.

AIOD l s c Test AIOD card

AIOD MSG l s c Output codes transmitted to Public Telephone Rated Service (PTRS)

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DISC l s c Disable specified card for replacement

END Terminate test in progress

ENLC l s c Enable specified card

LOVF c r List threshold overflows for specified customer and route

RSET l s c u Reset thresholds for specified trunk

STAT l s c Check card's software status

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 36, 41
Alphabetical list of commands Page 189 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

AIOD l s c Test AIOD card. Not available in Release 9 and later. basic-1

AIOD MSG l s c basic-1

Output codes transmitted to PTRS.
Output on TTY all 8-digit codes bring transmitted to PTRS by
AIOD card. Response is OK if monitor is set. Not available in
Release 9 and later.

CALL Set up monitor link with test center. basic-1

Same as the CALL l s c command except any PTRS trunk in
the system can be selected. The CALL command must be
terminated using the * command.

CALL c u Set monitor link with test center on this trunk. (Option 11) basic-1

CALL l s c u This command sets up a monitor link (call) between the basic-1
Meridian 1/ Meridian SL-1 and the test center on the trunk
specified.
The system prompts “DN?” for the directory number. When the
PTRS directory number is entered, the system calls up that
number automatically. When the call is answered, a pure tone
indicates the validity of the link.
This sequence can take up to 14 seconds on a trunk without
answer supervision. The END command disconnects the call.
The CALL l s c u command is not allowed when the diagnostic
program is being run from a maintenance telephone. During
the CALL command, On-Hook and Off-Hook signals from the
maintenance telephone may initiate BUG105.

When the monitor is enabled, a failed trunk is displayed as

BUSY. The enable/disable command does not enable or
disable the failed trunk unit (it stays in the BUSY state).

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

X11 Maintenance
LDs 36, 41
Page 190 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c. (not applicable for Release 22)

DISC card Disable specified card for replacement. (Option 11) basic-1

DISC l s c Disable specified card for replacement. basic-1

DISU c u Disable specified unit. (Option 11) basic-1

DISU l s c u Disable specified unit. basic-1

END Terminate test in progress basic-1

ENLC card Enable specified card. (Option 11) basic-1

ENLC l s c Enable specified card. basic-1

If the card resides on a disabled shelf, its status is output and
the enable is not performed. If the card has been disabled by
an overload, the overload status is cleared.

ENLU c u Enable specified unit. (Option 11) basic-1

ENLU l s c u Enable specified unit. If unit resides on a disabled shelf or card, basic-1
then status is output and enable is not performed.

LDIC c r List number of days since last incoming call for specified basic-1
customer (c) and route (r).

LDID c r Number of days since last incoming call for specified customer
(c) and route (r). (Option 11)

LDIC l s c u List number of days since last incoming call on specified trunk. basic-1

LMAX c r List trunk with maximum idle days for specified customer and basic-1
route

LNDS c r List trunks with no disconnect supervision for specified basic-1

customer and route. (trunks for which no disconnect
supervision was received, i.e., terminating party not going
On-Hook after a call)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 36, 41
Alphabetical list of commands Page 191 of 472

LOVF c r List threshold overflows for specified customer and route. The basic-1
overflows are set when the resident trunk monitor outputs a
diagnostic

RAN c r Test recorded announcement device for specified customer basic-1

and route.

RLS Release trunk being tested.

RSET c u Reset thresholds for specified trunk. (Option 11) basic-1

RSET l s c u Reset thresholds for specified trunk. basic-1

STAT card Check card's software status. (Option 11) basic-1

STAT l s c Check card's software status. basic-1

TPPM l s c u Test the specified PPM trunk. This command is not applicable basic-1
when the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 is connected to 1 TR 6
international ISDN PRA.

TRK c u Seize trunk for testing. (Option 11) basic-1

TRK l s c u Seize trunk for testing. basic-1

Seizes the specified trunk for outpulsing and testing. If the
command is issued from a maintenance telephone, dial tone is
heard followed by outpulsing when the directory number is
entered.
If a trunk is to be seized for outpulsing and testing from a
remote test center (not a maintenance telephone), a monitor
link must first be set up using the CALL l s c u command. This
must not be over the trunk to be tested.

With the monitor link set up, the TRK l s c u command is input
to select the trunk to be tested. The system then prompts with
“DN?” and the directory number is input via the TTY. Normal
speech path connections are made between the monitor link
and the trunk being tested.
Disconnect by entering END, by going On-Hook if an SL-1
telephone is used or by entering *. END also disconnects the
monitor link.
This command cannot be used to seize an ISL trunk.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 36, 41
Page 192 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

200

LD 37 LD 37
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 193 of 472

LD 37: Input/Output Diagnostic

This program is used to diagnose faults with disk units, tape units,
Teletypewriter (TTY) or Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards. It provides enable,
disable, status and test functions on these devices. Problems are indicated in
IOD messages.

When LD 37 is defined as a daily routine, the program runs only once every
5 days and the primary storage device (disk or tape) is thoroughly tested
(equivalent to command MSI 0 or TAPE 0).

Only some of the commands in this Overlay are supported by Options 51C,
61C, 81 and 81C. Refer to LD 137 for core commands.

Refer to LD 48 for I/O ports used with the following applications.

— Command and Status Links (CSL)
— Meridian Link
— Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
— Integrated System Messaging Link
— Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) ports

Intelligent links (APL, HSL, LSL, and CMAC)

A warning message is generated each time an intelligent link is accessed
(enable, disable, test). The message is generated for the following types of
links:
APL
ACD-D (HSL/LSL)
CMAC (CMC)

X11 Maintenance
LD 37
Page 194 of 472 Input/Output Diagnostic

The message allows the access to be aborted prior to performing the enable,
test, etc. The warning appears in the following format:
DIS TTY N (link type) LINK (status) (y/n)
A response of y disables the hardware of the TTY regardless of the software
status of the link. The status field provides the software status of the link.
Valid status entries are:
BAD = software status is invalid
DOWN = link is down
MAINT = link is up and in maintenance mode
FULL = link is full
EMPTY = link is empty
NOT EMPTY= link still contains data
Disk commands versus tape commands
Various MSI (Mass Storage Interface) commands are not supported on
Generic X37 and Generic X08 (prior to Release 12) and if equipped with disk
drives, the corresponding TAPE command should be used when testing the
MSI as follows:
Disk command Tape command
DIS MSI x DIS TAPE x
ENL MSI x ENL TAPE x
MSI DATA TAPE DATA
MSI x TAPE x
MSI RW x TAPE RW x
MSI SELF x TAPE CTRL x
STAT MSI STAT TAPE
STAT MSI x STAT TAPE x

Use of the TAPE x or TAPE MOTN x commands on a system equipped with

disk drives will result in an IOD075 message. This message should be
disregarded.

If LD 37 is run as part of the daily routines, an IOD075 message will be output

on systems equipped with disk drives. This message should be disregarded.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 37
Basic commands Page 195 of 472

Basic commands
Not all commands are valid on Option 11 systems, as these systems do not
use tape drives.
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)

DIS MSG Disable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI port.
DIS MSGO Disable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI port.
DIS MSI x Disable Mass Storage Interface card x (not valid on Option 11)
DIS PRT x Disable printer x
DIS TAPE x Disable tape unit x (not valid on Option 11)
DIS TTY x Disable TTY x. (valid only for Card 0 Port 0 TTY on Option 11 systems)

END Clear all test activity

ENL MSGI Enable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI port.
ENL MSGO Enable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI port.
ENL MSI x Enable Mass Storage Interface x
ENL PRT x Enable printer x
ENL TAPE x Enable tape unit x (not valid on Option 11)
ENL TTY x Enable TTY x

MSI x Test Mass Storage unit x (not valid on Option 11)

MSI DATA Test data validity in primary and backup device. (not valid on Option 11)
MSI RW x Test READ/WRITE ability of Mass Storage unit x. (not valid on Option 11)
MSI SELF x Perform self-test on MSI card x and report result .(not valid on Option 11)

PRT x Test printer x

SET MON 0 Set the monitoring display to be in alphanumeric format.

This applies to the primary PMSI port.
SET MON 1 Set the monitoring display to be in hexadecimal format.
This applies to the primary PMSI port.
STAT Provide status of all input/output devices in system
STAT LINK Provide status of all CDR links
STAT LINK x Provide status of CDR data link x

X11 Maintenance
LD 37
Page 196 of 472 Basic commands

STAT MON Get the monitoring status for the primary PMSI port.
This command displays the status of the message monitoring for the primary
port. For example, if MSGI, MSGO, and SET MON 0 are enabled, the
display would be as follows.
MSGI:ON MSGO: ON ALPH

STAT MSI Provide status of all MSI cards

STAT MSI x Provide status of MSI card x
STAT PRT Provide status of all printers in system
STAT PRT x Provide status of printer x
STAT TAPE Provide status of all magnetic tape devices . (not valid on Option 11)
STAT TTY Provide status of all TTY devices in system
Release 19 and later, this command enables you to get the status of the
primary PMSI I/O port, and the Single Terminal Access (STA) administration
terminal.
STAT TTY x Provide status of TTY x
Release 19 and later, this command also provides the status of the primary
PMSI port.
STAT XSM Provide status of the system monitor

TAPE CTRL x Test control electronics on tape device x (not valid on Option 11)
TAPE DATA Test data on all 4 tracks (not valid on Option 11)
TAPE MOTN x Test motion and timing on tape device x (not valid on Option 11)
TAPE x Test magnetic tape device x (not valid on Option 11)
TAPE RW x Test READ/WRITE ability of tape device x (not valid on Option 11)
TTY x Test TTY x

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 37
Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands Page 197 of 472

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

The MSDL provides 4 ports for ISDN Primary Rate D-channel (DCH) and
Application Module Link (AML).

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number
(defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These commands are provided in Link
Diagnostic (LD 48) and D-channel Diagnostic (LD 96).

DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL device x (card)

ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) Enable MSDL device x (card, Forced Download)

RST MSDL x Reset MSDL device x

SLFT MSDL x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x

STAT MSDL (x) (FULL) Get status of MSDL card (x) (additional information)

Note: See “Alphabetical List of commands” in LD 48 for a complete

description of these commands.

X11 Maintenance
LD 37
Page 198 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c. (not applicable for Release 22)

DIS MSG Disable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI pms-19
port.

DIS MSGO Disable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI pms-19
port.

DIS MSI x Disable Mass Storage Interface card x. basic-1

DIS MSDL x (ALL)

Disable MSDL device x

DIS PRT x Disable printer x. basic-1

DIS TAPE x Disable tape unit x. basic-1

DIS TTY x Disable TTY x. Only valid for Card 0 Port 0 TTY on Option 11 basic-1
systems.

END Clear all test activity. basic-1

ENL MSGI Enable incoming message monitoring for the primary PMSI pms-19
port.

ENL MSGO Enable outgoing message monitoring for the primary PMSI pms-19
port.

ENL MSI x Enable Mass Storage Interface card x. basic-1

ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL)

Enable MSDL device x

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 37
Alphabetical list of commands Page 199 of 472

ENL PRT x Enable printer x. basic-1

ENL TAPE x Enable tape unit x. basic-1

ENL TTY x Enable TTY x. basic-1

MSI x Test Mass Storage unit x. This command runs the MSI DATA, basic-1
MSI RW x and MSI SELF x tests.

MSI DATA Test data validity in primary and backup device. basic-1

MSI RW x Test READ/WRITE ability of Mass Storage unit x. basic-1

MSI SELF x Perform self-test on MSI card and report result. basic-1

PRT x Test printer x. basic-1

Same as TTY test except that no keyboard input is expected
and END command is not required. Where: * denotes that the
printer is not yet available

RST MSDL x Reset MSDL device x

SET MON 0 Set the monitoring display to be in alphanumeric format. pms-19

This applies to the primary PMSI port.

SET MON 1 Set the monitoring display to be in hexadecimal format. pms-19

This applies to the primary PMSI port.

SLFT MSDL x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x

STAT Provide status of all input/output devices in system. basic-1

STAT LINK Provide status of all CDR links. basic-1

STAT LINK x Provide status of CDR data link x. basic-1

STAT MON Get the monitoring status for the primary PMSI port. pms-19
This command displays the status of the message monitoring
for the primary port. For example, if MSGI, MSGO, and SET
MON 0 are enabled, the display would be as follows.
MSGI:ON MSGO: ON ALPH

X11 Maintenance
LD 37
Page 200 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT MSDL (x [FULL])

Get MSDL status

STAT MSI Provide status of all MSI cards. basic-1

STAT MSI x Provide status of MSI card x associated with the active CPU. basic-1

STAT PRT Provide status of all printers in system. basic-1

STAT PRT x Provide status of printer x. basic-1

STAT TAPE Provide status of all magnetic tape devices. basic-1

STAT TTY Provide status of all TTY devices in system. basic-1

Release 19 and later, this command enables you to get the
status of the primary PMSI I/O port, and the Single Terminal
Access (STA) administration terminal.

STAT TTY x Provide status of TTY x. Release 19 and later, this command basic-1
also provides the status of the primary PMSI port.

STAT XSM Provide status of the system monitor. If there are no error xpe-15
conditions, PWR000 is output. Otherwise, the appropriate
PWR messages are output.

TAPE x Test magnetic tape device x. This command combines the basic-1
TAPE CTRL x, TAPE MOTN x, TAPE RW x and TAPE DATA
tests.

TAPE CTRL x Test control electronics on tape device x. basic-1

TAPE DATA Test data on all 4 tracks. basic-1

TAPE MOTN x Test motion and timing on tape device x. basic-1

TAPE RW x Test READ/WRITE ability of tape device x. basic-1

TTY x Test TTY x. Response is: basic-1

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789"#$%*!&()<>—.:,.? READY FOR INPUT
Anything entered on the keyboard will be echoed until END is
input.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

206

LD 38 LD 38
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 201 of 472

LD 38: Conference Circuit Diagnostic

This program is used to detect and isolate circuit faults on the conference
equipment in the system.

LD 38 can detect problems on the conference circuit such as:

— channel faults on the network card which interfaces a conference card to
the system
— channel faults on the conference card
— conference faults associated with conferee group numbers
— switching faults controlling the attenuation feature.

The program is used to

— enable a specific conference card
— disable a specific conference card
— check status of channels and conferee groups
— clear alarms and displays

The program allows complete manual control in establishing a test

conference, thus allowing the user to listen for noise and distortion. This
includes:

— selection of a specific conference card

— selection of a specific conferee group
— stepping through all free channels and groups with special test
conference.

X11 Maintenance
LD 38
Page 202 of 472 Basic commands

Some commands are not valid on Option 11 systems, since the conference
circuits are always enabled.

Note: Loops 29 and 30 are on the CPU/CONF card and loop 31 is on the
Expansion Cabinet Data Cartridge (for Option 11 only).

Basic commands
CDSP Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c
CNFC loop Test conference loop
CNFC MAN loop g Set up for manual conference on conference group g
CNFC STEP Ready TTY for testing conferee groups

DISL loop Disable conference loop

DISX loop Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop - 1 (not valid on Option 11)
END Abort all current test activity
ENLL loop Enable conference loop
ENLX loop Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop - 1 (not valid on Option 11)

LCNF loop List busy and disabled conferee groups on specified loop

STAT loop Provide status of conference card loop

STAT c u List conference card and group used by specified TN. (Option 11)
STAT l s c u List conference card and group used by specified TN.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 38
Alphabetical list of commands Page 203 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clears the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c.

CNFC loop Test conference loop. basic-1

Tests conference loop for channel, group and switching faults.
Note: Both the conference loop and the adjacent TDS/MFS loop must
be enabled to run the conference test.

CNFC MAN loop g

Set up for manual conference on conference group g. basic-1
Only one manual conference is be allowed at a time. The
conference group range is 1-15. After this command, any
telephone dialing SPRE 93 enters the conference, where
SPRE is the special service prefix for the system.
Going on-hook from that telephone takes it out of the
conference. If going On-Hook causes the conference to go
from a three-party to a two-party call processing may remove
all conference equipment and establish the remaining two
parties as a normal call.
The END command, which normally removes all telephones in
the manual conference, will no longer affect these two
telephones, as they are no longer using the conference card.
If the CNFC MAN command is entered from a maintenance
set, the telephone automatically becomes part of the manual
conference.

CNFC STEP Ready TTY for testing conferee groups. basic-1

Readies the TTY into a special command mode for testing
various channels and conferee groups audibly, using two
telephones: one to monitor and one to act as a signal source.
The CNFC MAN command should have been used previously
to set up the two-party conference.
Entering C on the command input device will step the
conference on to the next available channel.

X11 Maintenance
LD 38
Page 204 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Entering G will step to the next available conferee group.

Entering an asterisk (*) will revert back to the normal command
mode.
Entering “END” or aborting LD 38 releases the manual
conference.

DISL loop Disable conference loop. For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS basic-1

cards, see ENLL command.

DISX loop Disable NT8D17 Conf/TDS/MFS card. xct-15

Disables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit
Switch, and MF Sender (XCT) card. Both the even numbered
and adjacent loop are disabled.
Where: loop = 1, 3, 5,... 159
The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even
number loop for the conference function. However, this only
prevents the loop from being used by software and does not
affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX
commands are recommended. The ENLX command must be
used if the DISX command was used to disable the card.
This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.

END Abort all current test activity. There will be a 30 second basic-1
time-out dial tone for phones still off-hook.

ENLL loop Enable conference loop. basic-1

For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards the DISX and ENLX
commands must be used whenever the faceplate switch of the
card has been toggled. ENLL will software enable the card but
the card will not be properly reset.
Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause system to
lock-up.

ENLX loop Enable NT8D17 Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop - 1. xct-15
Enables all functions on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.
Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent
conference loop are enabled.
Where: loop = 1, 3, 5... 159

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 38
Alphabetical list of commands Page 205 of 472

If one of the loops is already enabled, it is disabled and then

both loops are enabled. The Conf/TDS card is not enabled
automatically when it is inserted.
This command initiates card tests, downloads software and
can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.

The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even

number loop for the conference function. However, this only
prevents the loop from being used by software and does not
affect the hardware status of the card. The DISX and ENLX
commands are recommended.
Enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause the
system to lock-up.

LCNF loop List busy and disabled conferee groups on specified loop. basic-1

STAT loop Provide status of conference card loop. Output format is: basic-1
1. CNFC N DSBL N BUSY = number of conferee groups
disabled and busy
2. CHAN N DSBL N BUSY = number of channels disabled
and busy
3. UNEQ = card is not equipped in the system
4. DSBL = card is disabled in software

STAT c u List conference card and group used by specified TN.

(Option 11)

STAT l s c u Lists which conference card and conferee group is being used basic-1
by the specified terminal number.

X11 Maintenance
LD 38
Page 206 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

210

LD 39 LD 39
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 207 of 472

LD 39: Intergroup Switch and System

Clock Generator Diagnostic
The Intergroup Switch (IGS) and System Clock Generator (SCG) or Clock
Controller (CC) diagnostic applies to multi-group systems. It is used to:

— determine the status of any Peripheral Signaling, Intergroup Switch

(IGS), System Clock Generator (SCG) or Clock Controller (CC) card
— disable and enable any PS, IGS, SCG or CC card
— switch the system clock from one SCG or CC to another
— clear minor alarm indications and the maintenance display on the active
CPU
— All SCG commands can be used for Clock Controllers, although LD 60
is normally used when DTI, CPI or PRI features are installed

Group, loop, and Peripheral Signaling card relationship

Group Shelf PS Loops
0 0 0 0-15
0 1 1 16-31
1 0 2 32-47
1 1 3 48-63
2 0 4 64-79
2 1 5 80-95
3 0 6 96-111
3 1 7 112-127
4 0 8 128-143
4 1 9 144-159

X11 Maintenance
LD 39
Page 208 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DIS IGS x Disables IGS card x (0 to 19)

DIS SCG x Disable SCG card x (0 or 1)
DISI IGS x Disables IGS card x (0 to 19) when idle
DSPS x Disable PS card x (0 to 9)

END Stop current operation or test

ENL IGS x Enables IGS card x (0 to 19)
ENL SCG x Enable SCG x (0 or 1)
ENPS x Disable PS card x (0 to 9)

SCLK Switch clock to other SCG

STAT IGS x Get status of IGS card x (0 to 19)
STAT PER x Print status of PS card x (0 to 9)
STAT SCG x Print status of SCG x (0 or 1)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 39
Alphabetical list of commands Page 209 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/ Rel

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c.

DIS IGS x Disables IGS card x (0 to 19). basic-1

DIS SCG x Disable SCG card x (0 or 1). basic-1

DISI IGS x Disables IGS card x (0 to 19) when idle. basic-1

Use of this command is recommended instead of DIS IGS,
which interrupts calls in progress. The command's progress
can be monitored by using the appropriate STAT command.
The command’s completion is indicated by an output of
ISR043 on the maintenance terminal.

DSPS x Disable PS card x (0 to 9). basic-1

END Stop current operation or test. basic-1

ENL IGS x Enables IGS card x (0 to 19). basic-1

ENL SCG x Enable SCG x (0 or 1). basic-1

ENPS x Disable PS card x (0 to 9). basic-1

SCLK Switch clock to other SCG. basic-1

STAT IGS x Get status of IGS card x (0 to 19). basic-1

The response of “x DSBL y BUSY” indicates the number of
junctor timeslots disabled or busy associated with the specified
IGS card.

X11 Maintenance
LD 39
Page 210 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT PER x Print status of PS card x (0 to 9). basic-1

Possible responses:
1. DSBL: NOT RESPONDING = PS card x is either missing,
faulty or disabled via the faceplate switch. If there is a
fault in the extender pair for the network shelf, the status
of the PS card will also be DSBL: NOT RESPONDING.
2. DSBL: RESPONDING = The PS card is disabled and
responding to the CPU. The PS may have been disabled
by manual request (DSPS) or the associated extender
pair may have been manually disabled.
If neither of these conditions exist, the card may have been
disabled because of an overload condition on the associated
shelf.
Check for OVD messages appearing in previous TTY output.
An attempt to enable a PS card which was disabled because of
an overload may result in a recurrence of the overload
condition: the system's service may be impaired for
approximately 2 minutes.

STAT SCG x Print status of SCG x (0 or 1). basic-1

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

222

LD 40, 42 LDs 40, 42

Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 211 of 472

LDs 40, 42: Call Detail Recording

Diagnostic
The Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature outputs call records to a single or
multi-port tape drive storage system. The tapes are processed to produce
billing reports.

The Option 51C/61C/81/81C Pseudo TTY (PTY) and Call Processor (CP)
cards do not support the CDR link maintenance commands (CDL, CTY) used
in this Overlay. When using the STAT command in this LD, the output
includes all the ports: CP and PTY.

Automatic diagnostic routines

LD 40 is run in background, during the daily routines, or automatically in
response to CDR faults. It performs the following:
— CDR Link test.
— CDR Controller status report.
— CDR data transmission/loss summary.

Fault indications reported by LD 40 are cleared after their corresponding

CDM message is output. Faults in a multi-port CDR Tape Controller are
reported to all Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 systems connected to the controller.
The fault records kept for each Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 are maintained and
cleared independently of each other by the controller.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 40, 42
Page 212 of 472 Call Detail Recording Diagnostic

Loading LD 40 manually runs the automatic fault-clearing routines. Also,

similarly to LD 42, the “CDMA loaded today” flag which prevents LD 40
from being automatically loaded more than once a day are cleared. Thus,
manually loading LD 40 or 42 allows faults detected in the afternoon to be
reported, even though previous faults may have been detected and cleared in
the morning.

To run CDMA in background, you must reload LD 40 after a trouble has been
cleared using LD 42. CDM117 X 3 is printed after LD 40 has been reloaded,
where X is the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 link or port number. This reload is
required so that the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 can react again as soon as
another error is detected.

CDR maintenance mode and commands

Use LD 42 to:
— enable/disable/give status of CDR links and TTY
— perform diagnostic tests on CDR machines
— perform manual tape functions on CDR machines
— clear alarms and the maintenance display
— clear the maintenance display of CDR machines
— clear “CDMA loaded today” flags

The CDR storage system is put into maintenance mode to test the tape drive.
While in maintenance mode, call records are saved in tape buffers. When all
the buffer space is used up, incoming call records are lost. An 8K CDR
machine can buffer about 600 call records; a 32K CDR can retain about 2500.
Use the BUFF command to write the buffer contents to tape or output it to the
I/O device.

Enter maintenance mode

1 Load CDM (LD 42).
2 Issue the PORT command to specify the CDR port.
3 Issue the GET command to put the CDR into maintenance mode.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 40, 42
Call Detail Recording Diagnostic Page 213 of 472

GET sends the “Request Maintmode” message to CDR and waits for CDR to
grant MAINTMODE, which CDR will not do until it is finished its current
activity on the drive.

When CDR grants Maintenance Mode, it also makes available a tape buffer
for the use of the read/write and RBC functions. This buffer may be loaded
with data by using the LOAD command and the contents can be output onto
the TTY by using the BUFF command without indicating which buffer to
output (it defaults to the active maintenance buffer).

Exit maintenance mode

To ensure that CDR does not stay in maintenance mode forever, CDR starts
a 30 second timer whenever it receives a request for maintenance mode. If
this timer expires, CDR resets maintenance mode. To prevent this, CDM
sends a message every 5 seconds to keep the CDR in maintenance mode.

If CDM does not send the message in time, CDR will reset maintenance mode
and a CDM017 message will appear to indicate that maintenance mode has
been lost. Pressing the UNLOAD button on CDR will also cancel
maintenance mode.

The CDR may also be released from maintenance mode using the FREE
command. When CDR leaves maintenance mode it returns to the state it was
in before it entered maintenance mode. That is, if it was in a state in which it
would not attempt to write on the drive, it will still not try to use the drive.
However, if it was using the drive before it entered the maintenance mode, it
will use one of two methods to return to using the drive:
— If it left maintenance mode because of a time-out, it will rewind to LP and
search for the first tape mark to locate the place where it should begin
writing.
— If the FREE command was used to release it from maintenance mode, it
will begin writing on the tape wherever the tape is. Thus, the tape should
be left at the same point it was before maintenance mode was entered.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 40, 42
Page 214 of 472 Call Detail Recording Diagnostic

Ensure tape integrity

The following procedure is recommended to ensure tape integrity if manual
tasks are to be performed on the drive using CDM:
1 UNLOAD the call recording tape from the drive.
2 Mount a scratch tape and put the drive on line but do not use any of the
CDR pushbuttons. Call records are now being stored in tape buffers so
this should only be done at low traffic periods.
3 Use CDM to issue the PORT and GET commands.
4 Perform tests using manual functions.
5 Issue the FREE command.
6 UNLOAD the scratch tape.
7 Remount the call-recording tape and press RESTORE to get the tape to
the proper position for writing. If the tape is nearly full, a new call
recording tape might be loaded instead to save time.

Verify proper recording

To verify that call records are being properly recorded on tape, the following
procedure may be used:
1 Issue the PORT and GET commands to go into maintenance mode.
2 Issue the FUNC BKSP 1 command to position the tape just before the
most recently written block.
3 Issue the FUNC READ command to read the most recently written
block.
4 Issue the BUFF command to output the contents of the maintenance
buffer on your I/O device.
5 Issue FREE to release the drive from maintenance mode.

This procedure may be modified easily to allow the checking of tape blocks
older than the most recent. Extreme caution is advised, however, as it is easy
to lose track of where the tape is positioned.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 40, 42
Call Detail Recording Diagnostic Page 215 of 472

If it is suspected that the tape may not be positioned just after the last data
block on tape when the FREE command is about to be issued, simply abort
the program (****). This will cause the CDR machine to time out from
maintenance mode after 30s, after which CDR will automatically restore tape
position so that data recording can continue normally.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 40, 42
Page 216 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
On Option 11 systems, Overlay 42 commands are available as described
below, with the exception that on Option 11, ESDI ports are used instead of
SDI ports.

BLOC Output hexadecimal contents of CDR tape block

BUFF Output contents of CDR maintenance mode buffer
BUFF x Output contents of tape buffer x

CCDS x Clear maintenance display of CDR on link x

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMIN AL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DIS LINK x Disable device on link x

DIS SL1 x Disable CDR device x
DIS TTY x Disable device x
DISP pg addr cnt Display CDR storage

ECHO x y Perform echo test on link x, y times

END Terminate command in progress
ENL LINK x Enable link x
ENL SL1 x Enable SL-1 machine connected to CDR link x
ENL TTY x Enable TTY x

FREE Release CDR from maintenance mode

FUNC function Initiate specified tape drive function

GET Put CDR tape unit into maintenance mode

LOAD xxxx Set buffer for a WRITE

PORT Reset port

PORT x Set up links for commands to follow

STAT x Get status of SDI x

STAT SL1 ALL, x Get status of one or all CDR ports
STOR pg addr Alter CDR storage information

TEST x Write x sets of test records to tape

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 40, 42
Alphabetical list of commands Page 217 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

BLOC Output hexadecimal contents of CDR tape block. clnk-1

BUFF Output contents of CDR maintenance mode buffer. clnk-1

BUFF x Output contents of tape buffer x. clnk-1

For a single port CDR machine, 0<x<6. For a 32K machine,
0<x<29. The contents of the buffer may change while it is
being output.

CCDS x Clear maintenance display of CDR on link x. clnk-1

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. clnk-1

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. clnk-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for clnk-1

customer c.

DIS LINK x Disable device on link x. clnk-1

DIS SL1 x Disable CDR device x. clnk-1

This command should be issued before disconnecting another
SL-1 machine from a multi-port CDR machine. DIS SL-1 x is
the inverse of ENL SL-1 x.
The commands may NOT be used to disable the SDI port
currently being used by the CDM program; i.e., “you can't
disable yourself.”
The enabled/disabled status of a SL-1 port in a multi-port CDR
machine is maintained by the CDR machine only. If the CDR
machine initializes for any reason - such as a power failure -
then the enabled/disabled status of each SL-1 port is set
according to whether the physical SDI device responds.
For this reason, the enabled/disabled status of a SL-1 port in a
multi-port CDR machine should not be considered trustworthy
over extended periods of time.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 40, 42
Page 218 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Note also that disabling a SDI port in the CDR using the DIS
SL-1 x command causes the report “SL1 x DSBL <type>
SOFT” to be given by STAT SL1 x. This status indication
remains even after the SDI pack has been physically pulled
out, until the next CDR initialization.

DIS TTY x Disable device x. You may not disable the TTY you are logged clnk-1
into.

DISP pg addr cnt

Display CDR storage. Where: clnk-1
pg = memory page 0, 2 or 3.
cnt = the number of words to output. If cnt is not entered, one
word will be output. No checking is performed on the
validity of the address. If an invalid address is provided,
the CDR machine will trap with a response time-out.
This command can be used to continue printing buffer
contents, if time-out or transmission error occurs using
the BUFF x command, rather than reissuing BUFF x
and starting from the beginning again. In this case, the
command is: DISP O addr 100
addr = given by the last 4-digit hexadecimal code preceding
the colon in the last printed line.

ECHO x y Perform echo test on link x, y times. clnk-1

A test pattern is sent to the CDR machine and the machine
echoes it back. OK is output if a successful response indicates
a fault-free link. If y is not provided, the test is performed once
only.

END Terminate command in progress. This command may be clnk-1

output at any time.

ENL LINK x Enable link x. The specified link is checked for response and clnk-1
stuck interrupt. OK is output and the link enabled if the tests
are passed.

ENL SL1 x Enable SL-1 machine connected to CDR link x. clnk-1

This command is only valid for multi-port CDR machines. It
enables new SL-1 machines connected to the CDR machine to
communicate with the CDR, without interruption of service to
existing SL-1 machines.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 40, 42
Alphabetical list of commands Page 219 of 472

ENL TTY x Enable TTY x. clnk-1

The specified TTY is checked for response and stuck interrupt.
OK is output and the TTY is enabled once the tests are
passed.

FREE Release CDR from maintenance mode. clnk-1

If the CDR tape drive is enabled, then the next tape block that
CDR has to write will be written wherever the tape was left.
Thus, if the FUNC command was used on a tape which is to
contain valid CDR data, it is imperative that the user reposition
the tape to the same position that CDR had it before the FUNC
command was used.

FUNC function Initiate specified tape drive function. Initiates the specified clnk-1
function on the tape drive.
“Function” may be one of:
1. STAT = status function
2. WID = write ID burst function
3. WTM = write tape mark
4. WFB = write contents of the maintenance tape buffer
5. READ = read block into maintenance buffer
6. RBC = perform read back check into maintenance buffer
7. SKIP x = skip x blocks in hexadecimal number
8. ERG = erase gap
9. ERAS = erase to end of tape
10. BKSP x = backspace x blocks in hexadecimal number
11. REW = rewind
12. UNL = unload
13. TERM = terminate

These commands correspond to the primitive tape functions

supported by the CDR tape handler firmware. The FUNC STAT
command causes the tape status to be printed at the TTY.
The tape status is the first word printed in response to the
BLOC command and is the “status” field of a CDM122 error
message. If the “unexpected interrupt” bit in the tape status in
ON, a word corresponding to the “unexpected” field in a
CDM122 message is printed.

X11 Maintenance
LDs 40, 42
Page 220 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

GET Put CDR tape unit into maintenance mode. clnk-1

When CDR is in this mode, it will not initiate any tape functions
of its own. A tape buffer will be allocated for CDM to use for
tape functions. Only one SL-1 system may put the CDR into
maintenance mode at one time. See the description of
maintenance mode.

LOAD xxxx Set buffer for a WRITE. clnk-1

The hexadecimal digits xxxx are propagated through the tape
buffer allocated for maintenance mode. The command is used
to set the buffer for a WRITE.

PORT Reset port. clnk-1

Resets the port so that no port is active. Enter the following
commands only after a PORT command, and only from a TTY:
DISP
STOR
BLOC
TEST x
BUFF (continued on next page)
BUFF x
GET
LOAD xxxx
FUNC
FREE
ENL SL-1 x
DIS SL-1 x
STAT SL-1 x

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LDs 40, 42
Alphabetical list of commands Page 221 of 472

PORT x Sets the links to which the following commands will apply. This clnk-1
command may only be entered from a TTY. Take care when
using the following commands with PORT or PORT x, as the
CDR may trap data or write erroneous data to tape.
DISP
STOR
BLOC
TEST x
BUFF
BUFF x
GET
LOAD xxx
FUNC
FREE
ENL SL-1 x
DIS SL-1 x
STAT SL-1 x

STAT Lists all SDI packs and specifies whether they are dedicated to clnk-1
data links or TTY; enabled or disabled. Output is:
SDI x <tty/link> <enbl/dsbl><messages> <naks>
<time-outs> <lost>
If the device is an enabled link, then the number of messages
sent, the number of transmission errors and the number of lost
call records are also output. See error code CDM121 for a
description of the <> fields.

STAT SL1 ALL, x clnk-1

Get status of one or all CDR ports. This command is used to
output the status of ports in multiport CDR machines.
The format of the output is: status type mode

Where:
status = UNEQ (unequipped), DSBL (Disabled) or ENBL
(enabled)
type = SNGL (single-port SDI) or DUAL (dual-port SDI)
mode = May be IDLE (normal idle), BUSY (normal busy), SOF
(software-disabled), NOIS (disabled for too many
interrupts), STUC (disabled for stuck interrupt
condition) or EIA (disabled for having EIA device not
ready)

X11 Maintenance
LDs 40, 42
Page 222 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT x Get status of SDI x. Output is: clnk-1

<tty/link> <enbl/dsbl/uneq> <messages> <naks>
<time-outs> <lost>
See error code CDM121 for a description of the <> fields.

STOR pg addr Alter CDR storage information. clnk-1

The old contents of the location is output and the user is
prompted for the new contents. After entering the new
contents, enter a space or carriage return.
If a carriage return is entered, the command ends. If a space is
entered, the contents of the next location are output and the
user is prompted for input. If only the carriage return or space
is entered (i.e., the new contents are not input), then the
current word is not modified. If an invalid address is provided,
CDR will response time-out.

TEST x Write x sets of test records to tape. clnk-1

Before using this command, refer to the description of the
maintenance mode prior to this table. If x is not given, the
default is 1.
As this command writes to tape, a scratch tape should be
mounted before the command is executed. PORT and GET
commands must be issued before this command can be used.
Twenty blocks of data are written to the tape, then the tape is
rewound and read to check the data. The number of errors
found is output using a CDM035 message.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

232

LD 43 LD 43
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 223 of 472

LD 43: Equipment Datadump

This program is used to keep data on the system storage device up to date.
When the datadump program is invoked, data in the read/write memory
(including any that has been changed or added) is written to the storage device
at the location reserved for it.

Option 11 systems maintain two copies of customer data. The Primary copy
on the Flash ROM software cartridge that is mounted on the CPU/Conf card
and the Secondary copy on the core system CPU/Conf card Flash ROM. The
datadumping commands for Option 11 systems allow data to be stored in a
non-volatile media for backup and upgrade purposes. Off-site storage of
customer data is addressed on the Option 11 by the NTAK80 backup
cartridge or by Remote Backup onto a PC.

The program can be invoked daily as part of the daily routines or loaded
manually. An incremental datadump occurs during the daily routines if
database changes have been made.

Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C utilize two CMDUs and disk redundancy,
LD 43 commands apply to both sides of the system. Refer to the specific
commands for the differences between Options 51C, 61C, 81 or 81C and
other systems. Refer to System installation (553-3001-210) for general
information.

Following a successful EDD on Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C, the “HI”
(Hardware Infrastructure) string is output.

X11 Maintenance
LD 43
Page 224 of 472 Equipment Datadump

When the datadump fails

In the event of an unsuccessful initial dump, the office data on the tape or disk
is suspect. Another datadump with spool option should be done on the same
tape or disk; if successful, a transient error is indicated and normal procedures
can be resumed. If this second attempt also fails, DO NOT attempt another
datadump until the fault is isolated and corrected.

If the storage medium is not proved faulty and the storage device appears
serviceable, datadumping to an OLD tape or disk, if available, may help to
pinpoint the problem.

Except during the troubleshooting phase, storage medium which has failed to
datadump successfully must not be left in the storage device. Should a
SYSLOAD occur with such a storage medium, the load may terminate
abnormally with unpredictable results.

Low memory warning

Unprotected data store equal in size to the length of the records being written
(i.e., 512 words) must be available to the datadump program.

A low memory warning message (SCH603) is issued when spare unprotected

data store falls below a given threshold. Once this warning message has been
issued, it is not possible to perform a datadump as the system requires spare
unprotected data store equivalent to the size of a record on the storage
medium (i.e., 512 words).

Users should ensure that these amounts of spare unprotected data store are
available before attempting to perform a datadump.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 43
Option 11 ROM selection for SYSLOAD Page 225 of 472

Option 11 ROM selection for SYSLOAD

The following table shows where the system will load from with the software
cartridge Flash ROM and CPU/Conf card Flash ROM in their different states.

CPU/Conf Card Flash

Software Cartridge Flash ROM State
ROM State
PREP EDD UPG UPS
PREP Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge
EDD Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge CPU/Conf
UPG CPU/Conf Cartridge Cartridge CPU/Conf

The state of both the CPU/CONF card Flash ROM and the Software Cartridge
Flash ROM determine where the data is loaded from during SYSLOAD.

The following message occurs on SYSLOAD:

DATA FROM XXXXX YYY/ZZZ

Where:

Code Represents Description

Data is loaded from the CPU/Conf Flash ROM during
SCORE
SYSLOAD
XXXXX
Data is loaded from the software cartridge Flash ROM during
CART
SYSLOAD
YYY CPU/CONF card state (PREP, EDD or UPG)
ZZZ S/W cartridge state (PREP, EDD, UPS or UPG)

Note: Software cartridges are sent from the factory in the PREP state.

X11 Maintenance
LD 43
Page 226 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
The following commands are applicable to all machines, except Option 11
systems. See the list of Option 11 system commands for further information.

BKO Copy data from primary to backup device

DAT Print the data issue and creation date of the primary and backup
database

EDD Invoke datadump program

EDD CLR Clear datadump inhibit flag
EDD CN Save CND names (use prior to datadump)
EDD DP xx xx ..xx Dump patch
EDD GP Get patch
EDD HM Save AWU, RMS and MR data (prior to dump)
EDD IWC Inhibits write check: caution
EDD NBK Inhibit database backup
EDD NS Inhibit tape far-end spool
EDD NX Write tape data records
EDD SA Complete data dump and bypass software audit
EDD SP Spool tape to far-end
PBX CF6 (ALLOWED) Bit dumped with PBX data block

RES Copy entire contents of backup to primary device

SWP Swap (exchange) main and “.bak” data files on the primary flash drive

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 43
Option 11/11E commands Page 227 of 472

Option 11/11E commands

Please note that the Option 11E displays a percentage symbol (%) on the TTY
(approximately one symbol every two seconds) to signify that a command
listed below is being executed. To avoid data corruption, do not attempt to
exit the Overlay or enter another command until the last command entered
has been fully executed.

Additional information on upgrade procedures is contained in the Option 11

Administration Guide.

BKO Copy data from primary to backup device

DAT Print the data issue and creation date of the primary and backup database

EDD Invoke datadump program

EDD CLR Clear datadump inhibit flag
EDD DP xx xx.... xx
Customer data and the specified patches (xx xx...xx) are dumped onto disk
EDD DR1 Clears pre-programmed data from a software cartridge in PREP state
EDD GP Get patches
EDD HM Save AWU, RMS and MR data (prior to dump)
EDD NBK Dumps data only to the Flash ROM on the software cartridge, and marks it as an
“EDD” copy
EDD SDI Dump data in ASCII format out the active SDI port

RES Restore files to the primary device from the external backup device

SWP Swap (exchange) main and “.bak” data files on the primary flash drive

UPG Upgrade

UPS Force the system to load the customer data from the Flash ROM on the CPU/Conf
card

X11 Maintenance
LD 43
Page 228 of 472 Option 11C commands

Option 11C commands

BKO Copy data from primary to backup device

DAT Print the data issue and creation date of the primary and backup database.

EDD Invoke data dump and write entered data to the primary and internal backup drives
EDD CLR Clear datadump inhibit flag
EDD HM Save AWU, RMS and MR data (prior to dump)
EDD IWC Inhibits write check (for emergency use only)
EDD NBK Invoke data dump and write entered data to the primary and internal backup drives

RES Restore files to the primary device from the external backup device
RIB Restore backup files from the internal backup device into the primary device

SWP Swap (exchange) main and “.bak” data files on the primary flash drive

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 43
Alphabetical list of commands Page 229 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

BKO Copy data base from primary device (Winchester disk) to basic-19
backup device (floppy disk). BKO is applicable to systems with
hard disk storage, including Option 11 and Option 11C.

DAT Print the creation date of the main, secondary, or backup basic-18
database.
The DAT command may be used for both Option 11 and
Option 11C systems.

EDD Invoke datadump program non-Option 11 Systems, Option 11, basic-1

and Option 11C.
For system Option 81, EDD creates backups to floppy disks for
both CMDUs if redundancy is in effect and both CDMUs
contain floppy disks. For system Option 61C, EDD creates
backups to floppy disks for the active CDMU.
This command dumps data to the Flash ROMs on both the
CPU/Conf card and the software cartridge., and marks each as
an “EDD” copy.

EDD CLR Clear datadump inhibit flag basic-1

This flag is set because SYSLOAD or the conversion programs
detect incomplete or inconsistent equipment data. Exercise
caution since the use of this option may result in incorrect data
being written.
The EDD CLR command may be used for both Option 11 and
Option 11C systems.

EDD CN Save CND names. basic-1

EDD CN saves the names associated with DNs for Caller's
Name Display. Use Prior to datadump.

EDD DP xx xx xx... basic-18

Dump patch
Customer data and the specified patches (xx xx...xx) are
dumped onto disk. If no patch numbers are specified, then only
customer data is dumped.
The EDD DP command may be used for Option 11, but it is not
supported for Option 11C systems.

X11 Maintenance
LD 43
Page 230 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

EDD DR1 Clears pre-programmed data basic-18

Any service change which would cause LD 43 to be run under
midnight routines will also block an EDD DR1 command, even
if the cartridge is in the PREP state. If this occurs the EDD DR1
may still be done by reloading the software cartridge and then
performing the EDDþDR1.
The EDD DR1 command may be used for Option 11, but it is
not supported for Option 11C systems.

EDD GP Get patches ph-6

The non-patch customer data from the core memory is placed
on the new disk without overwriting the preloaded patches on
the disk. Any patches in the system are also ignored.
The EDD GP command may be used for Option 11, but it is not
supported for Option 11C systems.

EDD HM Saves Automatic Wake Up (AWU), Room Status (RMS) and basic-1
Message Registration (MR) data. Use prior to datadump, then
system load. This should be performed prior to a SYSLOAD or
software conversion.
The EDD HM command may be used for both Option 11 and
Option 11C systems.

EDD IWC Inhibits write check. basic-1

Caution: for Emergency Use Only. Inhibits write check. This
command is useful when the standard commands for
datadump fail and end-of-file cannot be found. It writes an
end-of-file on tape and allows other commands to be invoked.
The EDD IWC command may be used for both Option 11 and
Option 11C systems.

EDD NBK Inhibit database backup. basic-1

Indicates that a database backup should not be done after a
datadump. (Applicable to hard disk storage with floppy disk
backup). (For non-Option 11 systems)
For Option 11 sytems, this command dumps data only to the
Flash ROM on the software cartridge, and marks it as “EDD”
copy.
For Option 11C systems, this command invokes a data dump
and writes entered data to primary and internal backup drives.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 43
Alphabetical list of commands Page 231 of 472

EDD NS Inhibit tape far-end spool. basic-1

Tape will not spool to the far-end and will not perform write test.
Default option is SP. Overlay program cannot be aborted until
writing has either been completed or has failed.
This command applies to systems equipped with tape units.

EDD NX Writes tape data records consistent in size with predefined basic-1
system values. Default option is NX.

EDD SA This command is used to complete the data dump and bypass basic-18
the software audit of Peripheral Controller and superloop data.

EDD SDI Datadump to active SDI port.

For information on backing up your data onto a backup
cartridge or a PC, please refer to either the Option 11
Administration Guide or the Option 11 Customer Configuration
Backup and Restore Guide.
The EDD DR1 command may be used for Option 11, but it is
not supported for Option 11C systems.

EDD SP Spool tape to far-end. This command applies to systems basic-1

equipped with tape units.
Spools tape to the far-end in order to even the tension on the
tape. Also writes a test record after the end of existing data to
check for any write problems. If errors occur during test, data
should remain intact.

PBX CF6 (ALLOWED) basic-1

Bit dumped with PBX data block.

RES Copy entire contents of backup device (floppy diskettes) to basic-19

primary device (Winchester disk). Applicable to
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 with hard disk storage.
For Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C, this command copies the
contents of the floppy disks on the active CMDU to both hard
disks providing redundancy is in effect. If redundancy is not in
effect, this command copies the floppy disk contents to the
active CMDU.

For Options 11 and 11C in X11 Release 22, the RES command
may be entered to restore files to the primary device from the
external backup device.

X11 Maintenance
LD 43
Page 232 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

RIB Restore backup files from the internal backup device into the opt11c-22
primary device (Option 11C)

SWP Exchange (swap) main and secondary database files. A basic-19

sysload is required for the swap to take effect.
The SWP command may be used for both Option 11 and
Option 11C systems.

UPG Upgrade basic-1

This command dumps data to the Flash ROMs on both the
CPU/Conf card and the software cartridge, and marks both
ROMs as “UPG” copies.
The UPG command may be used for Option 11, but it is not
supported for Option 11C systems.

UPS Force the system to load the customer data from the Flash basic-1
ROM on the CPU/Conf card
Data is dumped to the Flash ROM on the software cartridge
only, and marked as a “UPS” copy.
The UPS command may be used for Option 11, but it is not
supported for Option 11C systems.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

234

LD 44 LD 44
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 233 of 472

LD 44: Software Audit

The audit program (LD 44) monitors system operation and provides an
indication of the general state of system operation. The program is concerned
mostly with the system software. When a software problem is encountered,
the program outputs an AUD message and attempts to clear the problem
automatically.

With X11 Release 23 the audit program is changed to recognize and handle
various new scenarios added by Music or Recorded Announcement
Broadcast features. The following new checks are performed by audit for
broadcasting trunks:

— Check the list of call registers connected to the broadcasting trunk and
verify that the size of this list matches the number of callers connected
according to the counter in the unprotected trunk block
— ensure that a trunk marked as broadcasting does indeed have more than
one caller connected to it
— go through the list of call registers connected to the broadcasting trunk
and ensure that the list is linked correctly from beginning to end
— all call registers in the broadcasting trunk call register list should point
back to the broadcasting trunk
— various checks are done on the connections for a broadcasting call
— check through the list of call registers queued for and ensure the list is
linked correctly from beginning to end

X11 Maintenance
LD 44
Page 234 of 472 Software Audit

Running software audit

The Audit program is enabled as a Background Program or Daily Routine in
the configuration record. See prompts BKGD and DROL in LD 17. To load
the Audit program manually, enter:
LD 44

Rx

Where, x is the number of audit passes required.

Enter 0 for continuous auditing. R and x must be separated by a space or the

system responds with:

AUD REQ ERR.

AUDIT

The Meridian Mail MP data base audit (co-administration) is run during

Audit if a data base mismatch is known by the system, or if it is being run
manually.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

250

LD 45 LD 45
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 235 of 472

LD 45: Background Signaling and Switching

Diagnostic
This program performs network continuity tests and outputs detected
problems via BSD messages.

The Manual Continuity Test (MCT) allows you to isolate intermittent faulty
points reported by the Background Continuity Test (BCT). For example, BCT
reports faults between A, B, and C. Run the MCT between A and B, then
between B and C to determine how often it fails.

When run in background, LD 45 tests the following on all enabled network

loops:

— the continuity of the speech path between each network card and its
associated PE shelves is tested
— the continuity of the speech path between all network card is tested
— non functioning paths between network cards are identified

Note: When running in background, only new faults detected are output.

For systems running Release 15 and later, memory and signaling tests are
only performed in LD 30. If LD 45 is included in background or midnight
routines it is recommended that LD 30 also be included. By including LD 30,
bad memory areas will be flagged before the continuity tests of LD 45 which
will improve fault isolation.

On Option 11 systems, this Overlay program is not available. Use Overlay

program 30 (LD 30) to perform signaling tests on these systems.

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 236 of 472 Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command

Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command

The XCON command is used to test various communication paths on or
between NT8D04 Network, NT8D01 Controller, Multipurpose ISDN
Signaling Processor (MISP), S/T-Interface Line (SILC) and U-Interface Line
(UILC) cards. There are 10 paths XCON may test. Table 10 and Table 11
show 8 of these paths. Only 1 XCON test at a time can be run on a superloop.

To begin a manual extended continuity test, enter one of the following:

— XCON 0 = perform test once and output results
— XCON H hhh = repeat test for hhh hours (hhh = 1-255)
— XCON M mmm = repeat test for mmm minutes (mmm = 1-255)
— XCON S sss = repeat test for sss seconds (sss = 1-255)

After you enter a XCON command, you are prompted for a combination of
the values listed below. The responses to these prompts determine the test
performed.

Prompt — Response — Comment

DSLT — xx — Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card

associated with detector Controller.

GSLT — xx — Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card

associated with generator Controller.

JUNC — x — Junctor number (0-7).

LBTN — l s c u — Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit) to be loopback

point.

LBTY— N/P — Loopback address: N = Network Card, P = Controller or

terminal.

Note: When using XCON Test 9 for ISDN BRI, the possible responses
for LBTY are 3 or 4. 3 indicated the test will take place with the DSL
enabled; 4 performs the test with the DSL disabled.

PATT — x — Test pattern number (0-7). Signal sent by the generator to the
detector. You should run a test several times with varying patterns.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command Page 237 of 472

SLOT — xx — Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127). Enter return (<cr>)

to select a random timeslot.

SUPL — l — Superloop number (0-156, in multiples of 4).

TAG — x — Tag number (1-15) returned by the system. Tag number 0 is

used for one-shot tests (XCON 0).

TEST — x — Test case number (1-8).

TN — l s c u — Controller or terminal (loop, shelf, card, unit) to be the

detector. For Controller, enter any valid TN on Controller's shelf. For
special loopback channel enter: l s 99 0.

TYPD — N/P — Pattern detector: N = Network Card, P = Controller.

TYPG — N/P — Pattern generator: N = Network Card, P = Controller.

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 238 of 472 Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command

Figure 10
XCON test paths

Pattern Generator Pattern Detector

TEST 1
Superloop Network Network Controller
Card toController Card

TEST 2
Controller Card to
Controller Network
Superloop Network Card

TEST 3
Superloop Network Card Network Network
to Superloop Network A B
Card

TEST 4
Controller Card to Controller Controller
Network
Controller Card A B
OR
Controller Network Network Controller
A A B B

553-3008

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
Using the manual extended continuity (XCON) command Page 239 of 472

Figure 11
XCON test paths (continued)

Pattern Generator
Pattern Detector Loopback Point
TEST 5
Superloop Network Card Network
Network
through Backplane Backplane

TEST 6
Superloop Network Card
Network Controller
through Controller Card

TEST 7
Controller Card through Special
Controller
Special Channel Loopback
Channel *

TEST 8
Superloop Network Card Special
Network Loopback
through Special Channel
Channel *
553-3009
* Special loopback channels are used to verify the integrity of the continuity
generators and detectors. Run these tests first.

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 240 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
NSIG Perform the network memory and continuity tests (Release 14 and earlier)

TEST (loop) Perform a complete continuity test for one or all loops. Unpluged cards are
not tested for continuity.

XCON 0 Perform Extended Continuity test once and output results. User will be
prompted for TEST number. See “XCON sub-prompts” on page 241.

XCON H hhh Repeat Extended Continuity test for hhh hours (hhh = 1-255). User will be
prompted for TEST number. See “XCON sub-prompts” on page 241.

XCON M mmm Repeat Extended Continuity test for mm minutes (mm = 1-255). User will
be prompted for TEST number. See “XCON sub-prompts” on page 241.

XCON S sss Repeat Extended Continuity test for ss seconds (ss = 1-255). User will be
prompted for TEST number. See “XCON sub-prompts” on page 241.

XINF Display the tag numbers of all running and completed continuity tests

XSTA x Get the status of manual continuity test with TAG = x

XSTP x Stop manual continuity test with TAG = x

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
XCON sub-prompts Page 241 of 472

XCON sub-prompts
TEST = 1

Test Path Network Card to Controller. Pack/Rel

This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern xpe-15
generator and the Controller (NT8D01) as the detector.
Prompt Response Description
TEST 1 Network Card to Controller
TYPE SL Test superloop (SL)
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG N Network Card is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127. SLOT
appears if Remote IPE package 286 is not
equipped.
TYPD P Controller is detector
E1 Carrier = Timesot : 0 = 5-31 ; 1 = 37-63 ; 2 = 69-95
T-1 Carrier = Timesot : 0 = 5-25 ; 1 = 37-57 ; 2 = 69-89
TN lscu Valid TN on the Controller
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 2

Test Path Controller to Network Card. Pack/Rel

This test uses the Controller (NT8D01) as a pattern generator xpe-15
and the Network Card (NT8D04) as the detector.
Prompt Response Description
TEST 2 Controller to Network Card
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG P Controller is generator
TN lscu Valid TN on the Controller
TYPD N Network Card is detector
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 242 of 472 XCON sub-prompts

TEST = 3

Test Path Network Card to different Network Card. Pack/Rel

This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern xpe-15
generator and another Network Card as the detector.
Prompt Response Description
TEST 3 Network Card to different Network Card
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG N Network Card is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
TYPD N Network Card is detector
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
JUNC x Junctor if Network cards in different groups
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 4

Test Path Controller to different Controller. Pack/Rel

This test uses a Controller (NT8D01) as a pattern generator and xpe-15
another Controller as a detector. The pattern is sent through one
or two Network Cards (NT8D04).
Prompt Response Description
TEST 4 Controller to different Controller
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG P Controller is generator
TN lscu Valid TN on the Controller
TYPD P Controller is detector
TN lscu Valid TN on the Controller
GSLT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 on generator Network Card
DSLT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127 on detector Network Card
JUNC x Junctor if Network cards in different groups
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
XCON sub-prompts Page 243 of 472

TEST = 5

Test Path Network Card to Network Card (loop back at backplane). Pack/Rel
This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern xpe-15
generator and detector. The pattern is sent to the network
backplane and back.
Prompt Response Description
TEST 5 Network Card to Network Card (loop back at backplane)
PATT x pattern (0-7)
TYPG N Network Card is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
TYPD N Network Card is detector
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
LBTY N through network backplane
TAG xx tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 6

Test Path Network Card to Network Card (loop back through Controller). Pack/Rel
This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern xpe-15
generator and detector. The pattern is looped back through a
Controller (NT8D01).
Prompt Response Description
TEST 6 Network Card to Network Card (loop back through Controller)
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG N Network Card is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
TYPD N Network Card is detector
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT xxx Timeslot 2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127
LBTY P Through Controller
LBTN l s 99 0 Special Controller loop back channel
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 244 of 472 XCON sub-prompts

TEST = 7

Test Path Controller to Controller (special loop back channel). Pack/Rel

This test uses the Controller (NT8D01) as a pattern generator xpe-15
and detector. The pattern is looped back through a special loop
back channel.

Prompt Response Description

TEST 7 Controller to Controller (special loop back channel)
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG P Controller is generator
TN l s 99 0 Special Controller loop back channel
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 8

Test Path Network Card to Network Card (special loop back channel). Pack/Rel
This test uses the Network Card (NT8D04) as a pattern xpe-15
generator and detector. The pattern is looped back through a
special channel which is specified by timeslot 128.

Prompt Response Description

TEST 8 Network Card to Network Card (special loop back channel)
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG N Network Card is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT 128 Special Network loop back channel
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
XCON sub-prompts Page 245 of 472

TEST = 9

Test Path Loop back test on Digital Subscriber Loop. Pack/Rel

This test uses the MISP as a pattern generator and detector. The bri-18
pattern goes through the Network and Controller Card and is
looped back at a single DSL. Both B- and D-channels are looped
back.
Prompt Response Description
TEST 9 Loop back test on Digital Subscriber Loop
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG N Network Card is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT 128 Special Network loop back channel
LBTY 3 DSL is requested for loop back
LBTN lscd Address of DSL
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

TEST = 10

Test Path Loop back test on BRI line card. Pack/Rel

This test uses the MISP as a pattern generator and detector. The bri-18
pattern goes through the Network and Controller Card and is
looped back at the line card level (i.e., bus loop back). Both B-
and D-channels are looped back.
Prompt Response Description
TEST 10 Loop back test on BRI line card
PATT x Pattern (0-7)
TYPG 5 MISP is generator
SUPL loop 0-156 in multiples of 4
SLOT 128 Special Network loop back channel
LBTY 4 loop back at line card
LBTN lscd Address of DSL
TAG xx Tag number (1-15) assigned by the system

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 246 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

NSIG Perform the network memory and continuity tests (Release 14 basic-1
and earlier).
No signaling test is done. All faults detected are reported. If no
faults are detected, “OK” is output. This command is not
available in Release 15 and later.

TEST (loop) Perform a complete continuity test for one or all loops. basic-1
Performs a complete test and reports all faults detected (even
if they have been previously reported).

XCON 0 Perform Extended Continuity test once, then output results. xpe-15
After entering this command, you will then be able to select
and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These XCON tests
begin on page 241.

XCON H hhh Perform Extended Continuity test for hhh (1-255) hours, then xpe-15
output results. After entering this command, you will then be
able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These
XCON tests begin on page 241.

XCON M mmm Perform Extended Continuity test for mmm (1-255) minutes, xpe-15
then output results. After entering this command, you will then
be able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests.
These XCON tests begin on page 241.

XCON S sss Perform Extended Continuity test for sss (1-255) seconds, then xpe-15
output results. After entering this command, you will then be
able to select and conduct 1 of 10 possible XCON tests. These
XCON tests begin on page 241.

XINF Display the tag numbers of all running and completed tests. xpe-15
The output format (where T# = Tag Number) is:
RUNNING:
T# T# T# T#. . . .
DONE:
T# T# T# T#. . . .
SUSPENDED:
T# T# T# T#. . . .
FREE: x x (number of free tags available [0-15])

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
Alphabetical list of commands Page 247 of 472

XSTA x Get the status of manual continuity test with TAG = x. xpe-15
Individual tests are identified by the tag number the system
generates when you complete a sequence of test prompts.
See also the XINF and XSTP commands.
The test status provides the following format information:
PATT x Pattern number
GENERATE: Generator information follows:
TYPG N/P Network or Controller as pattern generator
SUPL x Superloop number or TN on Controller
SLOT x Timeslot
DETECT: Detector information follows:
TYPD N/P Network or Controller as pattern detector
SUPL x Superloop number or TN on Controller
SLOT x Timeslot
RESULTS: Results follow:
TESTS COMPLETED: xxxxxxxx
TESTS FAILED: xxxxxxxx

XSTP x Stop manual continuity test with TAG = x. Individual tests are xpe-15
identified by the tag numbers. The XSTP command outputs the
test status. See also XINF and XSTA commands.

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 248 of 472 Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts

Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts

Prompt Response Description

DSLT xxx Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card
associated with detector Controller

GSLT xxx Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127) for Network Card
associated with generator Controller

JUNC x Junctor number (0-7)

LBTN l s c u or l s c d Loop back Controller or Terminal Number. Where: l = loop,

s = shelf, c = card, u = unit, and d = Digital Subscriber Loop
(DSL).

LBTY y Loop back Type (3, 4, N, or P). Where:

• 3 = Digital Subscriber Loop
• 4 = Line Card
• N = Network Card
• P = Controller or Terminal

PATT x Test pattern (0-7) sent by the generator to the detector

SLOT xxx Timeslot (2-31, 34-63, 66-95, 98-127). Enter return (<cr>) to
select a random timeslot. For special loop back slot enter: 128.

SUPL loop Superloop number (0-156, in multiples of 4)

TAG xx Tag number (0-15) returned by the system. Tag number 0 is

used for one-shot tests (XCON 0).

TEST xx XCON test path (1-10). Where:

• 1 = Network Card to Controller
• 2 = Controller to Network Card
• 3 = Network Card to different Network Card
• 4 = Controller to different Controller
• 5 = Network Card to Network Card (loop back at
backplane)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 45
Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts Page 249 of 472

• 6 = Network Card to Network Card (loop back through

Controller)
• 7 = Controller to Controller (special loop back channel)
• 8 = Network Card to Network Card (special loop back
channel)
• 9 = Loop back test on Digital Subscriber loop
• 10 =Loop back test on BRI line card

TN lscu Controller or terminal (loop, shelf, card, unit) to be the detector.

For Controller, enter any valid TN on Controller's shelf. For
special loop back channel enter: l s 99 0.

TYPD y Type of Pattern Detector (N or P). Where: N = Network Card

and P = Controller.

TYPG y Type of Pattern Generator (5, N, or P). Where:

• 5 = Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor
• N = Network Card
• P = Controller

X11 Maintenance
LD 45
Page 250 of 472 Alphabetical list of XCON sub-prompts

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

254

LD 46 LD 46
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 251 of 472

LD 46: Multifrequency Sender Diagnostic

for Automatic Number Identification
This program is used to maintain the Multifrequency Sender card. The
Multifrequency Sender pack provides multifrequency signals of Automatic
Number Identification (ANI) digits over Centralized Automatic Message
Accounting (CAMA) trunks to a toll switching CAMA, Traffic Operator
Position System (TOPS) or Traffic Service Position System (TSPS).

The MFS diagnostic program can be run in background, during the daily
routines, or manually to enter commands. It performs the following tests:
— checks that the MF Sender pack responds to system I/O functions
— tests the 30-channel memory locations, the 480 (30 x 16) digit buffer
memory locations and the 64 First-in, First-out locations
— exercises all 15-digit codes with digit strings from 2 to 16 digits long and
verifies both the 68 ms pulse width and whether each string outpulses to
completion

No check is possible on MFS frequencies used in each tone burst due to the
lack of receivers in the system. Also, no check can be made as to whether the
correct digits are being outpulsed.

Program 46 is not supported on Option 11 systems.

X11 Maintenance
LD 46
Page 252 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank
CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)

DISL loop Disable MFS loop

DISX loop Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop + 1

END Stop all current testing

ENLL loop Enable loop
ENLX loop Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop and loop + 1

MFS loop Test and enable MFS loop

STAT loop Get status of MFS loop

TONE loop Enter input mode to provide MF tone bursts

TONE loop ALL Provide MF tone bursts for all digits on specified loop

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 46
Alphabetical list of commands Page 253 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clear the maintenance display on active CPU to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMAJ Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power basic-1
fault alarm.

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c. (not applicable for Release 22)

DISL loop Disable MFS loop. For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards, basic-1
see ENLL command.

DISX loop Disable NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card on loop and xct-15

loop + 1.
Disables the entire combined Conference, Tone and Digit
Switch, and MF Sender (XCT) card. Both the even numbered
TDS/MFS loop and adjacent conference loop are disabled.
Where: loop = 0, 2, 4,. . . 158
The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even
number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only
prevents the loop from being used by software and does not
affect the hardware status of the card.
The ENLX and DISX commands are recommended. The ENLX
command must be used if the DISX command was used to
disable the card.
This command can be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.

END Stop all current testing. basic-1

ENLL loop Enable loop. basic-1

For NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards the DISX and ENLX
commands must be used whenever the faceplate switch of the
card has been toggled. ENLL will software enable the card but
the card will not be properly reset.

X11 Maintenance
LD 46
Page 254 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENLX loop Enable NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card on loop and xct-15

loop + 1.
Enables all functions on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.
Both the even numbered TDS/MFS loop and adjacent
conference loop are enabled. Where: loop = 0, 2, 4. . . 158
If one of the loops is already enabled, it is disabled and then
both loops are enabled. Enabling more than 16 conference
loops may cause system to lock-up.
This command initiates card tests, downloads software and can
be used in LD 34, LD 38 and LD 46.
The DISL and ENLL commands can be used on the even
number loop for the TDS/MFS functions. However, this only
prevents the loop from being used by software and does not
affect the hardware status of the card. The ENLX and DISX
commands are recommended.
The Conf/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is
inserted.

MFS loop Test and enable MFS loop. basic-1

STAT loop Get status of MFS loop. Response is: basic-1

• LOOP UNEQ—loop is unequipped
• LOOP DSBL—loop is disabled
• CHAN yy—number of channels busy
• xx DSBL yy BUSY—number of channels disabled &
busy
• NOT MFS—loop is not an MFS loop

TONE loop Enter input mode to provide MF tone bursts. basic-1

TONE loop ALL basic-1

Provide MF tone bursts for all digits on specified loop (1 to 9, 0,
11 to 15, in that order).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

310

LD 48 LD 48
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 255 of 472

LD 48: Link Diagnostic

The Link Diagnostic program is used to maintain data links used with various
special features and auxiliary data links. A maintenance telephone cannot use
LD 48.

Automatic Call Distribution Links

When equipped with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature, the
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 is supplemented with an Auxiliary Data Store
(ADS) minicomputer system. The auxiliary data processor is located external
to the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 and is connected via a high-speed link and
a low-speed link.

The high-speed link is used for transmission of ACD-related messages

between the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 and the auxiliary processor; the
low-speed link is used for transmission of maintenance/error messages
between the maintenance TTY (connected to the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1)
and the auxiliary processor.

Note: When enabling a high-speed link (using the command

“ENL HSL” or “ENL SDI HIGH” in LD 48 ), the craftsperson must log
out of the TTY to receive a message from the switch which confirms that
the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled.

Each Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) consists of a single Serial Data

Interface (SDI) port connected via an interface cable to an interface port on
the auxiliary processor.

ACD High speed and low speed link monitor

The ACD monitor diagnoses messages which flow across the link. This tool
is useful to someone experienced with message formats and protocols.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 256 of 472 Link Diagnostic

APL monitor
The APL monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the
link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats
and protocols.

Integrated Messaging System Links

The link maintenance capabilities provided for Integrated Messaging System
(IMS) and Integrated Voice Messaging System (IVMS) links allow the link
to be disabled/enabled and put into the maintenance mode.

The link software/hardware status can also be displayed. The program allows
the craftsman to request that the printouts of all packed and/or unpacked
messages be sent over a specified APL link.

Using print options (packed/unpacked messages) and observing the patterns

of messages sent over the link, the most probable fault location (AUX,
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 or SDI cable) can be determined.

Command and Status Links (CSL)

The Command and Status Link is an application protocol used for
communication between the Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 CPU and an external
Value Added Server such as the Meridian Mail MP. The CSL runs on an
Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card.

In addition to the tests in LD 48, resident firmware diagnostics for the CSLs
and ESDIs can output CSA, ESDA, ESDI error messages.

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL)

MSDL provides 4 ports for applications such as ISDN Primary Rate
D-channels (DCH) and Application Module Links (AML). With X11
Release 19 and later, the MSDL card supports SDI functions.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Link Diagnostic Page 257 of 472

The MSDL commands are listed below, where x is the MSDL device number
(defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These are provided in Link Diagnostic
(LD 48) and D-channel Maintenance (LD 96), and I/O Diagnostic (LD 37).

DIS MSDL x (ALL) — Disable MSDL card

ENL MSDL x (FDL, ALL) — Enable MSDL card
RST MSDL x — Reset MSDL card
STAT MSDL (x (FULL)) — Get MSDL status
SLFT MSDL x — Execute a self-test on MSDL card x
These are provided in Link Diagnostic (LD 48) and D-channel Maintenance
(LD 96), and I/O Diagnostic (LD 37) Overlays.

Application Module Link (AML)

An Application Module Link (AML) provides a connection to applications
such as Meridian Link. The AML is configured on an Enhanced Serial Data
Interface (ESDI) or Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card.

In X11 Release 18 and later, CMS and ESDI commands are replaced by the
following AML commands:

Old command New command

ENL ESDI x ENL AML x LYR2
DIS ESDI x DIS AML x LYR2
ENL CMS x ENL AML x LYR7
DIS CMS x DIS AML x LYR7
CON ESDI x EST AML x
DSC ESDI x RLS AML x
ACMS x AML x ACMS
SLFT ESDI x SLFT AML x
STAT CMS (x) STAT AML x
STAT ESDI (x) STAT AML x
SWCH CMS x SWCH AML x y

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 258 of 472 Link Diagnostic

AML/CSL monitor
The AML monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the
link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats
and protocols.

ISDN BRI monitor

This capability is used to monitor input/output messages to the MISP and
SILC/UILC. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message
formats and protocols. A password is required for DGB and MON options.
The SETM TNx, RSET TNx and RSET ALL commands are also available
for digital telephones.

Caution: Use of the SETM MISP loop MON commands may use all system
printing registers and cause an initialization.

Single Terminal Access (STA)

Single Terminal Access (STA) is an application available on the MSDL card
with X11 Release 19 and later. The STA application reduces the number of
physical devices used to administer and maintain the Meridian 1 and its
auxiliary processors.

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA)

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) is available with X11 Release 19
and Meridian Mail 9. It allows for Integrated Voice Mailbox Administration.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Basic commands Page 259 of 472

Basic commands
Table of contents

Section Page

Basic commands 260

ACD High speed and low speed link commands 264
ACD High speed and low speed link monitor commands 264
AML commands 265
AML over Ethernet (ELAN) commands 265
AML/CSL monitor commands 266
Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands 268
APL monitor commands 268
CSL commands (X11 Release 17 and earlier) 269
Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands 270
ISDN BRI monitor commands 271
Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands 272
Single Terminal Access (STA) commands 272
Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands 273

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 260 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
ACMS x Automatic set-up for Command and Status link x

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c
CON ESDI x Set up link layer of HDLC protocol

DIS AML x Disable AML x

DIS AML x AUTO Disable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only)
DIS AML x LYR2 Disable layer two on AML x
DIS AML x LYR7 Disable layer seven on AML x
DIS AML x MDL Disable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only)
DIS AML x MON Disable monitor on AML x (MSDL only)

DIS APL x Put software AUX link x in maintenance mode

DIS CMS x Disable Command and Status link x
DIS ESDI x Disable ESDI x
DIS HSL Disable the high-speed link
DIS ICP x Put ICP link x into maintenance mode
DIS ISDI x Disable hardware AUX link SDI x

DIS MON Disable the monitor-bit of high-speed link data

DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL device x
DIS MSGI x Disable the MSGI option
DIS MSGO x Disable the MSGO option
DIS PACI x Disable the PACI option
DIS PACO x Disable the PACO option
DIS PPRT x Disable packet message print option on link x
DIS PRNT Disable the print-bit of high-speed link data
DIS SDI HIGH Disable the SDI port for high-speed link
DIS SDI LOW Disable the SDI port for low-speed link
DIS STA x Disable the STA application.
DIS UPRT x Disable unpacket message print on AUX link x

DSC ESDI x Disconnect the link

DSIC LSTI x Disable printing of lost input messages on link x
DSIC LSTO x Disable printing of lost output messages on link x
DSIC MSGI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input queue level
DSIC MSGO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output queue
level
DSIC PACI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level
DSIC PACO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Basic commands Page 261 of 472

ENIC LSTI x Enable printing of lost input messages on link x

ENIC LSTO x Enable printing of lost output messages on link x
ENIC MSGI x Enable printing of messages on link x at input queue level
ENIC MSGO x Enable printing of messages on link x at output queue level
ENIC PACI x Enable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level
ENIC PACO x Enable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level

ENL AML x Enable AML x

ENL AML x ACMS Enable automatic set-up on AML x (ESDI only)
ENL AML x AUTO Enable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only)
ENL AML x FDL Force download loadware to the MSDL card and enable AML x
ENL AML x LYR2 Enable layer two on AML x
ENL AML x LYR7 Enable layer seven on AML x
ENL AML x MDL Enable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only)
ENL AML x MON Enable monitor on AML x (MSDL only)

EST AML x Establish layer two on AML x

ENL APL x Put software AUX link x in non-maintenance mode

ENL CMS x Enable CSL x
ENL ESDI x Enable ESDI x
ENL HSL Enable the high-speed link
ENL ICP x Enable ICP link x
ENL ISDI x Enable AUX link SDI x
ENL MON Print software information at maintenance TTY
ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) Enable MSDL device x
ENL MSGI x Print incoming messages from link x
ENL MSGO x Print outgoing messages from link x
ENL PACI x Print incoming messages from link x
ENL PACO x Print outgoing messages from link x
ENL PPRT x Enable packet message print option on link x
ENL PRNT Connect high-speed link to TTY
ENL SDI HIGH Enable SDI port for high-speed link
ENL SDI LOW Enable SDI port for low-speed link

ENL UPRT x Enable unpacked message print on link x

ENLX MSGI x p Output incoming priority p messages from link x
ENLX MSGO x p Output outgoing priority p messages from link x
ENL STA x (FDL) Enable STA application. The MSDL card must be enabled to
implement this command.

ICP ADD xxxx Set up additional information xxxx to be used in the ICP message

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 262 of 472 Basic commands

ICP CLR Clear previous ICP message set up without sending it

ICP DN xxxx Set up ICP DN xxxx to be used in the ICP message
ICP IPN xx Set up IPN number xx to be used in the ICP message
ICP LINK xx Set up ICP link x to be used in the ICP message
ICP RSN x Set up the intercept transfer reason x to be used in the ICP
message
ICP SEND xx yy Send the defined ICP message number xx, yy times
ICPM Access ICP maintenance commands

MAP AML (x) Get physical address and card name of one or all AMLs
MAP STA x Get information relating to the STA application.

PSWD Enter password to use ICP maintenance commands

RLS AML x Release layer two on AML x

RSET ALL Stop printing all messages on a line card
RSET BRIM Stop printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card
RSET IFx 1 PDL2 1 Stop printing SAPI 16 interface messages.
RSET IFx 1 PDNI n Stop printing network interface messages.
RSET IFx l s c u BCH x Stop printing B-channel terminal interface messages.
RSET IFx l s c u DCHx Stop printing D-channel terminal interface messages.
RESET IMSG l s c dsl Disable monitoring on incoming
RSET MISP loop AMO Stop MISP printing of audit messages on MISP card
RSET MISP loop DGB Exit MISP debug
RSET MISP loop MNT Stop MISP printing of status messages on MISP card
RSET MISP loop MON Stop printing of input/output messages on MISP card
RSET MPHM Stop all Meridian Packet Handler message monitoring.
RSET OMSG l s c dsl Disable monitoring on outgoing
RSET TNx Stop printing messages on an ISDN BRI line card
RST MSDL x Reset MSDL device x

SET IMSG l s c dsl MON x Set monitor on incoming msg

SET OMSG l s c dsl MON x Set monitor on outgoing msg

SETM BRIM xxxx Set printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card
SETM IFx 1 PDL2 1 Set printing of SAPI 16 interface messages
SETM IFx 1 PDNI n Set printing of network interface messages.
SETM IFx l s c u BCHx Set printing of B-channel terminal interface messages.
SETM IFx l s c u DCHx Set printing of D-channel terminal interface messages.
SETM MISP loop AMO Set printing of audit messages on MISP card
SETM MISP loop DBG Set debug option on MISP card
SETM MISP loop MNT Set printing of status messages on MISP card
SETM MISP loop MON Set printing of input/output messages on MISP card

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Basic commands Page 263 of 472

SETM MPHM xxxx Set printing of Meridian Packet Handler messages.

Where: xxxx = the MPHs to be monitored
SETM TNx l s c u, 31 Set printing messages on a digital line card unit (u) or ISDN BRI
line card (31)
SETM TNx l s c u, dsl Set printing messages on a unit

SLFT AML x Invoke self-test for AML x

SLFT ESDI x Invoke ESDI and run self-test
SLFT MSDL x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x

STAT AML (x) Get AML status

STAT APL x Display status of AUX link x
STAT CMS x Get status of Command and Status link x
STAT CNFG Get status of link monitor/simulator configuration
STAT CSDI x Get status of SDI port x
STAT DSP LNK x Get status of all Displays on link x
STAT ESDI x Get status of ESDI x
STAT HSL Get high-speed link status
STAT ICP (x) Display software status of one or all ICP links
STAT ISDI x Get status of hardware AUX link SDI x
STAT LSL Get low-speed link status
STAT MON (x) Get status of one or all message monitors
STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) Get MSDL status
STAT SDI HIGH Get status of high-speed link port
STAT SDI LOW Get status of low-speed link port
STAT STA x Get status of STA application.

SWCH AML x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) AML

SWCH CMS x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) CSL

UPLD AML x TBL x Upload parameter Table 1 to 4 from AML x (MSDL only)

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 264 of 472 ACD High speed and low speed link commands

ACD High speed and low speed link commands

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and check the status
of an APL link.

Note: When enabling a high-speed link (using the command

“ENL HSL” or “ENL SDI HIGH” in LD 48 ), the craftsperson must log
out of the TTY to receive a message from the switch which confirms that
the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled.

DIS HSL Disable the high-speed link

DIS SDI HIGH Disable the SDI port for high-speed link
DIS SDI LOW Disable the SDI port for low-speed link

ENL HSL Enable the high-speed link

ENL SDI HIGH Enable SDI port for high-speed link
ENL SDI LOW Enable SDI port for low-speed link

STAT HSL Get high-speed link status

STAT LSL Get low-speed link status
STAT SDI HIGH Get status of high-speed link port
STAT SDI LOW Get status of low-speed link port

ACD High speed and low speed link monitor commands

The monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the link.
This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats and
protocols.

DIS MON Disable the monitor-bit of high-speed link data

DIS PRNT Disable the print-bit of high-speed link data

ENL MON Print software information at maintenance TTY

ENL PRNT Connect high-speed link to TTY

STAT MON (x) Get status of one or all message monitors

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
AML commands Page 265 of 472

AML commands
The AML commands are listed below, where x is the AML logical device
number (defined by prompt ADAN in LD 17). Some of these commands only
apply to AMLs on an MSDL card.

DIS AML x Disable AML x

DIS AML x AUTO Disable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only)
DIS AML x LYR2 Disable layer two on AML x
DIS AML x LYR7 Disable layer seven on AML x
DIS AML x MDL Disable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only)
DIS AML x MON Disable monitor on AML x (MSDL only)

ENL AML x Enable AML x

ENL AML x ACMS Enable automatic set-up on AML x (ESDI only)
ENL AML x AUTO Enable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only)
ENL AML x FDL Force download loadware to the MSDL card and enable AML x
ENL AML x LYR2 Enable layer two on AML x
ENL AML x LYR7 Enable layer seven on AML x
ENL AML x MDL Enable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only)
ENL AML x MON Enable monitor on AML x (MSDL only)
EST AML x Establish layer two on AML x

MAP AML (x) Get physical address and card name of one or all AMLs

RLS AML x Release layer two on AML x

SLFT AML x Invoke self-test for AML x

STAT AML (x) Get AML status
SWCH AML x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) AML

UPLD AML x TBL x Upload parameter table 1 to 4 from AML x (MSDL only)

AML over Ethernet (ELAN) commands

DIS ELAN Disable ELAN (server task)

DIS ELAN x Disable ELAN link number x (client task)
ENL ELAN Enable ELAN (server task)
STAT ELAN Check status of all configured ELANs
STAT ELAN Check status of ELAN xx

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 266 of 472 AML/CSL monitor commands

AML/CSL monitor commands

The AML monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the
link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats
and protocols. These commands apply to CSLs or AMLs on ESDI cards and
AMLs on MSDL cards.

DIS MSGI x Disable output of incoming layer seven messages on

AML x
DIS MSGO x Disable output of outgoing layer seven messages on
AML x
DIS PACI x Disable output of incoming layer two messages on
AML x
DIS PACO x Disable output of outgoing layer two messages on
AML x

DISM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... Disable message input/output monitoring excluding

those specified incoming messages
DISM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... Disable message input/output monitoring excluding
those specified outgoing messages
DSIM MSGI <link#> Disable inclusive incoming message monitoring
DSIM MSGO <link#> Disable inclusive outgoing message monitoring

DSIP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... Disable monitoring of inclusive priorities on incoming

messages
DSIP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... Disable monitoring of inclusive priorities on outgoing
messages
DSIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable inclusive TN incoming message monitoring
DSIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable inclusive TN outgoing message monitoring

DSXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on incoming

messages
DSXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on outgoing
messages
DSXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable exclusive TN incoming message monitoring
DSXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Disable exclusive TN outgoing message monitoring

ENIM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable inclusive input/output message monitoring of

only those specified incoming messages
ENIM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable inclusive input/output message monitoring of
only those specified outgoing messages
ENIP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of incoming
messages with specified priorities

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
AML/CSL monitor commands Page 267 of 472

ENIP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of outgoing

messages with specified priorities

ENIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of incoming

messages with specified TN
ENIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of outgoing
messages with specified TN
ENL MSGI x Enable output of incoming layer seven messages on
AML x
ENL MSGO x Enable output of outgoing layer seven messages on
AML x
ENL PACI x Enable output of incoming layer two messages on
AML x
ENL PACO x Enable output of incoming layer two messages on
AML x

ENXM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable message input/output monitoring excluding

those specified incoming messages

ENXM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... Enable message input/output monitoring excluding

those specified outgoing messages

ENXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... Enable input/output incoming message monitoring

excluding messages with specified priorities

ENXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... Enable input/output outgoing message monitoring

excluding messages with specified priorities

ENXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> Enable input/output message monitoring excluding

incoming messages with specified TN
ENXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u>
Enable input/output message monitoring excluding
outgoing messages with specified TN
FLSH Disable monitor and flash buffers

STAT MON (x) Get status of one or all message monitors

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 268 of 472 Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) commands

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and check the status
of an APL link.

DIS APL x Put software AUX link x in maintenance mode

DIS ISDI x Disable hardware AUX link SDI x

ENL APL x Put software AUX link x in non-maintenance mode

ENL ISDI x Enable AUX link SDI x

STAT APL x Display status of AUX link x

STAT DSP LNK x Get status of all Displays on link x
STAT ISDI x Get status of hardware AUX link SDI x

APL monitor commands

The APL monitor is a tool used to diagnose the messages flowing across the
link. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message formats
and protocols.

DIS PPRT x Disable packet message print option on link x

DIS UPRT x Disable unpacket message print on AUX link x

ENL PPRT x Enable packet message print option on link x

ENL UPRT x Enable unpacked message print on link x
ENLX MSGI x p Output incoming priority p messages from link x
ENLX MSGO x p Output outgoing priority p messages from link x

STAT CNFG Get status of link monitor/simulator configuration

STAT CSDI x Get status of SDI port x
STAT DSP LNK x Get status of all Displays on link x

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
CSL commands (X11 Release 17 and earlier) Page 269 of 472

CSL commands (X11 Release 17 and earlier)

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and check the status
of Command and Status links. Note: Use AML commands in X11 Release 18
and later.

ACMS x Automatic set-up for Command and Status link x

CON ESDI x Set up link layer of HDLC protocol

DIS CMS x Disable Command and Status link x

DIS ESDI x Disable ESDI x
DSC ESDI x Disconnect the link

ENL CMS x Enable CSL x

ENL ESDI x Enable ESDI x

SLFT ESDI x Invoke ESDI and run self-test

STAT CMS x Get status of Command and Status link
STAT ESDI x Get status of ESDI x
SWCH CMS x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) CSL

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 270 of 472 Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands

Intercept Computer Update (ICU) commands

DIS ICP x Put ICP link x into maintenance mode
DSIC LSTI x Disable printing of lost input messages on link x
DSIC LSTO x Disable printing of lost output messages on link x
DSIC MSGI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input queue level
DSIC MSGO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output queue level
DSIC PACI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level
DSIC PACO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level

ENIC LSTI x Enable printing of lost input messages on link x

ENIC LSTO x Enable printing of lost output messages on link x
ENIC MSGI x Enable printing of messages on link x at input queue level
ENIC MSGO x Enable printing of messages on link x at output queue level
ENIC PACI x Enable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer level
ENIC PACO x Enable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer level
ENL ICP x Enable ICP link x

ICP LINK xx Set up ICP link x to be used in the ICP message

ICP DN xxxx Set up ICP DN xxxx to be used in the ICP message
ICP IPN xx Set up IPN number xx to be used in the ICP message
ICP RSN x Set up the intercept transfer reason x to be used in the ICP message
ICP ADD xxxx Set up additional information xxxx to be used in the ICP message
ICP CLR Clear previous ICP message set up without sending it
ICP SEND xx yy Send the defined ICP message number xx, yy times
ICPM Access ICP maintenance commands

PSWD Enter password to use ICP maintenance commands

STAT ICP (x) Display software status of one or all ICP links

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
ISDN BRI monitor commands Page 271 of 472

ISDN BRI monitor commands

These commands are used to monitor input/output messages to the MISP, and
SILC/UILC. This is only useful for someone experienced with the message
formats and protocols. A password is required for DGB and MON options.
The SETM TNx, RSET TNx and RSET ALL commands are also available
for digital telephones.

Caution: Use of the SETM MISP loop MON commands may use all system
printing registers and cause an initialization.

RSET ALL Reset (turn off) printing of messages for all terminal numbers associated
with TN0-TN6.
RSET BRIM Stop printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line card.

RSET MISP x AMO Stop printing of audit messages on MISP specified.

RSET MISP x DGB Exit MISP debug.
RSET MISP x MNT Stop printing status messages on MISP specified.
RSET MISP x MON Stop printing input/output messages on MISP specified.

RSET TNx Stop printing of messages for terminal number associated with TNx. TNx
is associated with the terminal number by the SETM TNx command.

SETM BRIM xxxx Set printing of selected message types for MISP, SILC/UILC or digital line
cards.
SETM MISP x AMO Set printing of audit messages on MISP specified. The SETM TNx
command must have been issued before issuing this command.
SETM MISP x DBG Set debug option for the MISP specified. DISABLE MISP prior to issuing
this command, re-enable MISP after command issued.

SETM MISP x MNT Set printing of maintenance messages for the MISP specified.
SETM MISP x MON Set printing of input/output messages for the MISP specified.

SETM TNx l s c u, dsl Set printing messages on a unit

SETM TNx l s c u, 31 Set printing messages on a digital line card unit (u) or ISDN BRI line card
(31)

SETM TNx y Set printing of messages for specified digital line card unit or ISDN BRI
line card.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 272 of 472 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number
(defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These commands are also provided in
Input/Output Diagnostic (LD 37) and D-channel Diagnostic (LD 96).

DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL device x

ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) Enable MSDL device x

RST MSDL x Reset MSDL device x

SLFT MSDL x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x

STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) Get MSDL status

Single Terminal Access (STA) commands

Single Terminal Access (STA) is an application available on the MSDL card
with X11 Release 19 and later. The STA application reduces the number of
physical devices used to administer and maintain the Meridian 1 and its
auxiliary processors. Refer to the X11 system management applications NTP
for complete details.

DIS STA x Disable the STA application

ENL STA x (FDL) Enable STA application

MAP STA x Get information relating to the STA application

STAT STA x Get status of STA application

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands Page 273 of 472

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) commands

Voice Mailbox Administration (VMBA) is available with X11 Release 19
and Meridian Mail 9. It allows for Integrated Voice Mailbox Administration.
Refer to the X11 features and services NTP for complete details.

DIS VMBA <vsid> Disable the Voice Mailbox Administration application

DIS VMBA <vsid> AUDT Disable the mailbox database audit
DIS VMBA <vsid> UPLD Disable the mailbox database upload

ENL VMBA <vsid> Enable the Voice Mailbox Administration application

ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT Enable the mailbox database audit
ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD Enable the mailbox database upload

STAT VMBA <vsid> Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Administration application
STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT Get the status for the Voice Mailbox database audit
STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD Get the status for the Voice Mailbox database upload

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 274 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ACMS x Automatic set-up for Command and Status link x. ACMS is a csl-8
background process.
The given CSL must have been previously disabled. This
command is equivalent to using the ENL ESDI x, CON ESDI
x and ENL CMS x sequence of commands to set up a
Command and Status link or Meridian link.
If the first attempt to bring up the CSL fails, ACMS will
automatically try again to set up the link. If set-up failure
continues, an appropriate error code is generated
periodically.
Use ENL AML x ACMS command in X11 Release 18 and
later.

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c.

CON ESDI x Set up link layer of HDLC protocol. This command is only csl-8
applicable for a synchronous port.
This command is valid only if the ESDI is enabled. If
successful, the corresponding ESDI port will be in the
CONNECTED state. If the port is used for a CSL application,
the command ENL CMS x must be entered before the CSL is
operational.
Use EST AML x command in X11 Release 18 and later.

DIS AML x Disable AML x. msdl-18

Whenever the third parameter (LYR2, LYR7, etc.) is not
typed, the overlay defaults the third parameter of the DIS
command to LYR2. Therefore, this command is equivalent to
DIS AML x LYR2. Refer to DIS AML x LYR2 command
definition, for more information.

DIS AML x Disable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only). This msdl-18
AUTO command is not available for an ESDI AML.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 275 of 472

DIS AML x LYR2 Disable layer two on AML x. msdl-18

MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML link state can be any state other than the disabled state,
and should not be in the process of self-test. Example: ENL
MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must have been
executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The AML link state is changed to the disable
state. The MSDL port on which the AML is configured is
disabled.
ESDI: The ESDI port is disabled. The port must be idle.

DIS AML x LYR7 Disable layer seven on AML x. msdl-18

The MSDL or ESDI card must be enabled. The AML layer
two must be enabled and established, and AML layer seven
must also be enabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2
followed by EST AML x followed by ENL AML x LYR7 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
Action: A request to disable the AML layer seven is issued.
SL-1 will stop sending polling messages to the far-end.

DIS AML x MDL Disable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only). msdl-18
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be enabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to disable
the debug monitor is sent to the MSDL card.
This command is not available for ESDI AML.

DIS AML x MON Disable monitor on AML x (MSDL only). msdl-18

MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be enabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to disable
the debug monitor is sent to the MSDL card.
This command is not available for ESDI AML.

DIS APL x Put software AUX link x in maintenance mode. apl-1

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 276 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DIS CMS x Disable Command and Status link x. csl-8

This command does not disable the physical or link layer
(HDLC protocol) of the CSL. i.e., the corresponding ESDI is
not disabled or disconnected. Warning messages will appear
if an attempt is made to disable the active CSL but the link
can be disabled if desired.
Use DIS AML x LYR7 command in X11 Release 18 and later.

DIS ELAN Disable the ELAN (server task) nxcc-22

DIS ELAN x Disable ELAN link number x (client task) nxcc-22

If the application ELAN client task cannot be established from
the Meridian 1, the Meridian 1 can disable the client task with
this command.

DIS ESDI x Disable ESDI x. csl-8

If the port is used for CSL purposes, the link layer is
disconnected and the ESDI will NOT respond to far end
SABM (HDLC protocol). Also, ESDI can no longer interrupt
the SL-1. A warning message will appear if an attempt is
made to disable the active CSL, though it can be disabled, if
desired.
You cannot disable the active TTY port with this command.
Use DIS AML x LYR2 command in X11 Release 18 and later.

DIS HSL Disable the high-speed link. lnk-2

DIS IALM <vsid> Disable the integrated alarms application on the specified ialm-21
VAS. A VAS011 message is printed indicating the application
has been disabled.

DIS ICP x Put ICP link x into maintenance mode. icp-5

DIS ISDI x Disable hardware AUX link SDI x. apl-1

DIS MON Disable the monitor-bit of high-speed link data. apl-1

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 277 of 472

DIS MSDL x (ALL) msdl-18

Disable MSDL device.
When entered without the optional parameter, the disable
MSDL command attempts to disable the MSDL card.
Disabling the card via this command is permitted from either
the Enabled (ENBL) state or the System Disabled (SYS
DSBL) state.

When attempted on an MSDL that does not have any ports

enabled, this command will succeed. The only exception to
this is when the disable card message needs to be sent to the
card, and there is no buffer currently available for building the
message (MSDL015 is output to the TTY). In this unusual
situation, attempting the command again will most likely
result in success.
Application Overlays are not erased when the MSDL is
disabled.

If there are any ports that are still running in the MSDL card,
the ‘ALL’ option must be used to force disable the active
ports. As an alternative to this command, the craftsperson
can use the commands provided by the applications to
disable the ports (D-channels or AML) individually, and then
use the ‘DIS MSDL x’ command.

The command ‘DIS MSDL x ALL’ is not allowed if the active

TTY (the terminal from which the command was entered) is
supported on the MSDL card in question.
Software disable the logical channel prior to disabling the
physical DNUM port.

DIS MSGI x Disable printing of messages on link x at input queue level. csl-8
Disable output of incoming layer seven messages on AML x.

DIS MSGO x Disable printing of messages on link x at output queue level. csl-8
Disable output of outgoing layer seven messages on AML x.

DIS PACI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer csl-8
level. (disable output of incoming layer two messages on
AML x)

DIS PACO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer csl-8
level. (disable output of outgoing layer two messages on
AML x)

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 278 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DIS PPRT x Disable packet message print option on link x. apl-1

DIS PRNT Disable the print-bit of high-speed link data. apl-1

DIS SDI HIGH Disable the SDI port for high-speed link. lnk-2

DIS SDI LOW Disable the SDI port for low-speed link. lnk-2

DIS STA x Disable the STA application. sta-19

This command disables the application, the administration
port, and any other additional ports. The associated ports
must be disabled before using this command. x = the logical
ID number identifying the STA application.

DIS UPRT x Disable unpacket message print on AUX link x. apl-1

DIS VMBA <vsid> vmba-19

Disable the Voice Mailbox Administration application. This
command is used to disable the Voice Mailbox Application.
Enter the command in the following format:
• DIS VMBA <vsid> <NNNN>

Where:
• vsid = The VAS ID number associated with VMBA.
• NNNN = AUDT or UPLD for the database audit or
upload.
AUDT and UPLD are optional entries. The VAS ID must be
entered.
The Voice Mailbox audit and upload functions are aborted
when the application is disabled. Be sure to get the status of
those functions before disabling the application.

DIS VMBA <vsid> AUDT vmba-19

Disable the mailbox database audit. This command aborts
the audit function whether it was invoked manually or
automatically.

DIS VMBA <vsid> UPLD vmba-19

Disable the mailbox database upload. This command aborts
the audit function whether it was invoked manually or
automatically.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 279 of 472

DISM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... nxcc-22

Disable message input/output monitoring excluding those
specified incoming messages

DISM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... nxcc-22

Disable message input/output monitoring excluding those
specified outgoing messages

DSC ESDI x Disconnect the link. csl-8

This command is only applicable when the ESDI port is in
CONNECTED state. If the command is entered successfully,
ESDI x is in enabled state.
If this command is entered while the CSL is active, a warning
message is generated. Disabling while in this state disables
the CMS and ESDI.
Use RLS AML x command in X11 Release 18 and later.

DSIC LSTI x Disable printing of lost input messages on link x. icp-5

DSIC LSTO x Disable printing of lost output messages on link x. icp-5

DSIC MSGI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input queue icp-5
level.

DSIC MSGO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output queue icp-5
level.

DSIC PACI x Disable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer icp-5
level.

DSIC PACO x Disable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer icp-5
level.

DSIM MSGI <link#> nxcc-22

Disable inclusive incoming message monitoring

DSIM MSGO <link#> nxcc-22

Disable inclusive outgoing message monitoring

DSIP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Disable monitoring of inclusive priorities on incoming
messages

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 280 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DSIP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Disable monitoring of inclusive priorities on outgoing
messages

DSIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Disable inclusive TN incoming message monitoring

DSIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Disable inclusive TN outgoing message monitoring

DSXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on incoming
messages

DSXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Disable monitoring of exclusive priorities on outgoing
messages

DSXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Disable exclusive TN incoming message monitoring

DSXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Disable exclusive TN outgoing message monitoring

ENIC LSTI x Enable printing of lost input messages on link x. icp-5

ENIC LSTO x Enable printing of lost output messages on link x. icp-5

ENIC MSGI x Enable printing of messages on link x at input queue level. icp-5

ENIC MSGO x Enable printing of messages on link x at output queue level. icp-5

ENIC PACI x Enable printing of input messages on link x at input buffer icp-5
level.

ENIC PACO x Enable printing of output messages on link x at output buffer icp-5
level.

ENIM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... nxcc-22

Enable inclusive input/output message monitoring of only
those specified incoming messages

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 281 of 472

ENIM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... nxcc-22

Enable inclusive input/output message monitoring of only
those specified outgoing messages

ENIP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of incoming
messages with specified priorities

ENIP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of outgoing
messages with specified priorities

ENIT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of incoming
messages with specified TN

ENIT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Enable inclusive input/output monitoring of outgoing
messages with specified TN

ENL AML x Enable AML x. esdi/ msdl-18

For MSDL: If AUTO recovery is off, then this command is the

same as the ENL AML x LYR2 command. If AUTO recovery
is on, an attempt is made to establish the link (layer two) and
the application (layer seven).
For ESDI: This is the same as the ENL AML x LYR2
command.

ENL AML x ACMS esdi-18

Enable automatic set-up on AML x (ESDI only). This
command is valid only for ESDI AML and is not available on
the MSDL AML. It is equivalent to ACMS x command.

ENL AML x AUTO msdl-18

Enable AUTO recovery on AML x (MSDL only). This
command is not available for ESDI AML links.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 282 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL AML x FDL Force download loadware to the MSDL card and enable msdl-18
AML x.
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML link state must be in the disable state. All other MSDL
AML links configured on the same MSDL card must be in the
disable state. Example: ENL MSDL x must have been
executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware is downloaded to
the MSDL card. While download is in progress a series of
dots are output. Once the command is executed successfully
the ENL AML x LYR2 command is executed automatically.

ENL AML x Enable layer two on AML x. msdl-18

LYR2
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML link state must be in the disable state. Example: ENL
MSDL x must have been executed at an earlier time.

MSDL Action: The AML link state is changed to the release

state. The MSDL port on which the AML is configured is
enabled. If the ENL AML x command is executed
successfully, and MSDL AML auto recovery is in the enable
state, then the EST AML x is issued automatically.
ESDI: The ESDI port is enabled. The ESDI card must first be
disabled.

ENL AML x Enable layer seven on AML x. msdl-18

LYR7
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML link should not be in the simulation mode. The AML
layer two must be enabled and established, and AML layer
seven must be disabled.

Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2

followed by EST AML x must have been executed at an
earlier time.
MSDL Action: A request to enable the AML layer seven is
issued. Polling messages are sent to the far end.
ESDI: Layer seven is enabled for the ESDI AML. The ENL
AML x (LYR2) command must be completed successfully
first.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 283 of 472

ENL AML x MDL Enable MDL error reporting on AML x (MSDL only). msdl-18
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be enabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to enable
the MDL error reporting is sent to the MSDL card.
This command is not available for ESDI AML links.

ENL AML x MON Enable monitor on AML x (MSDL only). msdl-18

MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be enabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML loadware command to enable
the debug monitor is sent to the MSDL card
This command is not available for ESDI AML links.

ENL APL x Put software AUX link x in non-maintenance mode. apl-1

ENL CMS x Enable CSL x. csl-8

This does not automatically enable the physical layer (HDLC
protocol) of the CSL, i.e., the corresponding components
(ESDI, Digital Link Interface, ASIM/Data Line Card) have to
be enabled before this command can be entered. The
command is valid only when the corresponding ESDI is in the
CONNECTED state (i.e., the HDLC link layer is up).
This command will trigger a polling message to be sent and if
the correct response is returned, a confirmation message will
be printed and a polling message sent automatically every 5
seconds. If there is no response within 5 seconds, an error
message will be printed and no more polling messages will
be sent. (48 messages are sent at initial set-up)
Use ENL AML x LYR7 command in X11 Release 18 and later.

ENL ELAN Enable ELAN server task nxcc-22

When the application establishes connection to a Meridian 1
via this ELAN, a client process will be spawned for this
application. The APP_IP_ID (Port ID and IP address) of each
connection will be passed into the Meridian 1.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 284 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL ESDI x Enable ESDI x. csl - 8

ESDI hardware tests will be performed and parameters will
be downloaded to the ESDI port. If the command is
successful, the ESDI port will be in the ENABLED state.
If the ESDI is used for a CSL application, the commands
CON ESDI x and ENL CSL x have to be entered before CSL
is operational.
Use ENL AML x LYR2 command in X11 Release 18 and later.

ENL HSL Enable the high-speed link. lnk-2

When enabling a high-speed link, the craftsperson must log
out of the TTY to receive a message from the switch which
confirms that the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled.

ENL IALM <vsid> ialm-21

Enable the integrated alarms application on the specified
VAS. A VAS011 message is printed if the application is
successfully enabled and a VAS012 if it is not.

ENL ICP x Enable ICP link x. icp-5

ENL ISDI x Enable AUX link SDI x. apl-1

ENL MON Print software information at maintenance TTY. apl-1

This command causes software information being sent to the
auxiliary processor to be printed at the TTY. This information
would include counts of Cumulative Negative
Acknowledgments (NAKs), time-outs and many other control
characteristics of the link.
Use this command only when the ACD is handling light traffic.
Otherwise, the TTY will be overloaded from the high volume
of messages.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 285 of 472

ENL MSDL x (FDL, ALL) msdl-18

Enable MSDL card.
When entered without any of the optional parameters, the
enable MSDL command attempts to enable the MSDL card.
Enabling the card via this command is only permitted if the
card is currently in the Manually Disabled (MAN DSBL) state.

The enable card succeeds if:

1. the card is resident in the shelf
2. it has passed all the self-tests
3. the MSDL base software has been downloaded and is
responding
If the MSDL base software and any configured application
software has not been downloaded, or if the version of the
software on the card is different from the version on the
system disk, software download occurs. While download is in
progress, a series of dots (“.”) are output.

If the FDL (forced download) option is entered, the MSDL

base software and all the configured applications will be
downloaded regardless if the application already exists on
the card. Following the download, the card will be enabled.
If the ALL option is entered, the card will be enabled
(provided the three conditions mentioned above are met), all
the applications will be downloaded if necessary and then an
attempt will be made to enable all the links/ports configured
on the card.

Additionally, the enable command with the ALL option can be

entered when the card is already in the enabled state. This
allows you to enable any disabled links/ports through one
command. It is not possible to use both the ALL and the FDL
options in the same command.

ENL MSGI x Print incoming messages from link x. Enable output of csl-8
incoming layer seven messages on AML x.
This command allows printing of all incoming message
received over link x on the maintenance output device. The
SSD signaling messages and the program input are not
printed. This is typically used to check the validity of incoming
messages for the different queues.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 286 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL MSGO x Print outgoing messages from link x. Enable output of csl-8
outgoing layer seven messages on AML x.
This command allows printing for all outgoing messages over
link x on the maintenance output device. This is typically used
to check the validity of outgoing messages sent from the
application layer to the output queue.

ENL PACI x Print incoming ESDI messages from link x. Enable output of csl-8
incoming layer two messages on AML x.
When enabled, all incoming messages received on link x to
the ESDI are printed on the maintenance TTY, including SSD
signaling messages. Typically this is used to check the
correctness of the incoming messages as received from the
ESDI in the data block format.

ENL PACO x Print outgoing ESDI messages from link x. Enable output of csl-8
incoming layer two messages on AML x.
When enabled, all outgoing messages are sent through link x
to the ESDI and are printed on the maintenance TTY. The
message will be printed in the data block format required by
the ESDI.

ENL PPRT x Enable packet message print option on link x. Printouts can apl-1
be up to 7 lines in length and are of the form:
• APLO xxx y xxx. . . x
• APLI xxx y xxx. . . x

Where:
• APLO = the message is output from the Meridian 1
• APLI = the message is input to Meridian 1 from AUX
• xxx = number of the APL link.
• y = number from 0 to 6 indicating the printout line
number of the message. This field is not used for ACK
and NAK messages.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 287 of 472

ENL PRNT Connect high-speed link to TTY. apl-1

Disconnects the high-speed link from the AUX and connects
it instead to an RS-232-C compatible TTY device. This
disrupts communication between the Meridian 1 and the
auxiliary processor. It enables ACD related messages (which
would normally be sent to the auxiliary processor) to be
printed at the TTY connected to the high-speed link.
Normal communications between the Meridian 1 and the
auxiliary processor will not continue if the ENL PRNT
command is inputted while the Meridian 1 and auxiliary
processor are still connected. A different message format is
used between the Meridian 1 and the auxiliary processor.
This condition will cause the HSL to go down because the
auxiliary processor cannot interpret this other message
format.

ENL SDI HIGH Enable SDI port for high-speed link. lnk-2
When enabling a high-speed link, the craftsperson must log
out of the TTY to receive a message from the switch which
confirms that the high-speed link (HSL) has been enabled.

ENL SDI LOW Enable SDI port for low-speed link. lnk-2

ENL STA x (FDL) Enable STA application. The MSDL card must be enabled to sta-19
implement this command, where:
• x = the logical ID number identifying the STA
application.
• FDL = force download the application. If not invoked,
the application is downloaded only when needed

ENL UPRT x Enable unpacked message print on link x. Printouts are of the apl-1
form: APLMxxx aa b c zzzz. . . z
Where:
• APLMxxx = indicates unpacked message over link xxx
• aa = indicates the message length
• b = indicates the application type
• c = indicates the message type
• zzz = these fields are the message body, depending
on the application and message type

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 288 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL VMBA <vsid> vmba-19

Enable the Voice Mailbox Administration application. Enter
the command in the following format:
ENL VMBA <vsid> <NNNN> ALL/xxxx
Where:
• vsid = The VAS ID number associated with VMBA.
• NNNN = AUDT or UPLD for the mailbox database
audit or upload functions.
• ALL/xxxx = Enable NNNN for ALLDNs with Voice
Mailboxes, or a specific DN (xxxx).
NNNN and ALL/xxxx are optional entries. The VAS ID must
be entered to initiate this command.

ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT vmba-19

Enable the mailbox database audit. Enter the command in
the following format:
ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT ALL/xxxx

The audit can be implemented for a specific Directory.

Number by entering the DN following the audit command:
• ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT xxxx
The upload can also be enabled for all DNs eligible for a
Voice Mailbox by entering ALL following the audit command:
• ENL VMBA <vsid> AUDT ALL

ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD vmba-19

Enable the mailbox database upload. Enter the command in
the following format:
• ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD ALL/xxxx
The upload can be implemented for a specific Directory
Number by entering the DN following the upload command:
• ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD xxxx
The audit can also be enabled for all DNs configured with
Voice Mailboxes by entering ALL following the upload
command:
• ENL VMBA <vsid> UPLD ALL

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 289 of 472

ENLX MSGI x p Output incoming priority p messages from link x. apl-1

When enabled by the user, all incoming messages received
on link x are output, excluding the messages with specified
priorities, where “p” is the message priority, and where:
• 1 = the system priority
• 2 = signaling priority
• 3 = call processing priority
• 4 = administration priority

ENLX MSGO x p Output outgoing priority p messages from link x. apl-1

When enabled by the user, all outgoing messages sent
through link x are output, excluding the messages with
specified priorities, where “p” is the message priority, and
where:
• 1 = the system priority
• 2 = signaling priority
• 3 = call processing priority
• 4 = administration priority.

EST AML x Establish layer two on AML x. msdl-18

The layer two is established for the AML configured on the
given MSDL port. The layer two is connected for the AML
configured on the ESDI card.
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be enabled and released.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML link state is changed into the
established state. If EST AML x executes successfully, and
provided that the MSDL AML AUTO recovery is enabled, next
the ENL AML x LYR7 is executed automatically.
ESDI: Layer two is connected for the ESDI AML. The port
must be enabled first.

ENXM MSGI <link#><msg1><msg2>... nxcc-22

Enable message input/output monitoring excluding those
specified incoming messages

ENXM MSGO <link#><msg1><msg2>... nxcc-22

Enable message input/output monitoring excluding those
specified outgoing messages

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 290 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENXP MSGI <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Enable input/output incoming message monitoring excluding
messages with specified priorities

ENXP MSGO <link#><pri><pri>... nxcc-22

Enable input/output outgoing message monitoring excluding
messages with specified priorities

ENXT MSGI <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Enable input/output message monitoring excluding incoming
messages with specified TN

ENXT MSGO <link#><l><s><c><u> nxcc-22

Enable input/output message monitoring excluding outgoing
messages with specified TN

FLSH Disable monitor and flash buffers nxcc-22

ICP ADD xxxx Set up additional information xxxx to be used in the ICP icp-5
message.
Enter the time (hhmm) and date (mmdd).

ICP CLR Clear previous ICP message set up without sending it. icp-5

ICP DN xxxx Set up ICP DN xxxx to be used in the ICP message. icp-5

ICP IPN xx Set up IPN number xx to be used in the ICP message. icp-5

ICP LINK xx Set up ICP link xx to be used in the ICP message. icp-5

ICP RSN x Set up the intercept transfer reason x to be used in the ICP icp-5
message.

ICP SEND xx yy Send the defined ICP message number xx, yy times. Where: icp-5
• xx = number/type of ICP message (50-61 to the ICP
link, 00-03 to the ICP module)
• yy = number of times message is to be sent per
time-slice (default = 1, maximum = 4)
The message is only cleared by entering the ICP CLR
command or by changing the contents of the message.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 291 of 472

ICPM Access ICP maintenance commands. icp-5

Enter this command and the password (prompt PSWD) to
use Intercept Computer Update (ICP) maintenance
commands.

MAP AML (x) Get physical address and card name of one or all AMLs. msdl-18
This command outputs the card name and physical card
address and ports for one or all AMLs. This information is
also output with the STAT AML command. For example:
• MAP AML
• AML: 05 ESDI: 04
• AML: 12 MSDL:07 PORT:1

MAP STA x Get information relating to the STA application. sta-19

This command displays the logical, physical, and port
allocation information related to the STA application. If the ID
number (x) is not specified, the information for all existing
STAs is given.

PSWD Enter password to use ICP maintenance commands. icp-5

RLS AML x Release layer two on AML x. msdl-18

The layer two is released for the AML link configured on the
given MSDL port. The layer two is disconnected for the AML
configured on the ESDI card.
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be enabled and established. Example:
ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 followed by EST
AML x must have been executed at an earlier time.
MSDL Action: Prior to the execution of the RLS AML x, if the
MSDL AML layer seven is enabled, the DIS AML x LYR7 is
automatically executed. The MSDL AML state is changed to
the release state.
ESDI: The layer two is disconnected for the ESDI AML port.
The port must be in the connected and idle state first.

RSET ALL Stop printing all messages on a line card. arie/ bri-14

RSET BRIM Stop printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP or digital line bri/ arie-18
card.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 292 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

RSET IFx 1 PDL2 1 mph-19

Stop printing SAPI 16 interface messages.

RSET IFx 1 PDNI n mph-19

Stop printing network interface messages.

RSET IFx l s c u BCH x mph-19

Stop printing B-channel terminal interface messages.

RSET IFx l s c u DCHx mph-19

Stop printing D-channel terminal interface messages.

RSET IMSG l s c dsl

Disable monitoring on incoming

RSET MISP x AMO bri-18

Stop printing of audit messages on MISP specified.
Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.

RSET MISP x DGB bri-18

Exit MISP debug. Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card
for Option 11.

RSET MISP loop MNT bri-18

Stop printing of status messages on MISP specified.
Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.

RSET MISP x MON bri-18

Stop printing of input/output messages on MISP specified.
Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.

RSET MPHM Stop all Meridian Packet Handler message monitoring. mph-19

RSET OMSG l s c dsl

Disable monitoring on outgoing

RSET TNx Stop printing messages on an ISDN BRI line card. bri-18
Where: x = 0-6 (TN0-TN6).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 293 of 472

RST MSDL x Reset MSDL card. msdl-18

This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL,
followed by a series of short self-tests. Resetting the card via
this command is only permitted if the card is in the Manually
Disabled (MAN DSBL) state.

SET IMSG l s c dsl MON x

Set monitor on incoming msg

SET OMSG l s c dsl MON x

Set monitor on outgoing msg

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 294 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

SETM BRIM xxxx bri-18

Set printing of messages on SILC/UILC, MISP, or digital line
card.
This command is used to select various message types for
printing on a given TN (defined by SETM TNx commands).
The value of xxxx is a HEX word which determines the
message types.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X X X X X X X

Bit 0 = Input SSD message from BRI line cards.

Bit 1 = Output SSD message to BRI line cards.
Bit 2 = Input expedited (high priority) message from BRIL
application on MISP.
Bit 3 = Output expedited (high priority) message from BRIL
application on MISP.
Bit 4 = Input ring message from BRIL application on MISP.
Bit 5 = Output ring message from BRIL application on MISP
Bit 11 = Call processing error message.
All other Bits are for future use. Note that the SETM TNx
command must have been issued before issuing this
command.

Examples:
To print input SSD and expedited messages:
• SETM BRIM 0005 (i.e., 0000000000000101)
To print input and output expedited messages:
• SETM BRIM 000C (i.e., 0000000000001100)

SETM IFx 1 PDL2 1 mph-19

Set printing of SAPI 16 interface messages.

SETM IFx 1 PDNI n mph-19

Set printing of network interface messages.

SETM IFx l s c u BCHx mph-19

Set printing of B-channel terminal interface messages.

SETM IFx l s c u DCHx mph-19

Set printing of D-channel terminal interface messages.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 295 of 472

SETM MISP x AMO bri-18

Set printing of audit messages on MISP specified.
Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.
These messages are sent from the MISP handler to the MISP
basecode. This command is used to turn these messages
back on once they have been turned off because:
— debug or monitor (MON) mode is enabled
— RSET x AMO command has been issued

SETM MISP x DBG bri-18

Set debug option on MISP specified. Where: x = loop for
non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.
The card must be disabled first. The debug option has the
following effect when the MISP is enabled:
— turns off the sanity timer
— stops interface handler audit messages
— no timestamp messages are sent to the MISP card
This command requires a password. The “dot” prompt
indicates debug mode is turned on.

SETM MISP x MNT bri-18

Set printing of status messages on MISP specified.
Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.

These messages indicate:

— error indication messages from the MISP
— state of L1 on SILC/UILC and L2/L3 on MISP
This option setting is lost during an initialization.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 296 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

SETM MISP x MON bri-18

Set printing of input/output messages on MISP card.
Where: x = loop for non-Option 11 and card for Option 11.
Both the expedited and ring input/output messages are
printed. This command also sets the debug option and
requires a password.
This command turns on all input/output messages. This may
use up all system print registers and may cause system
initialization. Therefore use this command with caution.
The debug option is turned off by a system initialization.
Restarting debug will also restart the input/output monitoring.
DISABLE MISP prior to issuing this command, re-enable
MISP after command issued.

SETM MPHM xxxx mph-19

Set printing of Meridian Packet Handler messages.
Where: xxxx = the MPHs to be monitored

SETM TNx l s c u, 31 arie/ bri-14

Set printing messages on a digital line card unit (u) or ISDN
BRI line card (31). This command is used in conjunction with
the SETM BRIM command.
The value x is a tag number (0-6). For ISDN BRI line cards,
you must enter "l s c 31" for the address.

SETM TNx l s c u, dsl arie/ bri-14

Set printing messages on a unit. This command is used in
conjunction with the SETM BRIM command. The value x is a
tag number (0-6).

SETM TNx y Set printing messages on a digital line card unit or ISDN BRI bri-18
line card. Where:
x = tag number 0-6 (TN0-TN6)
y = l s c u (loop, shelf, card, and unit) or l s c dsl (loop, shelf,
card, and digital subscriber loop) for non-Option 11
systems and c u (card, and unit) or c dsl (card, and
digital subscriber loop) for Option 11 systems.
If u = 31 when a S/T (SILC) or U (UILC) Interface Line Card is
specified for the y parameter, then messages for that line
card are printed. This command must be issued before the
SET BRIM command.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 297 of 472

SLFT AML x Self-test on AML x. msdl-18

This command runs the local loop back test for MSDL AML,
and the ESDI self-test for the ESDI AML.
MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The
AML layer two must be disabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x must have been executed at an
earlier time.
MSDL Action: The MSDL AML local loop back test is
executed and upon completion of the test the MSDL AML
port is set to the disable state.

SLFT ESDI x Invoke ESDI and run self-test. csl-8

The command is only valid for the port which is in an enabled
state and when the other port on the ESDI pack is in the
disabled state (tests the whole card). If the self-test passes,
OK is output; otherwise, an error message is output.
Use SLFT AML x command in X11 Release 18 and later.

SLFT MSDL x Execute a self-test on MSDL card x. msdl-18

This command causes a power-on reset on the MSDL, which
ill be followed by a complete set of self-tests. This command
only executes self-tests if the card is in the Manually Disabled
(MAN DSBL) state.
If the self-tests pass, a message indicating this and card id is
output.
If the self-tests fail, a message is output describing which
self-test failed. It is useful to note that the first test that fails
will abort the self-test sequence, so this command only
indicates one test failure, even if multiple tests might fail.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 298 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT AML (x) Get AML status. msdl-18

This command outputs the status of layer two and layer
seven of one or all configured AMLs. The designation (DES)
of the AML is output if it has been defined for the port in
LD 17.

Examples:
AML: 01 MSDL: 08 PORT: 00
LYR2: DSBL AUTO: OFF LYR7: DOWN
DES: MERIDIAN_MAIL
AML: 04 ESDI: 10
LYR2: EST AUTO: ON LYR7: ACTIVE

STAT APL x Display status of AUX link x. apl-1

STAT CMS x Get status of Command and Status link. csl-8

Status may be:
1. DOWN = CSL is not available. Link layer may not be up
(Enhanced Serial Data Interface state is not
CONNECTED) or there may be no polling message
response after two tries.
2. DOWN AUTOSETUP = Meridian 1 software is attempting
Auto Set-Up of a CSL, but the CSL is not available.
Link layer (HDLC protocol) may not be up (ESDI state
is not connected) or there may be no polling message
response after two tries.
3. ACTIVE EMPTY = CSL is in ACTIVE state and there
are no messages waiting to be sent.
4. ACTIVE NOT EMPTY = CSL is in ACTIVE state and
there are some messages in the queue waiting to be
sent.
5. ACTIVE FULL = CSL is in ACTIVE state and the call
register queue is full of messages to be sent. It may be
an indication of a problem.
6. STANDBY = CSL is in standby mode. The Enhanced
Serial Data Interface (ESDI) has established the link
layer and can become ACTIVE (switchover).
7. ACTIVE EMPTY CCR DISABLE = Customer
Controlled Routing feature is not implemented or not
enabled.
Use STAT AML x command in X11 Release 18 and later.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 299 of 472

STAT CNFG Get status of link monitor/simulator configuration. csl-8

Display link monitor/simulator configuration status. The
system will respond according to the current configuration as
follows:
— *NOT CONFG - if system is not configured
— *CNFG INT/SIM
CSLAPL x
CSLSIM x
if the system is in internal maintenance mode; shows link
numbers of CSLSIM and CSL application program
— *CNFG FLD
CSL x
if the system is in field maintenance mode; shows CSL
link number

STAT CSDI x Get status of SDI port x. basic-1

STAT DSP LNK x Get status of all Displays on link x. apl-1

STAT ELAN Check status of all configured AML over Ethernet (ELAN) nxcc-22
links

STAT ELAN x Check status of specific AML over Ethernet (ELAN) link x nxcc-22

STAT ESDI x Get status of ESDI x. csl-8

Status may be:
1. DISABLED = ESDI cannot communicate with the
Meridian. Interrupt is disabled.
2. ENABLED = Meridian 1 has already down-loaded
parameters to ESDI. ESDI is in internal WAIT state.
Self-test can only be performed while in this state. CON
ESDI command can also be issued to bring up the link
layer.
3. CONNECTED = ESDI has already brought up the link
layer and is ready to send and receive messages
(result of entering CON ESDI x command).
4. AUTO SETUP = ESDI is trying to automatically bring up
the link layer for the High-Level Data Link Control
(HDLC) for CSL application. This state will occur during
automatic recovery of the CSL, or after the ACMS x
command has been issued.
Use STAT AML x command in X11 Release 18 and later.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 300 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT HSL Get high-speed link status. Response can be either: lnk-2
1. UP
2. DOWN, or
3. NOT READY

STAT IALM <vsid> ialm-21

Print the status of the integrated alarms application on the
specified VAS, where:
• ACTIVE = active IALM application
• INACTIVE = inactive IALM application
• MANDIS = manually disabled IALM application
(disabled in LD 48)
• LINKOOS = inactive IALM application
(because link to the AP is out of service)

STAT ICP (x) Display software status of one or all ICP links. icp-5

STAT ISDI x Get status of hardware AUX link SDI x. apl-1

STAT LSL Get low-speed link status. Response can be either UP, DOWN lnk-2
or NOT READY. This command is invalid in X11 release 19
and later.

STAT MON (x) Get status of one or all message monitors. csl-8
The system will respond with the status. If all monitors are
disabled, the response is:
MSGO DIS
MSGI DIS
PACO DIS
PACI DIS
X25I DIS
X25O DIS
If the monitor function is enabled, for outgoing messages on
two links, the response is: MSGO ENL CSL x

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 301 of 472

STAT MSDL (x (FULL)) msdl-18

Get MSDL status.
This command outputs the status of MSDL cards. Without
any optional parameters (no card number, etc.), the status of
all MSDL cards in the system is output.
When a card number alone is provided with the command,
the status of the card is output along with additional
information regarding the applications configured on the card.
Specifically, for each D-channel or AML configured on the
card, the application name, logical number and port status is
output.

For example:
MSDL x: ENL
AML 11 DIS PORT 1
DCH 25 OPER PORT 2
AML 03 OPER PORT 3

With Release 24 and later, the status output will include the msdl-24
overloaded state of the individual ports. The benefit,
individual ports with a high incoming message rate will be
locked-out, operation of the other ports will be unaffected.
Prior to Release 24, one overloaded port would disable the
MSDL card.

For example:
MSDL x: ENL
SDI 7 OVLD PORT 0
AML 11 DIS PORT 1
DCH 25 OPER PORT 2
AML 03 OPER PORT 3

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 302 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

If the FULL option is entered along with the MSDL number,

the Meridian 1 outputs all the information output for the ’STAT
MSDL x’ command along with the following additional
information:
— card ID
— bootload firmware version
— basecode version
— basecode state
— when the basecode was activated (if it is active)
— each application version
— each application state
— when each the application was activated (if it is active)

The card status is output on the first line and can be any one
of the following:
MSDL x: ENBL - card is enabled
MSDL x: MAN DSBL - card disabled by the DIS MSDL
command
MSDL x: SYS DSBL reason - card has been disabled by
the system

The system disabled state may be due to any of the

following:

1. SYS DSBL- NOT RESPONDING

• If the MSDL is in this state, the implication is that the
Meridian 1 has attempted to communicate with the
MSDL and was not successful. It is possible that the
card is not present in the shelf. If it is present, then it is
possible that the software on the card is unable to
respond to messages from the Meridian 1.

• Action: Check to see if the card is properly inserted in

its slot. If it is (and has been for more than a few
minutes), then check the console output for MSDL or
ERR messages and take the appropriate action for the
error message.
•

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 303 of 472

• It may be that the rotary switch setting on the MSDL

card is not set properly. To keep the Meridian 1 from
continuously attempting recovery of the MSDL, use the
’DIS MSDL x’ command to put the card in the Manually
Disabled (MAN DSBL) state.

2. SYS DSBL- SELF-TESTING

• If the MSDL is in this state, self-tests are in progress.

• Action: Wait for self-tests to complete and for the

Meridian 1 to examine the results. Under normal
circumstances, self-tests take less than one minute to
complete. However, when an erasable EPROM on the
card has been cleared, self-tests may take between
five and six minutes to complete. Therefore, it is
prudent not to take any action at this time.

3. SYS DSBL- SELF-TESTS PASSED

• This is a transient state. A card in a transient state has
successfully completed self-tests and the Meridian 1
either is about to begin downloading the MSDL base
software, or has just completed downloading the
MSDL base software and is about to attempt to enable
the card.

• Action: Wait for the Meridian 1 to begin the next step

of recovery. If a more immediate recovery is desired,
use the ’DIS MSDL x’ command followed by the ’ENL
MSDL x’ command. This causes essentially the same
recovery action to be taken. However, it may be faster
(since it is being done as a result of input from the
craftsperson).
•
4. SYS DSBL- SELF-TESTS FAILED
• If the MSDL is in this state, self-tests have executed
and failed on this card.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 304 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

• Action: Use the ’STAT MSDL x’ command to

determine reason for self-test failure. Disable the
MSDL card using the ’DIS MSDL x’ command, then
use the ’SLFT MSDL x’ command to execute the
self-tests again.
• If the self-tests pass, attempt to enable the card using
the ’ENL MSDL x’ command. If the card fails the
self-tests again, record the results and replace the
card.

5. SYS DSBL- SRAM TESTS FAILED

• If the MSDL is in this state, self-tests have executed
and passed, however when the Meridian 1 attempted
to perform read/write tests to the shared RAM on the
MSDL, it detected a failure.

• Action: Same as for self-test failure. If the attempt to

enable the card fails, record the results and replace
the card.

6. SYS DSBL- OVERLOAD

• The Meridian 1 has received too many messages from
the MSDL. This is considered to be unacceptable, in
that this much of a demand may interfere with other
system functions.

• Action: If the MSDL is left in this state, the Meridian 1

will attempt to bring the card back into service within a
few minutes. If this is not desired, disable the card
using the ’DIS MSDL x’ command.
•
• It is also advisable to identify a specific port or
application that may be responsible for the overload.
The identification can be made by disabling individual
links/ports on the MSDL and letting the remaining
links/ports operate normally.

7. SYS DSBL- RESET THRESHOLD

• If the MSDL is in this state, the Meridian 1 has
detected more than four resets within ten minutes.
This is considered to be unacceptable, as a normally
operating card should not reset so often.
•

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 305 of 472

• It is possible that the card may be in this state due to a

Fatal Error or Self-test failure from which no recovery
was successful. (As the recovery from Fatal Errors and
Self-test failures begins with resetting the card,
repeated attempts at recovery may cause the reset
threshold to be reached.)
•
• Action: Disable the card using the ’DIS MSDL x’
command and execute the ’SLFT MSDL x’ command.
If self-tests pass, attempt to enable the card using the
’ENL MSDL x’ command. If the problem recurs, try
force downloading the software to the MSDL using the
’ENL MSDL x FDL’ command.
•
• If the problem continues to recur and resets continue
because of a repeated fatal error, attempt to isolate the
problem by disabling all links/ports controlled by one
application (e.g., all D-channels or all AMLs). If no
manual intervention is taken by the craftsperson, the
Meridian 1 will attempt to bring the card back into
service beginning at midnight.

8. SYS DSBL- FATAL ERROR

• If the MSDL is in this state, the card encountered a
fatal condition from which it could not recover. In
response to the ’STAT’ command, the cause of the
fatal error will be displayed.
•
• If the ’STAT’ command is not entered while the card is
in this state, the MSDL302 message printed at the time
of the state transition will indicate the cause of the fatal
error.

• Action: The Meridian 1 will attempt to bring the card

back into service automatically. While the card is in this
state, it is recommended that the craftsperson do
nothing. If the Meridian 1 is unable to recover the card,
the system disabled substate will be changed to
indicate the reason recovery was not possible. The
craftsperson should then take the recommended
action for that new substate.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 306 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

9. SYS DSBL- NO RECOVERY ATTEMPTED UNTIL

MIDNIGHT
• When this is output after the SYS DSBL message, the
Meridian 1 has attempted to recover the card but has
repeatedly failed. One example of this condition is
when the background recovery mechanism has failed
to download the MSDL Base Code five times in a row.

• Action: Disable the card using the ’DIS MSDL x’

command, test the card using the ’SLFT MSDL x’
command, and if self-tests pass, enable the card using
the ’ENL MSDL x’ command.
•
• If downloading of the MSDL Base Code is necessary, it
will be attempted in response to the enable command.
If no manual intervention is taken, the Meridian 1 will
again attempt recovery beginning at midnight.

STAT SDI HIGH Get status of high-speed link port. The response can be lnk-2
either ENL (enabled) or DIS (disabled).

STAT SDI LOW Get status of low-speed link port. The response can be either lnk-2
ENL (enabled) or DIS (disabled).

STAT STA x Get status of STA application. sta-19

When x (STA ID number) is specified, the STA state, port
number, port type, port state, and system description are
displayed.
If x is not specified, and the application is enabled, the state
and port information is given.
If x is not specified, and the application is in any state other
than enabled, only the STA status is given. No port or system
information is displayed. .

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 307 of 472

Possible output follows:

1. Application state and Target state:
ENABLED, MANUAL DISABLE, SYSTEM DISABLE,
AWAIT DISABLE, AWAIT APPL ENABLE, AWT
CONF DOWNLOAD
2. Port type: ADM, SYS, TTY
3. Port state:
NO SDI/STA, DISABLED, ENABLED, TESTING,
KEYBOARD TST, AWAIT VT-200, DTR DOWN,
AUTOBAUDING, AWT AUTOBAUD, ABD SCANNING,
DEFAULT ABD, NO MODEM, IN SESSION, AWAIT
ENABLE
System description is entered as part of the port
configuration. For the additional port used to shadow the STA
application, the system description is SHADOW TTY.

STAT VMBA <vsid> vmba-19

Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Administration
application. Enter the command in the following format:
STAT VMBA <vsid> <NNNN>
Where:
• vsid = the VAS ID where the VMBA is configured
• NNNN = VMBA audit or upload function. You may
enter either AUDT or UPLD, where:
• AUDT = mailbox database audit, or
• UPLD = mailbox database upload
AUDT and UPLD are optional entries. The VAS ID must be
entered. The status output is shown below:

STAT VMBA <vsid>

• VMBA <ACTIVE or INACTIVE>
• AUDIT <ACTIVE or INACTIVE>
• UPLOAD <ACTIVE or INACTIVE>
STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT
• AUDIT INACTIVE, or AUDIT ACTIVE
Where:
• n AUDITED
• n MISMATCHES FOUND/CORRECTED
• n ERRORS

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 308 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD

• UPLOAD INACTIVE, or UPLOAD ACTIVE
Where:
• n UPLOADED
• n DELETED
• n ERRORS

STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT vmba-19

Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Database audit. Enter
the command in the following format.
STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT
The status output is shown below:
STAT VMBA <vsid> AUDT
• AUDIT INACTIVE, or AUDIT ACTIVE
Where:
• n AUDITED
• n MISMATCHES FOUND/CORRECTED
• n ERRORS

STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD vmba-19

Get the status for the Voice Mailbox Database upload. Enter
the command in the following format.
STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD
The status output is shown below:
STAT VMBA <vsid> UPLD
UPLOAD INACTIVE,or UPLOAD ACTIVE
Where:
• n UPLOADED
• n DELETED
• n ERRORS

SWCH AML x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) AML. This is AML msdl-18
switchover, where x is the active AML switching to standby
and y is the standby AML to become active.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 48
Alphabetical list of commands Page 309 of 472

SWCH CMS x y Switch active (x) and standby (y) CSL. This is CSL csl-8
switchover, where x is the active CSL switching to standby
and y is the standby CSL to become active.
Use SWCH AML x y in X11 Release 18 and later.

UPLD AML x TBL y msdl-18

Upload parameter table 1 to 4 from AML x (MSDL only).
The MSDL AML maintenance error log table, is uploaded
from the MSDL card and is displayed on the TTY screen.
The parameter tables are:
• TBL1 = AML maintenance error log table
• TBL2 = AML downloaded parameter table
• TBL3 = AML protocol error log table
• TBL4 = AML traffic table

MSDL Requirement: The MSDL card must be enabled. The

AML layer two must be enabled.
Example: ENL MSDL x followed by ENL AML x LYR2 must
have been executed at an earlier time.
Action: MSDL AML table is uploaded and is displayed on the
TTY screen.
This command is not available for the ESDI card.

X11 Maintenance
LD 48
Page 310 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

312

LD 51 LD 51
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 311 of 472

LD 51: Intercept Computer Update

This program updates the Meridian 1 with the intercept service interface
information that is stored. The program can be run manually or run in the
midnight routine for all customers.

Basic commands
CUST ALL Update all customers.
CUST c ...c Update 1 to 5 customers (0-99).

END Terminate the program.

UPD Update the transfer information.

X11 Maintenance
LD 51
Page 312 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CUST ALL Update all customers. icp-5

CUST c ...c Update 1 to 5 customers (0-99). Repeat the command if more icp-5
than 5 customers are to be updated.

END Terminate the program. icp-5

UPD Update the transfer information. icp-5

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

320

LD 54 LD 54
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 313 of 472

LD 54: Multifrequency Signaling

Diagnostic
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) or Multifrequency Signaling
(MFE) provides a handshaking facility between the Meridian 1/Meridian
SL-1 and the Central Office or Public Exchange (CO/PE) or between other
PBXs over network/Tie trunks.

The XMFC card (for superloop and Option 11 only) can be used on MFC or
MFE. XMFC card has four units.

The MFD overlay program is used to diagnose, display or change the status
of the MFC or MFE send/receive (S/R) cards.

The program resets all available MFC or MFE cards (for channels on
AXMFC card) and performs loop back tests during the midnight routines.
After every SYSLOAD or power-up, all available MFC or MFE cards are
initialized.

The program can be loaded by the system after every power-up (or
SYSLOAD), as part of the daily routines, or loaded manually to enter
commands.

Hardware Initialization after SYSLOAD

After system power-up, every idle MFC or MFE card is initialized
(self-tested). During this test the card is disabled (LED on faceplate ON) and
the S/R card microprocessor executes sequential loop back tests on both
channels.

On power-up SYSLOAD on XMFC, pack performs self-test, LED blinks 3

times to indicate self-test pass

X11 Maintenance
LD 54
Page 314 of 472 Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic

— Cardlan polling message indicates that XMFC pack has powered up.

— MSL-1 down loads the configuration (E0XXH)

— MSL-1 enables the card (C000H)

— Pack performs self-test again. If self-test passes (8000H), then LED is

OFF and pack is enabled. If self-test fails (80XXH), LED is ON and pack
is disabled.

These tests entail looping the sender output of each card to the Receiver input.
The sender transmits all thirty tone pairs (1 to 15 digits for both DOD/DID
modes) with a default signal level of zero. Each time the receiver detects a
tone pair, the microprocessor verifies the digit received. At the end of the test
the microprocessor tries to send two test results (one for each channel) to the
CPU.

The CPU cannot receive the results of the test because the card is disabled. A
command to enable the card is issued and the microprocessor sends the test
results to the CPU.

Loop around test during daily routines

This loop around test is conducted by the system during the midnight
routines. The midnight test is identical to the test conducted after power-up
except for the following points:
— the midnight test is conducted on one channel at a time for all available
MFC or MFE cards
— the MFC or MFE S/R card remains enabled (LED on faceplate OFF)
— the midnight self-test can also be loaded manually by issuing a command
on the specified channel

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 54
Multifrequency Signaling Diagnostic Page 315 of 472

Loop around test by command

The loop around tests are performed by maintenance personnel on a specified
channel of the MFC or MFE S/R card. There are two types of tests:
— one is identical to the midnight test which is conducted on the specific
channel
— the second is conducted on a specific channel for a specified digit and
signal level

LD 54 also performs the following functions:

— resets all idle MFC or MFE cards once a day during the midnight routines
— disables MFC or MFE card or channel. It enables MFC or MFE card or
channel
— determines the status of MFC card or channel
— lists all disabled MFC or MFE channels
— handles other common overlay operations (such as clear alarms)

Note 1: Use the DISL command to force-disable the MFC or MFE

channel or card.

Note 2: Use the DISI command in LD 32 to disable the card when idle.

Note 3: No more than 50% of MFC channels can be disabled at one time
as a result of system or manually initiated tests. However, this constraint
does not apply using disable commands.

MFC/MFE error handler and counter

The MFC/MFE error handlers are resident programs that monitor the number
of MFC or MFE signaling errors. A one-word error field in the MFC or MFE
block is initialized to zero. The Error Handler program allows a maximum of
10 errors. After every successful use of the MFC or MFE channel, the error
field will decrement by one, if it is not already at zero. After every failure of
the MFC or MFE channel the error field will increment by one.

In Generic X11, the Error Handler program generates only the ERR700 L S
C U message. When an Error Handler code is output, the MFD Overlay must
be loaded manually and the MFC or MFE channels tested.

X11 Maintenance
LD 54
Page 316 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
ATST l s c u Invoke automatic loop around test for specified unit

CDSP Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank

CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer
CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)

DISC l s c Disable specified MFC or MFE card

DISU l s c u Disable specified MFC or MFE channel

END Stop further testing or cancel active command

ENLC l s c Enable specified MFC or MFE card
ENLU l s c u Enable specified MFC or MFE channel

MIDN 0 Reset all idle MFC or MFE cards

MIDN 1 Initialize all idle MFC or MFE cards
MTST l s c u d l Invoke manual loop around test on unit with specified digit and level

STAT List all disabled MFC channels in the system

STAT l s c (u) Get status of specified MFC or MFE card or unit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 54
Option 11 commands Page 317 of 472

Option 11 commands
The following commands are applicable to Option 11 systems:
ATST c u Invoke automatic loop around test for specified unit

DISC card Disable specified XMFC/XMFE card

DISU c u Disable specified XMFC/XMFE unit

ENLC card Enable specified card

ENLU c u Enable specified unit

MIDN 0 Reset all idle XMFC/XMFE cards

MIDN 1 Initialize all idle XMFC/XMFE cards
MTST c u d l Invoke manual loop around test on unit with specified digit and level

STAT List all disabled XMFC/XMFE channels in system

STAT card List status of all units on card
STAT c u List status specified TN

X11 Maintenance
LD 54
Page 318 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ATST c u Invoke automatic loop around test for specified unit.

(Option 11)

ATST l s c u Invoke automatic loop around test for specified unit. basic-1
Performs automatic loop around test on specified unit with
default signal level of zero.
All 30 tone pairs are tested and verified by the card
microprocessor. Digits 1 to 15 signify Forward Signals 1 to 15
(DOD mode) and digits 16 to 30 signify Backward Signals 1 to
15 (DID mode).
The response is OK when the unit passes test and is enabled.
If the receiver sends no message within a predefined time
period, an error message indicating time-out is printed. If the
receiver indicates it has received a different signal than that
sent, the failed signal, an error message and the TN are
printed.

CDSP Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank. basic-1

CMAJ Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power basic-1
fault alarm.

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-1

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-1

customer c. (not applicable for Release 22)

DISC card Disable specified XMFC/XMFE card (Option 11)

DISC l s c Disable specified MFC or MFE card. basic-1

LED on card is ON when disabled.

DISU c u Disable specified XMFC/XMFE unit (Option 11)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 54
Alphabetical list of commands Page 319 of 472

DISU l s c u Disable specified MFC or MFE channel. basic-1

When the other unit on the card is also in a disabled state in
the software, a message is sent to disable the MFC or MFE
card. LED on card is ON when disabled.

END Stop further testing or cancel active command. basic-1

ENLC card Enable specified XMFC/XMFE card (Option 11)

ENLC l s c Enable specified MFC or MFE card. Response is OK. A basic-1

message is sent to the MFC or MFE card to turn off the LED.

ENLU c u Enable specified XMFC/XMFE unit (Option 11)

ENLU l s c u Enable specified MFC or MFE channel. Response is OK. A basic-1

message is sent to the MFC or MFE card to turn off the LED.

MIDN 0 Reset all idle MFC or MFE cards. Resets all idle MFC or MFE basic-1
cards and performs loop around tests on all idle channels.

MIDN 1 Initialize all idle MFC or MFE cards. Recommended after basic-1
installation.

MTST c u d l Invoke manual loop around test on unit with specified digit and
level. (Option 11)

MTST l s c u d l Invoke manual loop around test on unit with specified digit and basic-1
level. This command performs the manual loop around test on
specified unit with specified digit and signal level.
MFC-30 tone pairs are tested and verified by the Meridian 1
CPU. Digits 1 to 15 indicate forward signals 1 to 15 (DOD
mode) and digits 16 to 30 indicate backward signals 1 to 15
(DID mode).
MFE-15 tone pairs are tested and verified. Digits 1-15
represent Forward Signals 1-15 (DID mode). Digit 0
represents the control frequency.
Table 21 on 320 presents MFC sender (transmit) levels. These
levels are output by the MFC pack and do not include any
pads that may be put in by the trunk pack.

X11 Maintenance
LD 54
Page 320 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Table 21
MFC sender/transmit levels
Digit level Level at S/R card Digit level Level at S/R card

0 8 dBm 8 4 dBm
1 11 dBm 9 5 dBm
2 12 dBm 10 6 dBm
3 13 dBm 11 7 dBm
4 14 dBm 12 9 dBm
5 15 dBm 13 10 dBm
6 16 dBm 14 spare (8) dBm
7 31 dBm 15 spare (8) dBm

The MFE signal level 0 = -10.5 dBm level with skew -7.0 dBm
control frequency level. Signal levels 1-7 are used for internal
test purposes.
The response is OK when the unit passes the test and is enabled.
If the unit fails the test, the appropriate error message and the
TN are printed.

STAT List all disabled MFC channels in the system. basic-1

STAT c u Get status of specified MFC or MFE card or unit.

STAT l s c (u) Get status of specified MFC or MFE card or unit. basic-1
Status is one of: IDLE, BUSY, MBSY, DSBL or UNEQ for both
channels.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

338

LD 60 LD 60
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 321 of 472

LD 60: Digital Trunk Interface and

Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic
The LD 60 diagnostic program can be run in midnight routines or loaded
manually to enter commands.

On Option 11 Systems, LD 60 is used to maintain:

— NTAK20 Clock Controller

— NTAK09 1.5 Mb/s (DTI/PRI) Interface Card
— NTAK10 2.0 Mb/s (DTI) Interface Card
— NTAK79 2.0 Mb/s (PRI)

This program is used to maintain the following on other systems:

— QPC471/775 Clock Controller
— QPC472 1.5 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
— QPC536 2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2)
— QPC720 Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
— NT8D72AA 2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 322 of 472 Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface Diagnostic

Channel Timeslot Mapping

If a system loop is configured with a SYS-12, AXE-10 SWE, NUMERIS,
SwissNet D-channel (SWISS), TCNZ, or EuroISDN, then the following
message to explain the difference in timeslot to channel mapping between the
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 and the public network will be printed on loading
the O verlay. The heading will differ according to the interface supported by
the phase.

Example Message:
M 1/SL-1 — SYS-12
AXE-10 SWE
NUMERIS
SWISS
TCNZ
EuroISDN

Table 22: Channel Timeslot Mapping

Channel M 1/SL-1 Network Timeslot

B 1-15 1-15 1-15

B 16-30 17-31 17-31
D 31 16 16

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Basic Commands Page 323 of 472

Basic Commands

DTI/PRI commands
ATLP (0), 1 Disable (default) or enable midnight auto loop test

CDSP Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c

DISI loop Disable loop when all channels are idle

DISL loop Disable network and DTI/PRI cards of loop
DLBK loop Disable remote loop back test per RLBK command
DLBK l ch Disable remote loop back test per RLBK l ch command
DSCH l ch Disable channel ch of loop

ENCH loop Enable all channels on 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI

ENCH l ch Enable channel ch of DTI/PRI loop
ENLL loop Enable network and DTI/PRI cards of loop

LCNT (loop) List contents of alarm counters on one or all DTI/PRI loops
LOVF c r List threshold overflows for customer c (0-99) and route r (0-511)

RCNT Reset alarm counters of all DTI/PRI loops

RCNT loop Reset alarm counter of DTI/PRI loop
RMST loop Perform self-test on loop
RMST l ch Perform self-test on specified channel (2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI only)

RLBK loop Close loop at carrier interface point for testing

RLBK l ch Close channel ch at carrier interface point
RSET l ch Reset thresholds for channel ch

SLFT loop Invoke hardware self-test on loop

SLFT l ch Invoke partial hardware self-test on channel ch
STAT Get status of all loops
STAT loop Get status of DTI/PRI loop
STAT l ch Get status of channel ch

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 324 of 472 Basic Commands

Clock controller commands

DIS CC x (0,1) Disable system clock controller x (0 or 1)
DSCK loop Disables the clock for loop
DSYL loop Disable yellow alarm processing for loop

ENCK loop Enable the clock for loop

ENL CC x (0,1) Enable system clock controller x (0,1)
ENYL loop Enable yellow alarm processing for loop
EREF Enable automatic switchover of system clocks

MREF Disable switchover of system clocks

SSCK x (0,1) Get status of system clock x (0,1)

SWCK Switch system clock from active to standby

TRCK aaa Set clock controller tracking to primary, secondary or free run

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Basic Commands Page 325 of 472

Option 11 commands
The following commands are applicable to Option 11 systems:

ATLP (0), 1 Disable (default) or enable midnight auto loop test. Automatic Card Test, checks
the same functions as the self-test.

DIS CC 0 Disable system clock controller 0.

DISI card Digital card is disabled only when all the channels are IDLE. STATUS LEDs are
lit. Channel states and loop state are set to DSBL.
DISL card Disables Digital card. Active calls are forced disconnected by on-hook simulation.
All channels are marked as DSBL.

DLBK card Disables remote loop back test of RLBK on card. Card will remain in DSBL state.
DLBK c ch Disables remote loop back test on channel ch of card c The channel will remain in
DSBL state.

DSCH c ch Channel ch of Digital card c is disabled. Status of the channel is marked DSBL.
DSCK card Disable the clock for card. (Applicable for secondary reference only.)
DSYL card Disable yellow alarm processing for card.

ENCH card Enable all the channels on card. The status of each equipped channel will be set
to IDLE.
ENCH c ch Channel ch of card is enabled. The status of the channel is marked IDLE.
ENCK card Enable the clock reference for secondary clock only.

ENL CC 0 Enable system clock controller 0

ENLL card Enables card. All channels are set to IDLE status.
ENYL card Enable yellow alarm processing for card.

LCNT Prints contents of all alarm counters of all Digital cards.

LCNT card Prints contents of all alarm counters for card.

RCNT Resets all alarm counters of all Digital cards.

RCNT card Resets all alarm counters for card.

RLBK card Performs external loop back test on card. (Card must be disabled.)
RLBK c ch Performs external loop back test on channel ch of card c. (Channel must be
disabled.)
RMST card Performs a far end loop test on card. (Card must be disabled).
RMST c ch Performs a far end loop test on channel ch of card c. (Channel must be disabled.)
RSET c ch Reset thresholds for channel ch

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 326 of 472 Basic Commands

SLFT card Invokes Digital hardware self-test on card. (Card must be disabled.)
SLFT c ch Invokes Digital hardware self-test on channel ch of card c.

SSCK (0) Get status of primary system clock 0.

STAT card Prints status (BUSY/IDLE/DSBL/MNT-BUSY) of all channels on card.
STAT c ch Prints status (BUSY/IDLE/DSBL/MNT-BUSY) of channel ch on card c.

TRCK aaa Set clock controller tracking to primary, secondary or free run.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Alphabetical list of commands Page 327 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ATLP (0), 1 Disable (0) or enable (1) daily routine auto loop test. Where: dti/pra-5
• 1 = loop test enable; causes far-end to raise and clear
yellow alarm
• 0 =run the partial loop test; there is no interaction for
far-end loop (default value)
LD 60 is included in the daily (midnight) routines if defined by
LD 17 prompt DROL. ATLP is only run if LD 60 is included in
the daily routines.

If ATLP = 1, and all 24 channels on the loop are idle, then the
DTI/PRI card is disabled and a self-test is performed on each
channel. All DTI/PRI cards are tested, one at a time. If a
D-channel is on the loop, it is temporarily released and
reestablished. If one or more channels are busy, the test is not
performed on the loop.
If ATLP = 0, then an “AUTO TEST DSBL” message is output
and only one channel is tested. The channel is randomly
selected by software, it cannot be specified.
Automatic Card Test, checks the same functions as the
self-test. (Option 11)

CDSP Clear maintenance display to 00 or blank. dti/pra-5

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. dti/pra-5

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for dti/pra-5

customer c.

DIS CC 0 Disable system clock controller. (Option 11)

DIS CC x (0,1) Disable system clock controller 0 or 1. dti/pra-5

CPU 0 must be idle to disable CC 0. CPU 1 must be idle to
disable CC 1. To switch CPUs, use the SPCU command in
LD 35.

DISI card Card is disabled only when all the channels are IDLE. STATUS
LEDs are lit. Channel states and loop state are set to DSBL.
(Option 11)

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 328 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DISI loop Disable DTI/PRI loop when all channels are idle. dti/pra-5
The network and DTI/PRI cards are then disabled and status
LEDs are lit. Channel status is set to BSY. Enter END to abort.
When the PRI is physically connected to a DCHI card, the
D-channels must be disabled first using LD 96.

DISL card Disables card. Active calls are force disconnected by on-hook
simulation. All channels are marked as DSBL and status LEDs
are lit. (Option 11)

DISL loop Disable network and DTI/PRI/DTI2/PRI2 cards of loop. (PRI & dti/pra-5
PRI2 loops cannot be disabled unless associated D-channel is
disabled first using LD 96).
Active calls are force disconnected by on-hook simulation. All
channels are disabled and status LEDs are lit.

DLBK card Disables remote loop back test of RLBK on card. Card will
remain in DSBL state.(Option 11)

DLBK c ch Disables remote loop back test of RLBK on channel ch. The
channel will remain in DSBL state. (Option 11)

DLBK loop Disable remote loop back test per RLBK command. dti/pra-5
Loop remains disabled.

DLBK l ch Disable remote loop back test per RLBK loop ch command. dti/pra-5
The channel remains disabled.

DSCH c ch Channel ch of Digital card is disabled. Status of the channel is

marked DSBL. (Option 11)

DSCH l ch Disable channel ch of loop l. dti/pra-5

DSCK card Disable the clock for card. For secondary clock reference only.
(Option 11)

DSCK loop Disables the clock for loop, which does not have to be dti/pra-5
previously defined as the primary or secondary clock source.

DSYL card Disable yellow alarm processing for card. (Option 11)

DSYL loop Disable yellow alarm processing for loop. dti/pra-5

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Alphabetical list of commands Page 329 of 472

ENCH card Enable all the channels of 2.0 Mb/s Digital card. The status of
each equipped channel will be set to IDLE. (Option 11)

ENCH c ch Channel ch of Digital card c is enabled. The status of the

channel is marked IDLE. (Option 11)

ENCH loop Enable all channels on DTI2 loop. dti/pra-5

ENCH l ch Enable channel ch of loop. dti 2 - 5

For TIE trunks with A+B signaling, the channel is set to the
same state as the far-end. The far-end refers to the status of
the channels as presented by DTI T1 port.
With B-channel signaling, channels are placed into the IDLE
state and made available for calls.

ENCK card Enables the secondary clock reference. Primary clock

reference can not be disabled through this command.
(Option 11)

ENCK loop Enables the clock for loop, which must be previously defined dti/pra-5
as a primary or secondary clock source via service change.

END Aborts the program. dti/pra-5

ENL CC 0 Enable system clock controller. (Option 11.)

ENL CC x Enable system clock controller 0 or 1. dti/pra-5

ENLL card Enables card. All channels are set to IDLE status. (Option 11)

ENLL loop Enable network and DTI/PRI/DTI2/PRI2 cards of loop. dti/pra-5

For TIE trunks with A+B signaling, the channels are set to the
same status as the far-end; otherwise, the channels are set to
idle status. The far-end refers to the status of the channels as
presented by DTI T1 port. Status LEDs are deactivated.
With B-channel signaling, channels are placed into the IDLE
state and made available for calls.

ENYL card Enable yellow alarm processing for card. (Option 11)

ENYL loop Enable yellow alarm processing for loop. dti/pra-5

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 330 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

EREF Enables automatic switchover of primary and secondary dti/pra-5

reference clocks. Also enables recovery to primary or
secondary clocks when loops associated with these clocks are
automatically enabled. (not supported for Option 11)

LCNT (card) List contents of alarm counters on one or all of the cases listed
after LCNT (loop) command. (Option 11)

LCNT (loop) List contents of alarm counters on one or all of the following dti/pra-5
cases:
Case 1 1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI
The counters are:
• BPV = bipolar violation counter
• SLIPD = frame slip deletion counter
• SLIPR = frame slip repetition count
• LOSFA = loss of frame alignment counter
• OS_BPV = 24-hr bipolar violation counter
a For PRI with D2, D3, or D4 framing format, 24-hr
bipolar violation counter
b For PRI with Extended Superframe Format, 24-hr
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) counter
• OS_LOSFA = 24-hr loss of frame alignment counter
• OS_YEL = 24-hr yellow alarm counter

Case 2 2.0 Mb/S DTI

The counters are:
• G1 alarms
• BPV = bipolar violation counter
• FAP = frame alignment threshold counter
• SLP = maintenance threshold slip counter
• CRC = cyclic redundancy threshold counter
• AIS = alarm indication signal
• AIS64 = 64 Kb/s alarm indication signal
• FAL = loss of frame alignment
• MFAL = loss of multiframe alignment
• BIT3 = bit 3 error
• BIT6 = bit 6 error
• CFAS = loss of crc-4 multiframe alignment (Option11
only)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Alphabetical list of commands Page 331 of 472

Case 3 2.0 Mb/s PRI

The counters are:
• BPV = bipolar violation counter
• CRC = cyclic redundancy threshold counter
• FAP = frame alignment threshold counter
• SLP = maintenance threshold slip counter
• AIS = alarm indication signal
• LFAS = loss of frame alignment signal
• LMAS = loss of multiframe alignment signal
• RAI = remote alarm indication
• LOS = loss of signal

LOVF c r List threshold overflows for customer c (0-99) and route r dti/pra-5
(0-511).
The overflows are set when the resident trunk monitor outputs
a diagnostic message. Defined thresholds are HOLD, ILLR,
REPT, SEIZ and SVFL (see LD 16).

MREF Disable switchover of system clocks. dti/pra-5

Also disables recovery to primary or secondary reference
clocks when loops associated with these clocks are
automatically enabled. (not supported for Option 11)

RCNT (card) Reset alarm counters for all or specified card only. (Option 11) dti-16

RCNT (loop) Reset alarm counters for all or specified loop only. dti/pra-5
If the DTI loop was disabled due to an error threshold overflow
and the DTI may be enabled automatically when the counter is
cleared, then before performing any command, such as test,
that requires the DTI to be disabled you should:
1. disable the DTI
2. list the counters with the LCNT command
3. reset the counters with the RCNT command
4. do the test commands

RLBK card Performs external loop back test on card. (Card must be
disabled). (Option 11)

RLBK c ch Performs external loop back test on Digital Channel ch of card.

(Channel ch must be disabled). (Option 11)

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 332 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

RLBK loop Close loop at carrier interface point for testing. dti/pra-5
Allows the far-end to perform an external loop back test on the
carrier span using the RMST command. This command closes
the loop at the carrier interface point of the DTI/PRI. The
DTI/PRI loop must be disabled first using the DISI or DISL loop
commands.

RLBK l ch Close channel ch at carrier interface point. dti/pra-5

Allows the far-end to perform an external loop back test on the
carrier span. The loop remains enabled, but closes the
specified channel at the carrier interface point of the DTI/PRI.
The DTI/PRI channel must be disabled first using the DSCH
loop ch command.

RMST card Performs a far end loop test on card. (Card must be disabled). dti-16
(Option 11)

RMST c ch Performs a far end loop test on Channel ch of card c. (Channel dti-16
ch must be disabled). (Option 11)

RMST loop Perform remote loop back test on loop. The far-end must be in dti/pra-5
the remote loop back mode. (RLBK command has been issued
at the far-end)

RMST l ch The far-end channel must be in the remote loop back mode. dti 2 - 14
(RLBK command has been issued at the far-end)

RSET c ch Reset thresholds for channel ch on card c. (Option 11)

RSET l ch Reset thresholds for channel ch on loop l. dti/pra-5

SLFT card Invokes Digital hardware self-test on card. (Card must be

disabled). (Option 11)

SLFT c ch Invokes Digital hardware self-test on channel ch on card c.

(Option 11 )

SLFT loop Invoke DTI/PRI hardware self-test on loop. dti/pra-5

This command tests speech path continuity, zero code
suppression, remote alarm detection, and A&B bit signaling.
The loop must be disabled first using the DISI or DISL loop
command.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Alphabetical list of commands Page 333 of 472

SLFT l ch Invoke partial hardware self-test on channel ch. The DTI/PRI basic-1
channel must be disabled first using the DSCH command.

SSCK (0) Status of Primary clock (Option 11)

SSCK x Get status of system clock 0 or 1. The SSCK command dti/pra-5

indicates the active controller as well as active primary or
secondary reference clock source or free run.
Response may be:
1. AUTO SWREF CLK - ENBL = automatic switchover of
system clocks enabled
2. AUTO SWREF CLK - DSBL = automatic switchover of
system clocks disabled
3. CLOCK ACTIVE = the active controller
4. DSBL = clock disabled
5. ENBL = clock enabled
6. REF CLK ERR = possible faulty cable from CC to
DTI/PRI, or faulty Clock Controller
7. SYSTEM CLOCK - FREE RUN, PREF or SREF = clock is
in free run mode or tracking to the primary (PREF) or
secondary (SREF) reference loop
8. VCXO AGING ERROR = the timing crystal is faulty,
replace the clock

STAT Get status of all digital loops. The types of loops are: dti/pra-5
1. PRI = Primary Rate Interface
2. PRI2 =2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface
3. DTI = Digital Trunk Interface
4. DTI2 =2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface
5. DLI = Digital Link Interface
6. JDMI = Japan Digital Multiplex Interface

STAT card Prints status (BUSY/IDLE/DSBL/MNT-BUSY) of all channels dti-16

on Digital Card. See STAT loop for possible responses.
(Option 11)

STAT c ch Prints status (BUSY/IDLE/DSBL/MNT-BUSY) of channel Ch, dti-16

for Digital card. (Option 11). See STAT l ch for possible
responses.

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 334 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT loop Get status of digital loop. Sample output: dti/pra-5

AAA TRK LOOP x - BBBB
SERVICE RESTORE: YES/NO
YEL ALM PROCESS: YES/NO
ALARM STATUS: NO ALARM/RED(local) ALARM
Where: AAA may be :
1. DTI
2. DTI2
3. PRI
4. PRI2
5. TIE
6. DID
7. DTI LINK (DTI link loop = DLI)

Where: BBBB may be:

1. DSBL = Hardware of specified digital loop is disabled
2. ENBL = Hardware of specified digital loop is enabled
3. RLBK = Hardware of specified digital loop is in remote
loop back mode
4. DISI PENDING = DSI command is in progress
5. TRACKING = system clock is tracked to this loop
6. IDLE = Hardware of specified digital loop is idle
When AAA = TIE, IDLE ISPC indicates that the channel
is an established ISPC link ready to be used by any
end-users having access to the associated ISPC route.
7. SERVER RCVY = server has not recovered status of DTI
LINK loop. Channels will not be allocated for call
processing until this status is removed by the server
8. BUSY = Hardware of specified digital loop is busy
When AAA = TIE, BUSY ISPC indicates that the channel
is an established ISPC link which is used by end users
on the PBXs.
When AAA = DID, BUSY ISPC indicates that the ISPC
link is established to the Central Office. The status
“BUSY” is independent to ISL feature usage of the ISPC
link.
9. MSBY = Hardware of specified digital loop is in make
busy mode

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Alphabetical list of commands Page 335 of 472

When AAA = TIE, MSBY ISPC indicates that the

configured ISPC link is one of the following:
a not established yet
b established, but the ISL D-channel which controls its
usage not established

Where: SERVICE RESTORE may be:

1. YES = restore service automatically if alarm is removed
2. NO = loop can only be manually enabled
Where: YEL ALARM PROCESS may be:
1. YES = yellow alarm processing is enabled
2. NO = yellow alarm processing is disabled
Where: ALARM STATUS may be:
1. NO ALARM = no alarm active
2. RED = red (local) alarm active

Action 1:
1. list alarm counters (LCNT command)
2. check for DTA messages
3. go to the fault clearing section
Where:
• YELLOW = yellow (remote) alarm active
• WAITING = DTI/PRI card is not responding. The card
either did not respond to a status check or did not
respond when a red alarm was cleared. Go to Action 2.

Action 2:
1. check DTI/PRI status again
2. disable, then enable the DTI/PRIPRI

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 336 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STATE OF SERVICE:
• OOS = out-of-service
• NNC = no new call
• NNDC = no new data call
• MNT = maintenance
When an alarm is present (group 2 error), it is a
REMOTE ALARM
REMOTE ALARM:
• NS = alarm indication signal
• RAI = remote alarm indication

LOCAL ALARM:
• LOS = loss of signal
• LFAS = loss of frame alignment signal
• LMAS = loss of multiframe alignment signal
•
STAT l ch Get status of channel ch. Status may be: dti/pra-5
1. IDLE = channel is enabled and is idle
2. BUSY = channel is enabled and is call processing busy or
channel is in a lockout state (far-end is disabled)
3. MBSY = channel is being used for maintenance busy, the
D-channel is down, or far-end channel is disabled
4. DSBL = channel is disabled
5. DSBL (SERVER) = channel is being used for server
maintenance and is disabled for the duration (1.5 Mb/s
DTI digital link interface only)
6. FE MBSY = near end is idle, far-end is maintenance
busy
7. FE DSBL = near end is idle, far-end is disabled
8. FE DSBL = far-end B-channel is disabled
9. FE MBSY = far-end B-channel is in maintenance mode
10. UNEQ = channel is not equipped

When the loop is a Phantom loop, it is possible to receive

the status messages: TIE IDLE ISPC, TIE BUSY ISPC, or
TIE MSBY ISPC. Interpret these system responses as they
are interpreted for the command STAT loop. See the section
which outlines BBBB alternatives for the STAT loop command
on page 334.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 60
Alphabetical list of commands Page 337 of 472

SWCK Switch system clock from active to standby. dti/pra-5

(not supported for Option 11)
The reference clock source remains unchanged.

TRCK aaa Set clock controller tracking to primary, secondary or free run. dti/pra-5
Where aaa is:
• PCK = track primary clock
• SCLK = track secondary clock
• FRUN = free run mode
Track primary clock (PCK) or secondary clock (SCLK) as the
reference clock or go to free run (FRUN) mode.

X11 Maintenance
LD 60
Page 338 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

340

LD 61 LD 61
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 339 of 472

LD 61: Message Waiting Lamps Reset

The Message Waiting Lamps Reset (MWL) program can be invoked
automatically by the system as part of the daily routines or manually from an
input device. It is used to deactivate all active Message Waiting lamps on user
stations and reset the associated status in the system.

This program cannot be applied to digital sets.

When LD 61 is loaded manually, 'G' must be entered to initiate the task.

G command
Starts resetting the trouble status on all Message Waiting lamps. The program
does not reset lamp status unless all message center sets are out-of-service
(i.e., message center is closed and attendants are in Night Service).

Before running this program, all Message Center (MC) telephones must be
taken out-of-service by “make telephone busy” and if attendants are set up to
handle message calls, they must be in night mode.

X11 Maintenance
LD 61
Page 340 of 472 Message Waiting Lamps Reset

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

344

LD 62 LD 62
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 341 of 472

LD 62: 1.5 Mb/s Remote Peripheral

Equipment Local End Diagnostic
This program is loaded manually to test the local equipment associated with
a particular carrier going to a remote site.

Note: Program 62 is not supported on Option 11 systems.

When to use LD 62
It is assumed that either:
— a manually requested or automatic test using LD 33 has indicated a fault
which may be due to a failure of either local or remote equipment by one
of the following messages: RPD202, RPD230, RPD232, RPD240,
RPD250.
— a carrier has been disabled automatically and RPD211, RPD214 or
RPD215 was printed.

This program is used to determine whether the fault is at the local

Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 site. It is necessary to disable the carrier to be
tested before performing the local loop around test.

If a local end fault is detected and cleared, a complete test using LD 33 should
then be done.

The program operates on one loop, which must be defined via the DFLP
command. If a command is issued when no loop number has been specified,
the response LOOP? will be output.

X11 Maintenance
LD 62
Page 342 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
DFLP loop Define RPE loop
DISC c l Disable carrier c on loop l
DISI c Disable carrier c once it is idle

END Terminate active command

ENLC c Enable carrier c

LFLT List speech timeslots that failed LOCL test

LOCL c Perform loop around test on carrier c
LOCL c ALL Loop around test for all speech timeslots on carrier c
LPBK c Close loop back relay on carrier c

SCAR Switch primary carriers

STAT Get status of carrier specified by DISI
STAT CAR loop Get status of all carriers on loop

UNLP c Open loop back relay on carrier c

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 62
Alphabetical list of commands Page 343 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

DFLP loop Define RPE loop. basic-1

Defines the loop for the following commands. The specified
loop must be an enabled RPE loop.

DISC c l Disable carrier c on loop l. basic-1

Must be the current secondary carrier. Any calls using this
carrier will be disconnected.

DISI c Disable carrier c once it is idle. The number of channels still basic-1
busy on the carrier may be checked using the STAT command.

END Terminate active command. If no command is in progress, the basic-1

active DISI command is canceled.

ENLC c Enable carrier c. If the operation is successful, OK is output. basic-1

LFLT List speech timeslots that failed LOCL test. If no channels failed basic-1
or if no test has been performed, the response is NONE.

LOCL c Perform loop around test on carrier c. basic-1

Carrier c must be disabled when the command is given. The
command tests the local equipment associated with the carrier,
plus the continuity of the 10 speech timeslots which are always
carried by this carrier (see below). If all tests pass, response is
OK. The carrier is left in the “manually disabled” state.

Speech timeslots carried by each carrier:

Carrier Timeslots
primary 4, 5, 10, 11, 20, 21, 26, 27, 28, 29
0 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 22, 23, 30, 31
1 2, 3, 8, 9, 16, 17, 18, 19, 24, 25

X11 Maintenance
LD 62
Page 344 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

LOCL c ALL Loop around test for all speech timeslots on carrier c. basic-1
Similar to LOCL command, except that all 20 speech timeslots
plus the signaling channel will be tested, provided the channels
are not being used by active calls.
Execution of this command will cause temporary disruption of
all active calls on the loop. The command should be used only
when LOCL command tests OK without the ALL option and a
fault is still indicated by a complete test using LD 33.

Response will include:

x SLOTS TESTED, giving the number of speech channels
actually tested (maximum 20)

LPBK c Close loop back relay on carrier c. Carrier c must be disabled. basic-1
The relay remains closed until an ENLC or UNLP command is
given.

SCAR Switch primary carriers. basic-1

This command is allowed only if both the current secondary
carrier is enabled, and no faults exist on the current secondary
carrier which would reduce the number of working speech
channels if it were to become the primary carrier.

STAT Get status of carrier specified by DISI. If no DISI request is basic-1

active, error message RPL022 is output.

STAT CAR loop Get status of all carriers on specified loop. Response will be basic-1
one or more of:
1. PRIME = carrier is currently the primary one
2. DSBL = carrier is disabled
3. LPBK = loop back relay is closed
4. x BUSY
5. y DSBL
The values x and y indicate the number of busy channels and
number of channels having continuity failure from the most
recent tests in LD 33. The LOCL command does not change
the number of disabled channels.

UNLP c Open loop back relay on carrier c. basic-1

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

346

LD 66 LD 66
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 345 of 472

LD 66: Conversion
Conversion programs are used to convert to a new version of software. The
procedure used for this process depends on the versions of software involved.

Refer to the Software Conversion NTP and Controlled Release Bulletins

(provided with new software).

X11 Maintenance
LD 66
Page 346 of 472 Conversion

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

350

LD 75 LD 75
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 347 of 472

LD 75: Digital Trunk Maintenance

This program lets you test digital channels, bring a digital (IDA) link into
service or take a link out-of-service.

All Overlay 75 commands may be used on Option 11 systems by substituting

card number for loop number.

X11 Maintenance
LD 75
Page 348 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
CDSP Clears the maintenance display
CMIN ALL Clears minor alarm for all customers
CMIN c Clears a minor alarm for customer c
DIS DDCS loop Disables DDCS loop
DIS DDSL n Disables DDSL n
DIS DTCS loop Disables DTCS loop
DIS DTRC l c Disables real channel c on loop l
DIS DTSL n Disables DTSL n
DIS DTVC l c Disables virtual channel c on loop l
DIS LSSL n Disables Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS
DIS PRI2 loop Disables PRI2 loop
DISI DDCS loop Disables all channels on loop as they become idle
DISI DTCS loop Disables all channels on loop as they become idle
ENL DDCS loop Enables DDCS loop
ENL DDSL n Enables DDSL n
ENL DTCS loop Enables DTCS loop
ENL DTRC l c Enables real channel c on loop l
ENL DTSL n Enables DTSL n
ENL DTVC l c Enables virtual channel c on loop l
ENL LSSL n Enables Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS
STAT DDCS (loop) Gives status of all DDCS loops if loop omitted. Gives status of DDCS loop
and all channels on loop if loop specified.
STAT DDSL (n) Gives status of all DDSLs if n omitted. Gives status of DDSL n if n
specified.
STAT DTCS (loop) Gives status of all DTCS loops if loop omitted. Gives status of DTCS loop
and all channels on loop if loop specified.
STAT DTRC l c Gives status of real digital channel c on loop l
STAT DTSL (n) Gives status of all DTSLs if n omitted. Gives status of DTSL n if n
specified.
STAT DTVC l c Gives status of virtual digital channel c on loop l
STAT LSRC n (x) Gives status of Real Channel x on Signaling Link n
STAT LSSL n Gives status of Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS
STAT LSVC n (x) Gives status of Virtual Channel x on Signaling Link n
STAT PRI2 loop Gives status of PRI2 loop
STRT n Starts DDSL n

Note: If GEC Plessey Telecommunications (GPT) hardware is used, the

mnemonic DTSL is used instead of DDSL and the mnemonic DTCS is
used instead of DDCS.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 75
Alphabetical list of commands Page 349 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clears the maintenance display. dpnss-16

CMIN ALL Clears minor alarm for all customers. dpnss-16

CMIN c Clears a minor alarm for customer c. dpnss-16

DIS DDCS loop Disables DDCS loop. dpnss-16

DIS DDSL n Disables DDSL n. dpnss-16

DIS DTCS loop Disables DTCS loop dpnss-16

DIS DTRC l c Disables real channel c on loop l. dpnss-16

DIS DTSL n Disables DTSL n. dpnss-16

DIS DTVC l c Disables virtual channel c on loop l. dpnss-16

DIS LSSL n Disables LSSL n. dpnss-16

DIS PRI2 loop Disables PRI2 loop

DISI DDCS loop Disables all channels on loop as they become idle. dpnss-16
The message “OK DISABLING” is issued and further
commands can be entered. DTM055 is issued when all of
the channels are disabled.

DISI DTCS loop Disables all channels on loop as they become idle. dpnss-16

ENL DDCS loop Enables DDCS loop. dpnss-16

ENL DDSL n Enables DDSL n. dpnss-16

ENL DTCS loop Enables DTCS loop. dpnss-16

ENL DTRC l c Enables real channel c on loop l. dpnss-16

ENL DTSL n Enables DTSL n. dpnss-16

X11 Maintenance
LD 75
Page 350 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL DTVC l c Enables virtual channel c on loop l. dpnss-16

ENL LSSL n Enables Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS. dpnss-16

STAT DDCS (loop) Gives status of all DDCS loops if loop omitted. Gives status dpnss-16
of DDCS loop and all channels on loop if loop specified.

STAT DDSL (n) Gives status of all DDSLs if n omitted or specified. dpnss-16

STAT DTCS (loop) Gives status of all DTCS loops if loop omitted. Gives status dpnss-16
of DTCS loop and all channels on loop if loop specified.

STAT DTRC l c Gives status of real digital channel c on loop l dpnss-16

STAT DTSL (n) Gives status of all DTSLs if n omitted. Gives status of DTSL dpnss-16
n if n specified.

STAT DTVC l c Gives status of virtual digital channel c on loop l dpnss-16

STAT LSRC n (x) Gives status of Real Channel x on Signaling Link n dpnss-16

STAT LSSL n Gives status of Low Speed Signaling Link n for APNSS dpnss-16

STAT LSVC n (x) Gives status of Virtual Channel x on Signaling Link n dpnss-16

STAT PRI2 loop Gives status of PRI2 loop

STRT n Starts DDSL n dpnss-16

The message “OK, STARTING” is issued and further
commands can be entered. DTM301 is issued when the link
is successfully started.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

364

LD 77 LD 77
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 351 of 472

LD 77: Manual Print

LD 77 is used to print the signals that come from the peripheral packs to the
common equipment.

Note: This Overlay is intended for people experienced with the message
formats and protocols.

Some loop-level commands are not valid on Option 11 systems, and have
been replaced with slot-level commands.

When to use LD 77
LD 77 can be useful in determining which peripheral pack (line or trunk) is
causing a system overload in situations in which the CPU cannot narrow the
problem to a specific Terminal Number (TN). Once the program is loaded
from a tape, the user may request the system to print all the input messages
from a specific area of peripheral equipment.

Manual Print can also be used to continuously send frequency combinations

by defining the loop and terminal number of the MFE card, busying the
channel, setting the read/write bit to write, defining the message and
repeatedly sending it. This channel will not be available for regular signaling
until the message sending is stopped and the channel is idled.

When a machine is carrying traffic, there will be a large number of valid

messages generated from the peripheral equipment. Thus, the program will be
most effective for trouble-shooting when:
— there is little system traffic
— message address range is restricted (i.e., looks only at one shelf or loop)

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 352 of 472 Manual Print

This program has capabilities which are used by the software designers
during development activities. The user is protected from accidental access to
these commands (and resulting potential service degradation) as a password
is required. This password is not available to customers.

LD 77 Output Format
All numerical input/output is in hexadecimal format. The output is in the
following format:
<loop> <shelf> <card> <terminal> <message> <time-stamp>

The loop, shelf and card fields identify the circuit pack generating the
message.

Abbreviations for LD 77
The fields are defined as follows:

b = bypass bit value

cb = continuity bit
ch = chip on a given SSD Peripheral Signaling pack
g = group
l s c u = TN: loop, shelf, card, unit
ln = link
loop = network loop
m = module
p = page
ps = Peripheral Signaling pack
sh = Multigroup shelf
ts = time slot
v = desired lamp state; 0 = lit, 1 = dark
x = Multigroup bit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 77
Manual Print Page 353 of 472

Some four-letter commands can be abbreviated to a one-letter command

when entered from a TTY (but not an SL-1 telephone). The one-letter
command is shown in parentheses after the four-letter mnemonic (e. g., ARPS
(F) l s 32 can be entered as F l s 32).

LD 77 Input Format
All input is in decimal form, except message data which is in hexadecimal
form. Space and carriage return are automatically done by the overlay when
the expected number of digits are input. Therefore the number of input digits
must be strictly entered for each input parameter. The number of letters
specified in each parameter field dictate the number of hex or decimal digits
that must be entered.

For example:

Enter for TN 1 0 2 0:
001 0 02 00
Enter for TN 156 1 15 30:
156 1 15 30

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 354 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
Only “P” commands can be used on superloops. Some of these commands
may not be valid on Option 11 systems; for valid Option 11 commands see
LD 77 Option 11 commands in this section.

ANWK (B) loop ts Read/write network card memory

ANWS (C) loop ts Read/write network card memory (short)
ARPM loop 20 Print contents of timeslots in RPC
ARPM loop ts b s c u Get contents of timeslot ts, loop
ARPS (F) loop ts Read Remote Peripheral Switch memory

DENL loop Get the density of loop

DFTM (T) s c u Define unit to receive signaling messages
DRTM (N) l s c u Stop printing messages

N Stop print

P Print all messages

P lll Print all messages from specified loop lll
P lll s Print all messages from specified shelf lll s
P lll s cc Print all messages from specified card lll s cc
PRTM (P) lll s cc uu Print messages, as specified lll s cc uu

WCTS loop Print the current unit scan of loop

WMBY l s c u Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to BUSY
WMUB l s c u Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to NOT BUSY

XRCL loop Read contents of RPC control register for loop

XRSH loop Read and print contents of SHEN register for loop
XRST loop Read and print contents of STATUS register for loop
XTRP loop Test remote RPC processor for loop
XTLP loop Test local RPC processor for loop
XWCS loop xxxx Writes RPC control/SHEN register for loop

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 77
Basic commands (Release 15 & later) Page 355 of 472

Basic commands (Release 15 & later)

DISC Call disconnect
DLMP 0/1 Turn on/off lamp audit
DMTN Monitor input and output SSD messages for 1 to 6 TNs

IMSG Send input SSD messages from PE to Meridian 1 CPU

KALL Call set up without specifying timeslots

KALS Call set up with specifying timeslots
KILLx Reset one or all TN being monitored

XMSG Send output SSD messages from Meridian 1 CPU to PE

XMII, XMIO Send input/output XMI messages between the CPU and superloops

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 356 of 472 Option 11 commands

Option 11 commands

DFTD c ch Define the digital channel to receive subsequent messages

DISC Call disconnect
DLMP n For n=0, turn on lamp audit; for n=1, turn off lamp audit
DMTN Monitor input and output SSD messages for 1 to 6 TNs
DPRT card Print messages from this digital card
DPRT c ch Print messages from this digital channel
DRTD card Stop printing messages from this digital card
DRTD c ch Stop printing messages from this digital channel

IMSG Send input SSD messages from XPE to CPU

KALL Call setup without specifying timeslots

KALS Call set up specifying timeslots
KILL x Reset one or all TNs being monitored

P card Print all messages from the specified card

Pcu Print all messages from the specified unit

XMSG Send output SSD messages from CPU to XPE

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 77
Alphabetical list of commands Page 357 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ANWK (B) loop ts basic-1

Read/write network card memory. Access the specified network
card memory to read and print one word. The word format is:
<cb s c u x ln -->
Where: cb = continuity bit, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit,
x = multigroup bit and ln = link
You can write in new data. To change the values, rekey the
word after the dashes, substituting new values where
appropriate.

ANWS (C) loop ts basic-1

Read/write network card memory (short). Access the specified
network card memory (short form) to read and print one word.
The multigroup bit and continuity field are not used.
The word format is: <s c u ln -->
Where: s = shelf, c = card, u = unit and ln = link.
You can write in new data. To change the values, rekey the
word after the dashes, substituting new values where
appropriate.

ARPM loop 20 Prints contents of 32 timeslots in RPC associated with loop (20 basic-1
hexadecimal = 32 decimal).

ARPM loop ts b s c u basic-1

Get contents of timeslot ts, loop.
The system prints data in the form “bscu”, where b is the
current value of the bypass bit in the Remote Peripheral
Equipment Controller (RPC) memory (0 or 1) for that shelf, card
and unit.
The user can enter a new bypass bit for the RPC memory after
the dash.

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 358 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ARPS (F) loop ts basic-1

Read Remote Peripheral Switch memory.
Access the specified Remote Peripheral Switch (RPS) memory
to read and print one word.
The word format is: <cb s c u -->
Where: cb = continuity bit, s = shelf, c = card and u = unit.
You can write in new data. To change the values, rekey the
word after the dashes, substituting new values where
appropriate.

DENL loop Get the density of loop. basic-1

DFTD c ch Define the digital channel to receive subsequent messages.

(Option 11)

DFTM (T) s c u basic-1

Define unit to receive signaling messages.

DISC Call disconnect. Format is: xpe-15

DISC
TN1 lll s cc uu
TN2 lll s cc uu
This command disconnects the call specified by the TNs. A
scan of the connection memory is done prior to disconnecting
the call, if no timeslot can be found for the specified TN, nothing
is done. TN1 and TN2 are prompted by the program.

DLMP 0/1 Turn on/off lamp audit. Format is: xpe-15

• DLMP 0 = turn on lamp audit
• DLMP 1 = turn off lamp audit

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 77
Alphabetical list of commands Page 359 of 472

DMTN Monitor input and output SSD messages for 1 to 6 TNs. This xpe-15
command is used to monitor all SSD messages for the
specified TN. TN is automatically prompted by the program. Up
to 6 TNs can be monitored at the same time.
Enter the DLPM and DMTN commands as follows:
DLMP 2
DMTN
TNx lll s cc uu
Where: x = (1-6), TN index
The output format is: OSSD111 TN MSG TIME
Where:
• OSSD111 = header
• TN = packed TN
• MSG = SSD message content
• TIME = real time clock before output when work
scheduler gets the input message

DPRT c ch Print messages from this digital channel (Option 11). xpe-15

DPRT card Print messages from this digital card. (Option 11). xpe-15

DRTD c ch Stop printing messages from this digital channel. (Option 11). xpe-15

DRTD card Stop printing messages from this digital card (Option 11). xpe-15

DRTM (N) l s c u basic-1

Stop printing messages from the loop, shelf, card and unit. Only
loop and shelf numbers are required.

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 360 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

IMSG Send input SSD messages from PE to Meridian 1 CPU. This xpe-15
command is used to simulate incoming SSD message from the
peripheral equipment. The specified TN must be equipped.
Format is:
IMSG
TN lll s cc uu
NUMBER MESSAGES mm
# TIMES TO SEND hhh
MSG DATA xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx. . .

Where:
• mm = number of SSD messages (1-10) to be sent
• hhh = number of times (1-999) to simulate the SSD input
message
• xxxx = SSD message content. Number of message
contents depends on input of mm
TN, NUMBER MESSAGES, # TIMES TO SEND, and MSG DATA
are prompted by the program.

KALL Call set up without specifying timeslots. xpe-15

This command is used to set up a simple call (intra or
inter-group). The system finds an available timeslot for the
specified TNs. The specified TN must be equipped, enabled
and idle.
Format is:
KALL
TN1 lll s cc uu,
TN l s c u (Option 11)
Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards.
TN2 lll s cc uu,
TN l s c u (Option 11)
Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards.
TN1 and TN2 are automatically prompted by the program.

If AUDIT is running, call(s) are disconnected, and AUD17,

AUD18, AUD19, and/or AUD31, AUD32 is printed.
Call setup command simply finds the available timeslots and
sets up the connection memory and/or junctor memory.
BUG105, BUG330 may be printed if illegal sequences are
carried out.
These commands are designed for lab use only, and should be
used cautiously in a live switch.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 77
Alphabetical list of commands Page 361 of 472

KALS Call set up with specifying timeslots. xpe-15

This command will set up a call specified by the input TNs and
the timeslots if both TNs are equipped, enable and idle. The
specified timeslots will be used if they are idle, if the specified
timeslot are occupied, then the call will not be set up. See
Notes with the KALL command.

Format:
KALS
TN1 lll s cc uu,
TN l s c u, (Option 11)
Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards.
TN2 lll s cc uu,
TN l s c u, (Option 11)
Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards.
TIMESLOTS ts1 ts2

Where:
• ts1 = specified timeslot of the TN1
• ts2 = specified timeslot of the TN2
• TN1, TN2, and TIMESLOTS are prompted by the
program.

KILLx Reset one or all TN being monitored. Where: x = the TN index xpe-15
number (1-6) entered with the DMTN command. Enter 7 to
reset all the output monitored TNs.

N Stop print. basic-1

P Print all messages. basic-1

P card Print all messages from specified card. (Option 11) basic-15

Pcu Print all messages from specified unit. (Option 11) basic-15

P lll Print all messages from specified loop. Enter the exact number basic-1
of digits. Example: for loop 4, enter 004

P lll s Print all messages from specified shelf. Enter the exact number basic-1
of digits. Example: for loop 4, enter 004.

P lll s cc Print all messages from specified card. Enter the exact number basic-1
of digits. Example: for loop 4, enter 004.

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 362 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

PRTM (P) lll s cc uu basic-1

Print messages, as specified. Only loop and shelf numbers are
required. Enter the exact number of digits. (Example: for loop 4,
enter 004.)

WCTS loop Print the current unit scan of specified loop. Outputs shelf, card basic-1
and unit.

WMBY l s c u Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to BUSY. basic-1

WMUB l s c u Write the maintenance bit for the given unit to NOT BUSY. basic-1

XMII, XMIO Send input/output XMI messages between the CPU and xpe-15
superloops.
Send input/output XMI messages to the Peripheral Controller
(NT8D01) or Network card (NT8D04). Use XMII for input
messages from the Network card (NT8D04) to the CPU. Use
XMIO for messages from the CPU to the Network.
This command is used to simulate input/output XMI message. It
may not be useful in LD 77, a similar command is available in
resident debugger.

Format:
XMII or XMIO
LOOP lll
NUMBER MESSAGES m
# TIMES TO SEND hhh
MSG DATA
cccc xxxx xxxxxxxx
cccc xxxx xxxxxxxx
cccc xxxx xxxxxxxx

Where:
• lll = Loop number
• m = Number of multiple XMI messages (1-6)
• hhh = Number of times to send XMI messages (1-999)
• cccc = Control word; cccc is defined as follows:
r ss applic type
- | -- | ------ | ------- |

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 77
Alphabetical list of commands Page 363 of 472

Where:
• r = one bit msg ready flag, always sets to
• ss = two bit sequence status field. ss may be:
a B.00 : short message
b B.01 : starting a long message (message has 6 or
more words of data)
c B.10 : continue a long msg
d B.11 : end of a long msg

• applic = six bit value for msg's intended application.

appl may be:
a B.000001 : for LD 30
b B.000010 : for LD 32
c B.000011 : for LD 45
d B.000100 : for LD 77
e B.000101 : for XPE parameter download
f B.000110 : for XNET action request
• type = seven bit value of message type
• xxxx = message data
•
XMSG Send output SSD messages from Meridian 1 CPU to PE. xpe-15
This command is used to send output SSD message to the
peripheral equipment TN. The specified loop of the TN must be
enabled and responding.

Format:
XMSG
TN lll s cc uu,
TN l s c u, for Option 11 only
Loop 0 00 CH for Digital Trunk Cards.
NUMBER MESSAGES mm
# TIMES TO SEND hhh
MSG DATA xxxx xxxx xxxx. . . .

Where:
• mm = number of SSD messages to be sent (1-10)
• hhh = number of times to output SSD message (1-999)
• xxxx = SSD message content. Number of message
contents depends on the value of mm
• TN, NUMBER MESSAGES, # TIMES TO SEND, and MSG
DATA are prompted by the program.

X11 Maintenance
LD 77
Page 364 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

•
XRCL loop Read contents of RPC control register. basic-1

XRSH loop Read and print contents of SHEN register. basic-1

XRST loop Read and print contents of STATUS register. basic-1

XTLP loop Test local RPC processor for loop. basic-1

XTRP loop Test remote RPC processor for loop. basic-1

XWCS loop xxxx basic-1

Writes RPC control/SHEN register for loop with data xxxx in
hexadecimal format.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

382

LD 80 LD 80
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 365 of 472

LD 80: Call Trace

LD 80 provides a means of tracing a call by looking at a snap shot of the
transient data (such as call register contents) associated with the call. The
trace commands operate only when this Overlay is active. If LD 80 is aborted
(****), the trace functions stop. Note that when using the enhanced trace
commands, the Overlay will not automatically abort (according to the defined
time-out period) if calls are being traced.

When a system initialization occurs, all trace commands are removed, and the
trace operation is stopped.

For Network Call Trace see NCT messages.

X11 Release 19 and later include Enhanced Trace Commands. The enhanced
trace function requires Multi-User Login functionality (package 242) to be
enabled in LD 17. The enhanced commands are: DALL, DIST, ENTC,
ENTD, GOTR, FITR, and STPT. These commands interact with each other
only. They do not affect pre-Release 19 commands.

The enhanced trace commands can be disabled through a maintenance

telephone by dialing the following: nn + 9913 + x + yy

Where:

nn = customer SPRE access code

9913 = feature code to display for message display control
x = action code (0 to deactivate)
yy = message monitor code (02 for enhanced trace messages)
A second dial tone indicate that the command was successful. Overflow tone
is heard if the command is entered incorrectly. Once this command has been
entered, a user entering FITR from the TTY will receive the period (.) prompt.

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 366 of 472 Call Trace

Some loop-level commands are not valid on Option 11 systems, and have
been replaced with slot-level commands.

When to use LD 80
There are three basic commands:
— TRAT for tracing attendant consoles
— TRAC for tracing sets and trunks
— TRAD for tracing calls through Computer PBX Interface (CPI), Digital
Trunk Interface (DTI), Primary Rate Interface, or Digital Link Interface
(DLI) loops.

The TRAC command can be used to print the tone detector TN if a tone
detector is used at the time of the call trace.

Generic X11 enables the printing of auxiliary data related to a call. The
auxiliary data consists of information associated with the NARS/BARS/CDP
features, if equipped, and the Ring Again (RGA) feature. This additional data
can be retrieved by appending DEV to any of the TRAC commands.
Example: TRAC L S C U DEV

Note: BRI DNs can be traced with the TRAC C DN command. For
TRAC L S C U, enter U = DSL0 to DSL7 for Digital Subscriber Loops.

With X11 Release 23, when Music and Recorded Announcement Broadcast
trunks are traced, the following information is printed out:

— indication that the trunk is broadcasting

— the number of callers connected to the trunk
When a caller connected to a broadcasting trunk is traced, the existing trace
information is printed out as well as an indication that the trunk is
broadcasting.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Originating and terminating information Page 367 of 472

Originating and terminating information

The Call Trace originating and terminating party information depends on the
types of telephone, console or trunk as shown below.

Single line telephones:

ORIG l s c u cust dn 500

TERM l s c u cust dn 500
Multi-line telephones:

ORIG l s c u key# keytype cust dn settype

TERM l s c u key# keytype cust dn settype
Attendant consoles

ORIG l s c u cust att# lpk# ATTN consoletype

TERM l s c u cust att# lpk# ATTN consoletype
Trunks:

ORIG l s c u rtyp RMBR rrr mmm

TERM l s c u rtyp RMBR rrr mmm

Where:
l s c u = TN
consoletype = console type (ATT, 1250, 2250)
cust = customer number
dn = directory number
key# = multi-line telephone key number
keytype = multi-line telephone key type (SCR, MCR, HOT, etc.)
lpk# = console loop key number
rrr mm = trunk route and member number
rtyp = trunk route type (TIE, CO, FX, etc.)
settype = multi-line telephone type (SL1, 2008, 2317, etc.)

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 368 of 472 Originating and terminating information

Example 1
Trace a call placed to a 500-type set
Configuration: active call from key 0 on an M2008, to 500-type telephone
Customer number: 06
Originator:

telephone type: M2008

TN: 004 0 05 00
DN: 5100 on SCR key 0
Terminator:

telephone type: 500

TN: 008 0 03 06
DN: 2121
Trace command:

TRAC 4 0 5 0 (l s c u), or
TRAC 6 5100 (customer and DN)
Output:

ACTIVE TN 004 0 05 00
ORIG 04 0 0 05 00 6 SCR 0 5100 2008
TERM 008 0 03 06 6 2121 500
DIAL DN 2121
MAIN PM ESTD
TALKSLOT ORIG 22 TERM 22
QUEUE NONE

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Originating and terminating information Page 369 of 472

Example 2
Trace an outgoing ISDN call
Configuration: outgoing call from key 0 on an M2317, to 500-type telephone
Customer number: 05

Originator:

telephone type: M2317

TN: 016 0 02 00
DN: 6050 on SCR key 0
Terminator:

Dialed DN: 7873107

Outgoing PRI TIE trunk: loop 018 channel 16; route 24 member 12
Trace command:

TRAC 5 6050 (customer, DN), or

TRAC 16 0 2 0 (l s c u)
Output:

ACTIVE TN 016 0 02 00
ORIG 016 0 02 00 5 SCR 0 6050 2317
TERM 018 16 TIE RMBR 24 12
DIAL DN 7873107
MAIN PM ESTD
TALKSLOT ORIG 13 TERM 13
QUEUE NONE
---- ISDN PRA CALL (TERM) ----
CAL REF # = 16
BEARER CAP = VOICE
CALL STATE = 10 ACTIVE
CALLING NO = 4376050
CALLED NO = 7873107

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 370 of 472 Originating and terminating information

Example 3
Enhanced Trace command output
The enhanced call trace output includes a time stamp that appears on the first
line of the output.

The TN or digital trunk prints out only when there has been a change to the
call register. The TN or trunk is printed only once.

Sample output:

.14:00:02 12/25/1992

KEY 0 MCR MARP ACTIVE TN 001 0 02 01

ORIG 001 02 01 0 SCR MARP 1 5011 SL1

TERM 001 0 02 00 0 MCR MARP 1 5006 SL1

DIAL DN 5006

MAIN_PM ESTD

TALKSLOT ORIG 19 TERM 21

QUEU NONE

KEY 1 TRN IDLE

KEY 2 AO3 IDLE

.
.
.

KEY 8 RND

KEY 9 RLS

.14:00:04 12/25/1992

IDLE TN 015 04

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs Page 371 of 472

Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

This section provides definitions of the data output by the various call trace
commands.

With X11 Release 19 and later, a time stamp is added to Call Trace output.
The following information is added below the time stamp as necessary.

— A digital telephone with no active call register shows:

IDLE TN l s c u
— A locked out telephone or digital trunk shows:
LOCKOUT TN l s c u (or l ch)
— A disabled telephone or digital trunk shows:
DSBL TN l s c u (or l ch)
— A telephone or digital trunk that is in maintenance busy state shows:
MSBY TN l s c u (or l ch)
MSBY TN l s c u (or l ch) MARP shows if the TN is a MARP TN

1 ACTIVE — the call/key is active

2 AUX_NARS — Network Automatic Route Selection (NARS) data to
follow
3 AUX_PM — auxiliary progress mark may be any of the following
depending on the MAIN_PM:
a ABSORBING = performing digit manipulation on the call
b AWAIT ANI = waiting for Automatic Number Identification
information
c AWAITREPLY = CPU is waiting for a response during a dial
sequence
d BSYG = busy tone to originator
e CDR-CALLRECORD = CPU is outputting a CDR record
f CDR-TIMING = CPU is computing a CDR record
g COMPLETE = dialing is complete
h DNTRANS = DN translation to TN in progress
i FAREND-OFF = ?

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 372 of 472 Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

j NARS = call is a network call

k NOOUTPULS = outpulsing complete, originator receiving ringback
l OUTPULSING = outpulsing digits related to the call
m OVLF = resources not available, returning overflow to originator
n PAUSING = timed pause in a trunk call dialing sequence
o SPEEDCALL = performing speed call
p TEMPPATH = software timing, occurs when outpulsing digits on
trunks
q TOLLCHECK = checking access restrictions for the call
r USCR = User Selectable Call Redirection programming, receiving
dial tone
s USCR_DIAL = USCR programming

4 AUX_RGAT_PM — Ring Again over trunk information

5 BEARER CAP — bearer capability, such as voice, 64K clear, 64K
restricted and 56K
6 BUSY — unit or DN is busy
7 CALL REF # — PRI call reference number assigned by the system
8 CALL STATE — specifies the PRI call as active or inactive
9 CALLED NO — PRI dialed number
10 CALLING N0 — PRI home location code and DN of originating party
11 CONF — conference call

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs Page 373 of 472

12 COS_ORIG, COS_TERM — class of service restrictions for originating

and terminating party. Possible values are:
a UNR = Unrestricted
b TLD = Toll Denied
c SRE = Semi-restricted
d FRE = Fully Restricted
e FR1 = Fully Restricted class 1
f FR2 = Fully Restricted class 2
g CUN = Conditionally Unrestricted
h CTD = Conditionally Toll Denied

13 CSD — Confree Selectable Display Key

14 DARK_CONSOLE — the call is being temporarily released by a
console. Also outputs three types of recall:
a RLSED = console released the call is getting recall
b FLASH = Flash recall
c CAMP = Camp-On recall

15 DIAL DN— the dialed number

16 DIAL xxx yy TTR zz — TDS on loop xxx and timeslot yy connected to
Digitone Receiver timeslot zz
17 DG_MAN xxx FCA_INDEX xxx TOD x — Digit Manipulation Index,
Free Area Screening and Time Of Day value
18 DIRECT MW_CALL — Message Waiting indication is being given
19 DSBL — the unit has been disabled
20 DST — console destination information to follow
21 EMR100 — ACD emergency conference
22 EXP_ROUTE — identifies if an expensive route is being used for an
ESN call
23 IDLE — TN or key is idle

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 374 of 472 Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs

24 HLD — number of calls On-Hold at the console

25 HOLD — call is On-Hold
26 LOCKOUT — the unit is in lockout state
27 LOOP — attendant console LPK key
28 MAIN_PM — this is the main progress mark which identifies the state
of the call, possible values are listed below: (See also AUX_PM)
a BUSY = originator is receiving busy tone
b CDR = CPU is processing Call Detail Recording records
c DELAY DIAL = CPU is in a timing sequence while establishing a
delay dial start trunk call
d DIAL = one or more digits have been dialed, system requires more
digits
e ESTD = call is established between the originating and terminating
party
f HALFDISC = Trunk with answer supervision has not received a
disconnect signal from the far-end during trunk idling
g READY = CPU is ready to process a function for the originating TN
h REOR = originator is receiving intercept treatment
i RING = originator is receiving ringback tone
j WAIT = dial tone waiting queue
k WINKON = CPU is in a timing sequence while establishing a wink
start trunk call
29 MARP — indicates the TN is Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
30 MBSY — unit is in maintenance busy state
31 NARS_PM — NARS call progress mark
32 NEW_RLIST_INDEX NWQ_RLIST_ENTRY — network queue route
list index and route list entry
33 NCOS_ORIG, NCOS_TERM — Network Class of Service for
originating and terminating party

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Alphabetical list of Call Trace outputs Page 375 of 472

34 OHQ/CBQ — call is in the Off-Hook queue or Callback queue

35 OSN — On-Site Notification key
36 PRIOITY NWQ_EXT_ROUTE — the priority in the queue and
extended route queuing
37 PTY SLOT — TDS priority timeslot; reserved by the CPU while a user
is receiving tones (this timeslot may be required by the CPU to further
process the call). Normally PTY SLOT is the same timeslot as SLOT.
38 QUEU — a call may be in one of the following CPU timing queues:
128 = 128 ms timing queue
2S = 2 second timing queue
CAD = cadence
CDR = Call Detail Recording processing queue
DIAL = dialing queue
IDLE = idle queue
NONE = call is not in a timing queue
RING = ringing queue
39 RCVR xx SET yy — timeslot to the Digitone Receiver (xx) and the
telephone (yy)
40 RGAT_PM — Ring Again progress mark
41 RL_IND xx RL_ENT xx — NARS/BARS route list index and entry
number
42 SRC — console source information to follow
43 SBSY — unit is software busy
44 SLOT — the timeslot used by the originator and terminator
45 TALKSLOT — identifies the timeslot and junctor (if applicable) used by
the originator and terminator
46 TDTN — Tone Digit Switch loop and timeslot
47 TERM — originating party information, identifies the TN or DN where
the call terminates, output depends on type of telephone or console

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 376 of 472 Basic commands

48 TGAR_ORIG, TGAR_TERM — Trunk Group Access Restriction for

originating and terminating party
49 TTR = Digitone Receiver TN

Basic commands

DALL Disable all enhanced trace commands.

DIST n Disable the enhanced trace operation.

ENTC l s c u t Enable the enhanced trace command for a TN.

ENTD l ch t Enable the enhanced trace command for a digital trunk.

FITR Get information about the enhanced trace function.

GOTR Begin enhanced trace commands. This command starts the trace
operation specified with the ENTC and ENTD commands.

STPT Stop the enhanced trace command.

TRAC c acod List route number, type and status of each trunk for customer c
TRAC c dn Trace calls for customer c Directory Number or Local Steering Code dn
TRAC c r m Trace calls, customer c, route r, member m

TRAC l s c DSLx Trace calls on Digital Subscriber Loop x (0-7)

TRAC l s c u Trace calls associated with this unit
TRAC l s c u k Trace calls associated with key k on specified unit

TRAC x yyyy Trace using customer number as DN

TRAC xx...xx DEV Print auxiliary data
TRAC zzzz Trace using TN of the set to be traced

TRAD loop ch Trace DTI or DLI calls, channel ch of loop

TRAT c a Trace calls, attendant a of customer c

TRAT c a k Trace calls associated with key k of attendant console a for customer c

TRAT l s c u Trace attendant calls, this unit

TRAT l s c u k Trace attendant calls on key k
TRAT xx...xx DEV Print auxiliary data

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Option 11 commands Page 377 of 472

Option 11 commands
On an Option 11 system, some loop-level commands are replaced with
slot-level commands. Valid commands for these systems are shown here:
TRAC c acod List route number, type and status of each trunk under customer c
TRAC c dn Trace calls for customer c Directory Number or Local Steering Code dn
TRAC c r m Trace calls for customer c, route r, member m
TRAD c ch Trace digital calls, channel ch of card c
TRAD loop ch Trace DTI calls, channel ch of loop
TRAK c u Trace calls associated with this unit
TRAK c u k Trace calls associated with key k on the specified unit
TRAO c u Trace attendant calls, this unit
TRAO c u k Trace attendant calls on key k of unit
TRAO xx...xx DEV Print auxiliary data
TRAT c a Trace calls for attendant a of customer c
TRAT c a k Trace calls associated with key k of attendant console a for customer c

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 378 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

DALL Disable all enhanced trace commands. basic-19

This command disables all trace commands enabled with
ENTC or ENTD command. You must stop the trace with the
STPT command before disabling all the commands with DALL.

DIST n Disable the enhanced trace operation. basic-19

This command disables the trace command enabled with
ENTC or ENTD command. This command is used once a trace
command is started then stopped.
Where: n = the entry number (as seen with the FITR command)

ENTC l s c u t Enable the enhanced trace command for a TN. basic-19

This command enables the trace capability for the TN specified.
Note that this command does not start the trace immediately.
Use the GOTR command to begin the trace operation.
Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit and t = the length of
time the trace command operates.
The format for the trace command duration (t) is HHMM, where
HH = hours (0-23)and MM = minutes (0-59). For example, for a
duration of 5 minutes, t = 0005; for 1 hour, t = 0100
The time duration must be at least 1 minute, and no more than
23 hours.

ENTD l ch t Enable the enhanced trace command for a digital trunk. basic-19
This command enables the trace capability for the TN specified.
Note that this command does not start the trace immediately.
Use the GOTR command to begin the trace operation.
Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit and t = the length of
time the trace command operates.
The format for the trace command duration (t) is HHMM, where
HH = hours (0-23)and MM = minutes (0-59). For example, for a
duration of 5 minutes, t = 0005; for 1 hour, t = 0100. The time
duration must be at least 1 minute, and no more than 23 hours.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Alphabetical list of commands Page 379 of 472

FITR Get information about the enhanced trace function. This basic-19
command queries the TNs or Digital trunks being traced with
the ENTC and ENTD commands.
The output is shown as follows:
ENTRY TN or TRUNK TIME STATUS
For example:
1 01 0 01 01 0030 OFF
2 015 04 1200 OFF

GOTR Begin enhanced trace commands. This command starts the basic-19
trace operation specified with the ENTC and ENTD commands.

STPT Stop the enhanced trace command. basic-19

This command stops the enhanced trace operation specified
with the ENTC and ENTD commands. This can be used at any
time during the trace operation. This does not disable the
commands; they can be restarted with the GOTR command.
When they are restarted, the duration timer is reset.
For example: the timer is set at 30 minutes, but the trace is
stopped after 2 minutes. When the trace is restarted (GOTR)
the timer is set to 30 minutes.

TRAC c acod List route number, type and status of each trunk for customer c. basic-1

TRAC c dn Trace calls for customer c Directory Number or Local Steering basic-1
Code dn.

TRAC c dn Trace calls, this dn of customer c. basic-1

TRAC c r m Trace calls, customer c, route r, member m. basic-1

TRAC l s c DSLx bri-18

Trace calls on Digital Subscriber Loop x (0-7).

TRAC l s c u Trace calls associated with this unit. If a trace is performed on a basic-1
DTR, an error message is output.

TRAC l s c u k Trace call associated with key k on specified unit. basic-1

TRAC x yyyy Trace using customer number as DN. nxcc-22

Where : x = customer number of the set to be traced and
yyyy = DN of the key to be traced.

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 380 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

TRAC xx...xx DEV nxcc-22

Print the auxiliary data related to the call for Network Alternate
Route Selection (NARS), Basic Alternate Route Selection
(BARS), Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) or Ring Again (RGA),
where equipped, as well as the normal data for command
xx...xx. Command xx...xx can be any of the TRAC commands.
When TYP E is output, E = extended route (not expensive).

TRAC zzzz Trace using TN of the set to be traced. nxcc-22

Where : zzzz = TN of the set to be traced.

TRAD loop ch Trace DTI or DLI calls, channel ch of specified loop. basic-1

TRAD c ch Trace digital calls, channel ch of card c. (Option 11)

TRAK c u Trace calls associated with this unit. (Option 11) basic-1

TRAK c u k Trace calls associated with key k on the specified unit. (Option basic-1
11)

TRAO c u Trace attendant calls, this unit. (Option 11) basic-1

TRAO c u k Trace attendant calls on key k of unit. (Option 11) basic-1

TRAO xx...xx DEV basic-1

Print auxiliary data. (Option 11)

TRAT c a Trace calls for customer c, attendant a. basic-1

TRAT c a k Trace calls associated with key k of attendant console a for basic-1
customer c.

TRAT l s c u Trace attendant calls, this unit. basic-1

TRAT l s c u k Trace attendant calls on key k. basic-1

TRAT xx...xx DEV basic-1

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 80
Alphabetical list of commands Page 381 of 472

Print auxiliary data.

Print the auxiliary data related to the call for Network Alternate
Route Selection (NARS), Basic Alternate Route Selection
(BARS), Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) or Ring Again (RGA),
where equipped, as well as the normal data for command
xx...xx. Command xx...xx can be one of the TRAT commands.

X11 Maintenance
LD 80
Page 382 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

386

LD 92 LD 92
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 383 of 472

LD 92: Automatic Trunk Maintenance

The Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) program tests TIE, CSA, WATS,
FEX, DID, and COT trunk routes automatically each day at times scheduled
in the ATM schedule block. This program also allows the manual testing of
trunks.

Some loop-level commands are not valid on Option 11 systems, and have
been replaced with card-level commands.

The ATMC command is not supported for 2.0 Mb/s DTI due to the absence
of tone detectors for Option 11 in IPE.

X11 Maintenance
LD 92
Page 384 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands
On Option 11 systems, some loop-level commands are replaced with
card-level commands.
ATMC l ch Test DTI channel ch on loop
ATMC l ch l ch Test specified DTI channel, with reference trunk

ATMR c r Test customer c route r

ATMR c r m Test customer c route r with reference trunk member m
ATMU c u Test specified unit. (Option 11)
ATMU c u c u Test specified unit, with reference trunk. (Option 11)

ATMU l s c u Test specified unit

ATMU l s c u l s c u Test specified unit, with reference trunk

CLRR c r Clear “ring no answer” count on route r for customer c

CLRU c u Clear “ring no answer” count on specified trunk unit. (Option 11)
CLRU l s c u Clear “ring no answer” count on specified trunk unit
CMAJ Clear major alarm and reset power fail transfer

END Terminate test in progress

PRTR c r Get “ring no answer” count for all members on route r for customer c.
PRTU c u Get “ring no answer” count on specified unit. (Option 11)
PRTU l s c u Get “ring no answer” count on specified unit.

PSCD l ch Print the current value of the SPC Calls to the Data Interface Counter

RSCD l ch (n) Restart the Semi Permanent Connections (SPC) calls to Data Interface
counter
SSCD l ch Stop the SPC calls to Data Interface to be performed

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 92
Alphabetical list of commands Page 385 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ATMC l ch Test DTI channel ch on loop. atm-7

ATMC l ch l ch Test the specified DTI channel (loop and channel of the first atm-7
field) with the reference trunk (loop and channel of the second
field).

ATMR c r Test route r of customer c. Accepts ADM Route numbers in atm-7

release 12 and later. When an ADM Route is entered, member
numbers cannot be entered.

ATMR c r m Test route r of customer c with reference trunk member m. atm-7

ATMU c u Test specified unit. (Option 11) atm-15

ATMU c u c u Test specified unit, with reference trunk. (Option 11) atm-15

ATMU l s c u Test specified unit. If the unit specified is an ADM trunk unit, no atm-7
reference information can be entered.

ATMU l s c u l s c u atm-7
Test the specified unit (l s c u of the first field) using the
reference trunk (l s c u of the second field). If the unit specified
is an ADM trunk unit, no reference information (l s c u) can be
entered.

CLRR c r Clear “ring no answer” count on route r for customer c. atm-7

Clears the “ring no answer” count for every trunk member in
the ADM Route specified.

CLRU c u Clear “ring no answer” count on specified trunk unit. atm-15

(Option 11)

CLRU l s c u Clear “ring no answer” count on specified trunk unit. atm-7

CMAJ Clear major alarm, reset power fail transfer and clear power atm-7
fault alarm.

END Terminate test in progress. This command can be entered at atm-7

any time.

X11 Maintenance
LD 92
Page 386 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

PRTR c r Get “ring no answer” count for all members on route r for atm-7
customer c.

PRTU c u Get “ring no answer” count on specified unit. (Option 11) atm-15

PRTU l s c u Get “ring no answer” count on specified unit. atm-7

PSCD l ch Print the current value of the SPC Calls to the Data Interface ispc-22
Counter.

RSCD l ch (n) Restart the Semi Permanent Connections (SPC) calls to Data ispc-22
Interface counter
Where: l = Phantom loop of an SPC link and ch = Phantom TN
of an SPC link.
The RSCD command resets the current counter used to
identify the number of calls performed by the system to the
Data Interface when an SPC link is configured to convey
D-channel signaling and the SPC link is identified as being the
SLAVE side.
The optional parameter (n) is used to identify the maximum
number of calls to the Data Interface before the process
automatically stops. When no value has been provided to the
parameter (n), up to 40 calls to the Data Interface are
performed before this process is automatically stopped.
When the value provided to the parameter (n) is zero, it has to
stop the process which automatically calls the associated Data
Interface.

SSCD l ch Stop the SPC calls to Data Interface to be performed. ispc-22

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

420

LD 96 LD 96
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 387 of 472

LD 96: D-channel Diagnostic

LD 96 is used to test and maintain D-channel links and the QPC757 or
NT6D11AB D-channel Interface (DCHI) card.

In Release 18, D-channels can also reside on Multi-purpose Serial Data Link
(MSDL) cards. A new set of LD 96 commands are provided to support MSDL
cards. The MSDL commands listed in LD 48 can also be used in LD 96.

Note: In Release 18, all commands accept “DCH” instead of “DCHI.”

For example, use ENL DCH x rather than ENL DCHI x.

Monitoring
D-channel message monitoring is used to analyze the Layer 3 protocol
messages traveling between the near and far-end D-channels.

Up to and including Release 16, message monitoring can be performed only

on a per D-channel basis using LD 96. That is, once the message monitor is
turned on, all messages are output for that D-channel. The messages output
might be excessive.

Release 17 provides additional commands in LD 96 that allows selective

message monitoring based on

— the D-channel
— the B- or ISL channel
— the message types for a specific feature
— any specific message

The following sections describe the various command formats.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 388 of 472 D-channel Diagnostic

Note 1: During high traffic some of the monitored messages may be lost.

Note 2: For the D-channel monitor messages to be displayed, the

system terminal must have USER defined as MTC in LD 17 (Release 17
and later).

D-channels
All message types, features and channels associated with a particular
D-channel can be monitored. Up to and including Release 16, only one
D-channel can be monitored for outgoing messages and one for incoming
messages. Release 17 and later allows the monitoring of multiple D-channels
for both incoming and outgoing messages.

The LD 96 commands to enable or disable monitoring of all incoming or

outgoing messages on a D-channel are:

ENL MSGI x—enable monitoring of incoming messages

ENL MSGO x—enable monitoring of outgoing messages
DIS MSGI x—disable monitoring of incoming messages
DIS MSGO x—disable monitoring of outgoing messages
Where x is the DCHI or MSDL port address (I/O address). For example, to
enable monitoring of incoming messages on D-channel 5, enter:

ENL MSGI 5
The output includes all messages, features and channels for D-channel 5.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
D-channel Diagnostic Page 389 of 472

B-channels and ISL channels

You can monitor up to 5 ISL or B-channels, for each direction. If there is no
specific channel selected, all channels are monitored. The commands follow:

For B-channels on all systems except Option 11:

ENL MSGI x CH loop channel

ENL MSGO x CH loop channel
DIS MSGI x CH loop channel
DIS MSGO x CH loop channel
For B-channels on Option 11 systems:

ENL MSGI x CH card channel

ENL MSGO x CH card channel
DIS MSGI x CH card channel
DIS MSGO x CH card channel
For ISL channels on all systems except Option 11:

ENL MSGI x CH l s c u
ENL MSGO x CH l s c u
DIS MSGI x CH l s c u
DIS MSGO x CH l s c u
For ISL channels on Option 11 systems:
ENL MSGI x CH c u
ENL MSGO x CH c u
DIS MSGI x CH c u
DIS MSGO x CH c u
Where:

ENL = enable monitoring

DIS = disable monitoring
MSGI = incoming messages
MSGO = outgoing messages

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 390 of 472 D-channel Diagnostic

ISDN features
You can select specific ISDN applications, such as Network Ring Again, for
message monitoring. Only one or all ISDN applications can be monitored per
D-channel at one time. The LD 96 commands are listed below, where x is the
D-channel (DCHI or MSDL) port number.

ENL MSGI x FEAT feature

ENL MSGO x FEAT feature
DIS MSGI x FEAT feature
DIS MSGO x FEAT feature
Where “feature” can be:

NCT = Network Call Trace

NRAG = Netw\ork Ring Again
NACD = Network Automatic Call Distribution
TRO = Trunk Optimization
NMS = Network Message Services
OHQ = Offhook Queuing
RCFW = Network Remote Call Forward
NRPA = Network Radio Paging
NITC = Network Intercom
TAT = Trunk Anti-Tromboning

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
D-channel Diagnostic Page 391 of 472

Message types
You can select specific types of messages to be monitored on a D-channel.
The LD 96 commands are listed below, where x is the D-channel (DCHI or
MSDL) port number.
ENL MSGI x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3
ENL MSGO x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3
DIS MSGI x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3
DIS MSGO x MSG msg1 msg2 msg3
Up to three message types (msg1, msg2, msg3) can be entered per command.
The default is “ALL”, which is all message types except SVC and SVCA. The
message types are:
1 ALER = alerting
2 ALL = all primitives and all messages except SVC and SVCA
3 CAPR = call proceeding
4 CON = connect
5 CONA = connect ack
6 DISC = disconnect
7 FAC = facility
8 FACA = facility ack
9 FACR = facility reject
10 INFO = information
11 NOTF = notify
12 PRIM = all primitives (such as release indication)
13 PROC = call proceeding
14 PROG = progress
15 RLS = release
16 RLSC = release complete
17 RST = restart
18 RSTA = restart ack

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 392 of 472 D-channel Diagnostic

19 STAT = status
20 STEN = status enquiry
21 STP = setup
22 STPA = setup ack
23 SVC = service
24 SVCA = service ack
25 UI = user information

Setting output format levels

There are three levels (0-2) of message decoding. The level determines the
format of the data output to the system terminal. To set the output level enter
the following.

SET MSGI x MON (0)-2

SET MSGO x MON (0)-2
Level 0 outputs the message as shown below.

DCH x y MSG msgtype REF xxxxxxx CH zzzz TOD hh:mm:ss <more data>

Where:

x = D-channel number
y = “I” for incoming messages, “O” for outgoing messages
xxxxxxxx = the call reference number
zzzz = the loop and channel number (or TN for ISL channels)
<more data> = additional lines of information, such as:

1 CALLED # = called number

2 CALLING # = calling number of originator
3 CAUSE = reason for action taken (e.g, unassigned number)
4 CONNECT # = connected number
5 FEAT = feature (such as Network Ring Again)
6 NUM PLAN = Numbering plan used (such as private)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
D-channel Diagnostic Page 393 of 472

7 PROGRESS = call progress description

8 REDIR REASON = reason the call was re-directed
9 REDN # = call redirection number
10 STATE = call state
11 STATUS = channel status
12 TYPE = type of channel

Level 1 outputs the raw data (as was done in X11 Release 16).

The format is:

DCH x y MSG msgtype REF xxxxxxxx TN zzzzzz CH# x CK x

<more data in hexadecimal>

Level 2 output identifies the individual Information Elements (IE) in the

messages and their hexadecimal values. The possible IEs are:

1 BCAP = bearer capability

2 CAST = call state
3 CHGA = charge advice
4 CHID = channel ID
5 CHST = change status
6 CLED = called number
7 CLES = called party subaddress
8 CLNG = calling number
9 CLNS = calling party subaddress
10 CNS5 = codeset 5 connected number subaddress
11 CON# = connect number
12 CON5 = codeset 5 connected number
13 CSE = cause
14 DES6 = codeset 6 Destination IE

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 394 of 472 D-channel Diagnostic

15 DISP = display
16 FAC = facility IE for codeset 0
17 FAC6 = codeset 6 facility IE
18 FIND = feature Indication
19 HLYR = higher layer compatibility
20 INFO = information request
21 KYPD = keypad
22 LLYR = low layer compatibility
23 LS5 = locking Shift to codeset 5
24 LS6 = locking shift to codeset 6
25 LS7 = locking Shift to codeset 7
26 NLS5 = codeset 5 non-locking shift
27 NLS6 = codeset 6 non-locking shift
28 NLSO = non-locking shift to codeset 0
29 NOTI = notify indicator
30 NSF = network specific facility
31 ORG# = originating called number
32 ORG6 = codeset 6 Originating IE
33 PROG = progress indicator
34 RDG6 = codeset 6 redirecting number
35 REDG = redirecting number
36 REDN = redirection number
37 RETR = codeset 6 reason for return
38 RSTI = restart indicator
39 SHFT = shift
40 SIGN = signal
41 TACG = codeset 6 TTC advice charge

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
D-channel Diagnostic Page 395 of 472

42 TNS = transit network selection

43 UNKN = unknown
44 UUI = user-user information

Deactivate monitor from a maintenance telephone

Once the system has been tied up or flooded with the monitored messages, it
is very difficult, if not impossible, to use LD 96 to disable the monitors. In
this case, a maintenance telephone with MTA Class of Service can be used to
deactivate the monitor.

To activate or deactivate the monitor from a maintenance telephone, simply

dial: SPRE 9913 x 01

Where:

SPRE = special function access code (defined in LD 15)

9913 = feature code to activate or deactivate the monitor
x = 0 to deactivate, 1 to activate
01 = DCH monitor ID
Note 1: Dial tone is provided if successful.

Note 2: Use “RST MON” to reactivate the monitor from LD 96.

Note 3: Deactivating the monitor by the maintenance telephone does

not disable the monitor, but simply halts the output. If the monitor is
deactivated and not disabled using the DIS MSGI and DIS MSGO
commands, then the monitor becomes re-activated after a datadump and
sysload.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 396 of 472 D-channel Diagnostic

Get monitor status

To determine the current status of the D-channel monitor, enter the following
command, where x is the D-channel (DCHI or MSDL) port number.

STAT MON x
Output format:

***DCH MSGI x LEVEL y ACTV (where, y = format level)

MSG - msg1 msg2. . .
FEAT - feat
CH - loop channel (or l s c u for ISL)
***DCH MSGO x LEVEL y ACTV
MSG - msg1 msg2. . .
FEAT - feat
CH - loop channel (or l s c u for ISL)
If the monitor had been deactivated by the maintenance telephone, INACTV
is output instead of ACTV.

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL)

The MSDL provides 4 ports for ISDN Primary Rate D-channel (DCH) and
Application Module Link (AML).

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number
(defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17).

DIS MSDL x (ALL)—Disable MSDL device

ENL MSDL x (FDL, ALL)—Enable MSDL device
RST MSDL x—Reset MSDL device
STAT MSDL (x) (FULL)—Get MSDL status
SLFT MSDL x—Execute a self-test on MSDL device x
These commands are also provided in Input/Output Diagnostic (LD 37) and
Link Diagnostic (LD 48).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
D-channel commands (pre-Release 18) Page 397 of 472

D-channel commands (pre-Release 18)

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and get the status
of a D-channel. Refer to the LD 96 introduction for details on the use of these
commands.

In X11 Release 18 all commands now accept "DCH" instead of "DCHI." For
example: use "ENL DCH x" instead of "ENL DCHI x." The STAT DCH and
STAT DCHI commands have been combined to STAT DCH.

DIS AUTO x Disable automatic recovery for DCH x

DIS DCHI x Disable DCHI x

DIS MSGI x Disable the monitoring of all incoming messages from D-channel x
DIS MSGI x (options) Disable the monitoring of incoming messages from D-channel x for
the selected options (Release 17)

DIS MSGO x Disable the monitoring of all outgoing messages from D-channel x
DIS MSGO x (options) Disable the monitoring of outgoing messages for D-channel x for the
selected options (Release 17)

DIS SERV x Disable service messages on D-channel x

DIS SSM x y Disable Supplementary Service Monitor for feature y on D-channel x

DWNL DCHI x (t) Down load layer 3 message configuration table t and LAPD
parameters from DCHI x

ENL AUTO x Enable automatic recovery for DCH x

ENL DCHI x Enable DCHI port x

ENL MSGI x Enable the monitoring of all incoming messages from D-channel x
(Release 16 and earlier)
ENL MSGI x (options) Enable the monitoring of incoming messages from D-channel x for
the selected options (Release 17)

ENL MSGO x Enable the monitoring of all outgoing messages for D-channel x
(Release 16 and earlier)
ENL MSGO x (options) Enable the monitoring of outgoing messages for D-channel x for the
selected options (Release 17)

ENL SERV x Enable service messages on D-channel x

ENL SSM x y Enable Supplementary Service Monitor for feature y on D-channel x
EST DCH x Establish multiple frame operation on D-channel x

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 398 of 472 D-channel commands (pre-Release 18)

PLOG DCHI x Get D-channel statistics log for DCHI x (Print protocol error log on
DCH x)
PTAB DCHI x (t) Display layer 3 message configuration table t and LAPD parameters
from DCHI x

RLS DCH x Release D-channel x

RST DCH x Reset D-channel x, inhibit signaling
RST MON Reset or reactivate monitoring on D-channels with enabled monitors

SDCH DCH x Switch to the standby D-channel x

SET MSGI x MON (0)-2 Set monitor output format level for incoming messages on D-channel
x
SET MSGO x MON (0)-2 Set monitor output format level for outgoing messages on D-channel
x

STAT DCH (x) Get status of D-channel x or all D-channels if x not specified
STAT DCHI (x) Get status of DCHI port x or all DCHI ports if x not specified
STAT MON (x) Display the incoming and outgoing monitoring status of D-channel x
or all D-channels if x not specified.
STAT SERV (X) Get status of service messages on D-channel x or all D-channels if x
not specified

TEST 100 x Perform interrupt generation test on DCHI x

TEST 101 x Perform loop back mode test on DCHI x
TEST 200 x Perform interrupt handler test on DCHI x (not supported on
Option 11)
TEST 201 x Test interrupt handler-to-link interface path (not supported on
Option 11)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
D-channel commands (Release 18 & later) Page 399 of 472

D-channel commands (Release 18 & later)

The following commands are used to enable, disable, test and get the status
of a D-channel. Refer to the LD 96 introduction for details on the use of these
commands.

Note: In X11 Release 18 and later, all commands now accept “DCH”
instead of “DCHI.” For example: use “ENL DCH x” instead of “ENL
DCHI x.” The STAT DCH and STAT DCHI commands have been
combined to STAT DCH.

DIS AUTO x Disable automatic recovery for DCH x

DIS DCH x Disable DCH x
DIS MSGI x (options) Disable the monitoring of incoming messages on D-channel x
DIS MSGI x FEAT CPNW Disable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.
DIS MSGO x (options) Disable the monitoring of outgoing messages on D-channel x
DIS MSGO x FEAT CPNW Disable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.
DIS SERV x Disable service messages on D-channel x
DIS TMDI x (ALL) Disable TMDI card x
DLIF DCH x Force download of D channel x (For PRI UIPE application)

ENL AUTO x Enable automatic recovery for DCH x

ENL DCH x (FDL) Enable DCH x and attempt to establish the link, and force
download to MSDL
ENL MSGI x (options) Enable the monitoring of incoming messages on D-channel x
ENL MSGI x FEAT CPNW Enable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.
ENL MSGO x (options) Enable the monitoring of outgoing messages on D-channel x
ENL MSGO x FEAT CPNW Enable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.
ENL SERV x Enable service messages on D-channel x
ENL TMDI x Enable TMDI card number x
ENL TMDI x (FDL, ALL) Enable TMDI Card number x and force a download
EST DCH x Establish multiple frame operation on D-channel x
EST ISPC l ch (N) Start the data interface establishment process at the ISPC slave
side an ISPC link (where “N” = the “number of tries” counter)

FDIS NCAL <DCH#> <conn_ID>

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection

PLOG DCH x Print protocol error log on DCH x

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 400 of 472 D-channel commands (Release 18 & later)

RLS DCH x Release D-channel x

RLS ISPC l ch Stop the data interface establishment process
RST DCH x Reset D-channel x, inhibit signaling
RST MON Reset or reactivate monitoring on D-channels with enabled
monitors
RST TMDI x Reset TMDI card x

SDCH DCH x Switch to the standby D-channel x

SET MSGI x MON (0)-2 Set monitor output format level for incoming messages on
D-channel x
SET MSGO x MON (0)-2 Set monitor output format level for outgoing messages on
D-channel x

SLFT TMDI x Invoke self test x

STAT DCH (x) Get status of one or all D-channels

STAT ISPC l ch Get status of data interface establishment process at ISPC slave
side ISPC link which has been configured to convey D-channel
signaling

STAT NCAL <DCH#> List all current call-independent connections on a given

PRI D-channel.
STAT NCAL <DCH#> <conn_ID>
List information pertaining to a specific call-independent
connection

STAT MON (x) Display the incoming and outgoing monitoring status of one or all
D-channels.
STAT SERV (x) Get the enable/disable status of services messages for one or all
D-channels
STAT TMDI (x FULL) Get TMDI status x

TEST 100 x Perform interrupt generation test on DCH x

TEST 101 x Perform loop back mode test on DCH x
TEST 200 x Perform interrupt handler test on DCH x (not supported on
Option 11)
TEST 201 x Test interrupt handler-to-link interface path (not supported on
Option 11)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands Page 401 of 472

Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) commands

The MSDL commands are listed below, x is the MSDL device number
(defined by prompt DNUM in LD 17). These commands are also provided in
Input/Output Diagnostic (LD 37) and Link Diagnostic (LD 48).
DIS MSDL x (ALL) Disable MSDL device x

ENL MSDL x (ALL, FDL) Enable MSDL device x

RST MSDL x Reset MSDL device x

SLFT MSDL x Invoke self-test for MSDL device x

STAT MSDL (x [FULL]) Get MSDL status

Note: See “Alphabetical List of commands” in LD 48 for a complete

description of these commands.

Multipurpose Serial Data Link D-channel commands

The following commands are only available for D-channels on an MSDL
port.
DIS LLB x Disable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x
DIS RLB x Disable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x
DIS TEST x Disable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x
DLIF DCH xx FDL Force download a PRI interface table.

ENL LLB x Enable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x

ENL RLB x Enable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x
ENL TEST x Enable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x

MAP DCH x Get physical address and switch settings for D-channels

PCON DCH x Print configuration parameters on MSDL DCH x

PMES DCH x Print incoming layer 3 messages on MSDL DCH x
PTRF DCH x Print traffic report on MSDL DCH x
PTRF DCH x Print traffic report on MSDL DCH x

TEST LLB x Start local loop back test on MSDL DCH x

TEST RLB x Start remote loop back test on MSDL DCH x

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 402 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

DIS AUTO x Disable automatic recovery for DCH x pra-13

DIS DCH x Disable DCH x. pra-18

This changes the status of the DCH to DSBL and the status of
the D-channel to DCH RST (reset). In X11 Release 17 and
earlier, the command format is: DIS DCHI x.

DIS DCHI x Disable DCHI x. This changes the status of the DCHI card to pra-13
DSBL and the status of the D-channel to DCH RST (reset).

DIS LLB x Disable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See “ENL msdl-18
TEST” command for details.

DIS MSGI x Disable the monitoring of all incoming messages from pra-13
D-channel x.

DIS MSGI x Disable the monitoring of all incoming messages from pra-17
(options) D-channel x.
The available options are:
1. CH loop channel: disable incoming messages on
B-channel loop channel (non-Option 11 systems)
2. CH card channel : disable incoming messages on
B-channel card channel (Option 11 systems)
3. CH l s c u: disable incoming messages on
ISL-channel loop shelf card unit (non-Option 11 systems)
4. CH c u : disable incoming messages on ISL-channel
card unit (Option 11 systems)
5. FEAT feature: disable incoming messages for a PRI
feature
6. MSG msg1 msg2 msg3: disable incoming message
types Refer to the LD 96 introduction for details.

DIS MSGI x FEAT CPNW basic-21

Disable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.

DIS MSGO x Disable the monitoring of outgoing messages from D-channel pra-13
x.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 403 of 472

DIS MSGO x Disable the monitoring of outgoing messages from D-channel pra-17
(options) x. Refer to DIS MSGI x (options) for the list of options.

DIS MSGO x FEAT CPNW basic-21

Disable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.

DIS RLB x Disable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See “ENL msdl-18
TEST” command for details.

DIS SERV x Disable service messages on D-channel x. pra-15

See “ENL SERV” for details. The D-channel must be disabled
before disabling service messages.

DIS SSM x y Disable Supplementary Service Monitor for feature y on

D-channel x. Only the NAS supplementary service is included
(service identifier = 3)

DIS TEST x Disable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x. See “ENL TEST” msdl-18
command for details.
When the test mode state is disabled, the DCH link will go back
to release state and the DCH background audit will then try to
establish the link.
DIS TMDI x (ALL)
Disable TMDI card x basic-24

DLIF DCH x Force download of D channel x (For PRI UIPE application). uipe-20
Note that :
1. D channel specified must use the UIPE application
2. D channel must be disabled
3. D channels configured on the same MSDL card using the
same interface must be disabled

DLIF DCH xx FDL qsig-22

Force download a PRI interface table. To download the ISDN
interface cable:
1. the D channel must be disabled
2. the UIPE application must be active
3. other D channels on the same MSDL card must be
disabled

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 404 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DWNL DCHI x (t) pra-13

Down load layer 3 message configuration table t and LAPD
parameters from DCHI x.
If table t is not specified, all table information is shown. This
command is intended as a debugging tool for system
designers.

ENL AUTO x Enable automatic recovery for DCH x. Automatic recovery is pra-13
initially enabled.

ENL DCH x (FDL)

Enable DCH x and attempt to establish the link, and force msdl-18
download to MSDL. A self-test on the DCH runs automatically.
If successful, then:
• DCHI status: OPER
• DCH status: EST
If this is not successful, then:
• DCHI status: OPER
• DCH status: RLS

FDL forces D-channel loadware to the MSDL card. This is

optional. In X11 Release 17 and earlier, the command format is:
ENL DCHI x.

ENL DCHI x Enable DCHI port x. pra-13

A self-test on the DCHI card runs automatically. If successful,
then:
• DCHI status : OPER
• DCH status: EST
If test is not successful, then:
• DCHI status: OPER
• DCH status: RLS

ENL LLB x Enable local loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. See “ENL msdl-18
TEST” command for details.

ENL MSGI x Enable the monitoring of all incoming messages from pra-13
D-channel x.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 405 of 472

ENL MSGI x Enable the monitoring of all incoming messages from pra-17
(options) D-channel x. Refer to DIS MSGI x (options) for the list of
options.

ENL MSGI x FEAT CPNW basic-21

Enable incoming monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.

ENL MSGO x Enable the monitoring of all outgoing messages for pra-13
D-channel x.

ENL MSGO x Enable the monitoring of all outgoing messages for D-channel pra-17
(options) x. Refer to DIS MSGI x (options) for the list of options.

ENL MSGO x FEAT CPNW basic-21

Enable outgoing monitoring for the Network CPNW ISDN
messages on D Channel x.

ENL RLB x Enable remote loop back mode on MSDL DCH x. msdl-18
See “ENL TEST” command for details.

ENL SERV x Enable service messages on D-channel x. pra-15

“Service” and “Service Acknowledge” messages are supported
on individual PRA B channels, ISL channels and D-channels.
They are used to coordinate channel status between the near
and far end. A channel status can be in service, maintenance
or out-of-service.
The primary and backup D-channel must be disabled before
enabling service messages.
Make sure both ends support service messages before using
this command. For Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to Meridian 1 /
Meridian SL-1, both systems must have X11 Release 15 or
higher.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 406 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

By default, SERV is disabled when the interface type is

Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 (LD 17 IFC = SL1).
When enabled, service messages are supported on individual
PRA B-channels, ISL channels and D-channels. When
disabled, service messages are provided automatically on
D-channels with Backup D-channel configured.
For Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to DMS, or Meridian 1/Meridian
SL-1 to AT&T only service messages on individual PRA B-
channels and ISL channels are supported.
By default, SERV is disabled when the interface type is DMS
(LD 17), and enabled when the interface type is AT&T (LD 17
IFC = ESS4/ESS5).

ENL SSM x y Enable Supplementary Service Monitor for feature y on nas-18

D-channel x, where: y = 3 for Network Attendant Service. All
other entries are reserved for future use

Output format is as follows:

Standard ISDN message monitor output format appended with
four fields.
Where:
• Field 1 = Customer number
• Field 2 = Indicator of whether the message is one that
was decoded at a “tandem” node
• Field 3 = Descriptive string about a specified item
• Field 4 = Numeric information about specified item

Examples of the four fields follow:

--> 002 T-ACCESS TRKINFO
--> 002 T-PRIVATE TRUNK
--> 002 T-TIE TRUNK
--> 002 T-TANDEM COUNT (000001)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 407 of 472

ENL TEST x Enable TEST mode on MSDL DCH x. msdl-18

The DCH is put into TEST mode to perform the local loop back
(LLB) or remote loop back (RLB) test. The DCH link can only be
put in test mode if it is in the release or established state. If the
link is in establish state, the DCH link is first released, and then
put in test mode.
The local loop back test first tests the expedited interface, then
the ring interface. The test consists of sending a data packet
through each interface, which in turn is sent back by Layer 2.
This data packet is then validated to ensure that the contents of
the data packet are the same that were originally sent.
Example:
• ENL TEST x enter TEST mode
• ENL LLB x enter local loop back mode
• TEST LLB x perform test (results are PASS or FAIL)
• DIS LLB x exit local loop back mode
• DIS TEST x exit TEST mode and restore link

The remote loopback test is used to verify the integrity of the

physical link. This following test is only supported if both the D
channels are on the MSDL card and both switches are running
Release 18 or above. To run the test the far-end must be in the
remote loopback mode (ENL RLB x). The DCH running the test
(near-end) must be in TEST mode.

Example:
Far-end:
ENL TEST x — enter TEST mode
ENL RLB x — enter remote loopback mode
DIS RLB x — exit remote loopback mode (after test)
DIS TEST x — exit TEST mode and restore link

Near-end:
ENL TEST x — enter TEST mode
TEST RLB x — perform test (results are PASS or FAIL)
DIS TEST x — exit TEST mode and restore link
If the far end is not an MSDL D-channel, use the RLBK
command in LD60 to set up the remote loopback test.

ENL TMDI x Enable TMDI card number x basic-24

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 408 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL TMDI x ALL basic-24

Enable all units on TMDI card number x
ENL TMDI x FDL basic-24
Enable TMDI Card number x and force a download

EST DCH x Establish multiple frame operation on D-channel x. pra-13

With the absence of the back-up D channel, issuing the EST
DCH x command clears all the B-channels on loop x. If backup
D-channel is available, the system switches to the backup
D-channel and the B-channels of loop x are not cleared.

EST ISPC l ch (N) ispc-22

Establish data interface process at the ISPC SLAVE side of an
ISPC link at loop (l) and channel (ch), where “N” = the “number
of tries” counter. The range for N = 0-(1)-255.
When N = 0, the mode is set to AUTOMATIC. This mode
requires one TDS slot and one DTR unit. This mode is not
recommended for use on small systems or systems loaded with
heavy traffic.
When N > 0, the process is activated for a period of up to
N * 30 minutes. The available range goes from 30 minutes
(N = 1) to 128.5 hours or 5 days (N = 255).
If no value is entered for N, it defaults to a value of 1. When
N = 1, one attempt will be made to establish the data interface
process before the ISPC slave D-channel is released.

FDIS NCAL <DCH#> <conn_id> qsig gf-22

Force disconnect the specified call-independent connection as
defined by its connection ID number. The connection ID
number is a number in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the
call independent connection on a given DCH.

MAP DCH x Get physical address and switch settings for D-channels. This msdl-18
command outputs the card name and switch settings for
D-channels. For example:
MAP DCH
DCH 15 DCHI 07
DCH 23 MSDL 09 PORT 2

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 409 of 472

PCON DCH x Print configuration parameters on MSDL DCH x. This msdl-18

command outputs the parameters originally downloaded when
the D-channel was enabled. The output format is:
DCH : x LINK PARAM CONFIRM TIME: hh:mm:ss
• MSDL x = 0-15
• PORT x = 0-3
• INTERFACE aaa = SL1, D100, D250, ESS4, S100, etc.
• OPER MODE aaa bbb ccc ddd eee
Where: aaa = RS422, RS232 ; bbb = DTE, DCE ; ccc
= USR, NET ; ddd = baud rate ; eee = clock (EXT
or INT CLK)

T200 xx (LAPD parameter)

T203 xx (LAPD parameter)
T200 xx (LAPD parameter)
N201 xx (LAPD parameter)
K xx (LAPD parameter)
N2X4 xx (LAPD parameter if INTERFACE is ITR6)

PLOG DCH x Print protocol error log-on DCH x. pra-18

Protocol errors can be the result of PRI transmission problems
and re-start procedures, or a protocol mismatch with the far
end. The PLOG counters are cleared after the PLOG is printed
or the DCH card is enabled.
In X11 Release 17 and earlier, the command format is:
• PLOG DCHI x

When a protocol counter overflows, the PLOG is printed

automatically and the counters are cleared. The counter is also
cleared when the D-channel is disabled.
Response in X11 Release 17 and earlier is:
DCH xx I xxxx
yy zz 01 02 03...16
Response for MSDL DCH in X11 Release 18 and later is:
DCH : xx MAINT CONFIRM TIME: hh:mm:ss
01 cc
11 cc
23 cc

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 410 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Where:
• x = DCH number
• xxxx = system real time (in hexadecimal)
• yy = maintenance indication primitive
• zz = maintenance indication task ID
• 01 02 03....16 = protocol error counters as listed
below
• cc = protocol error counts

In X11 Release 18 and later, only the non-zero counters are

output. Protocol error counters:
• 01 = Count of missing PRI handshakes
• 02 = Count of peer initiated re-establishment link
• 03 = Count of unsuccessful retransmit N200 of SABME
• 04 = Count of unsuccessful retransmit N200 of DISC
• 05 = Count of N(R) errors
• 06 = Count of I fields with length greater than N201
• 07 = Count of undefined frames
• 08 = Count of I fields but not allowed
• 09 = Count of FRMR frames
• 10 = Count of CRC error frames
• 11 = Count of REJ frames
• 12 = Count of messages with less than 4 octets
• 13 = Count of undefined protocol discriminators
• 14 = Count of undefined message types
• 15 = Count of messages missing mandatory information
elements
• 16 = Count of messages with undefined information
elements
• 17 = Count of layer 1 reports of no external clock being
received
• 18 = Count of aborted frames
• 19 = Count of SABME frames received with incorrect
C/R bit
• 20 = Count of supervisory frames received with F = 1
• 21 = Count of unsolicited DM responses with F = 1
• 22 = Count of unsolicited UA responses with F = 1
• 23 = Count of unsolicited UA responses with F = 0
• 24 = Count of DM responses with F = 0
• 25 = Number of times that no response was received
from the far end after N200 retransmissions of RR or
RNR

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 411 of 472

• 26 = Count of frames received with incorrect header

length
• 27 = Number of times owner receiver busy condition was
entered
• 28 = Number of times peer receiver busy condition was
entered
• 29 = Count of messages with call reference length
greater than 2
• 30 = Count of optional IEs received with invalid contents
• 31 = Count of mandatory IEs received with invalid
contents
• 32 = Count of messages received with IE’s not ordered
correctly
• 33 = Count of IEs which were repeated in received
messages, but are only allowed to appear once per
message
• 34 = Count of IEs received with length exceeding the
specified maximum length for the IE
• 35 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with invalid
call reference flag value of 0.
• 36 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with invalid
call reference flag value of 1.
• 37 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with invalid
global call reference.
• 38 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 that are too
short.
• 39 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 containing an
undefined message type.
• 40 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 missing
mandatory IE(s).
• 41 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 containing
unsupported IE(s).
• 42 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 containing
invalid operational IE(s).
• 43 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 containing
invalid mandatory IE(s).
• 44 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 with IE(s) out
of order.
• 45 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 containing
repeated IE(s).
• 46 = Count of layer 3 messages from far-end with an
invalid call reference length.
• 47 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 with an
invalid call reference flag value of 0.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 412 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

• 48 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 with an

invalid call reference flag value of 1.
• 49 = Count of layer 3 messages from SL-1 with an
invalid global call reference.
• 50 = Count of unexpected layer 3 messages received
from the far-end.
• 51 = Count of unexpected layer 3 messages received
from the SL-1.
• 52 = Count of unexpected layer 3 timer expirations.
• 53 = Count of protocol messages received when
D-channel is not in service or waiting for a Service
Acknowledge message.

PLOG DCHI x Get D-channel protocol statistics log for DCHI x. pra-13
Protocol errors can be the result of PRI transmission problems
and restart procedures, or a protocol mismatch with the
far-end.
The PLOG counters are cleared after the PLOG is printed or
the DCHI card is enabled. When a protocol counter overflows,
the PLOG is printed automatically and the counters are
cleared.

Response is:
• DCH x I xxxx yy zz 01 02 03. . . 16
Where:
• x = DCHI port
• xxxx = system real time (in hexadecimal)
• yy = maintenance indication primitive
• zz = maintenance indication task ID
• 01 02 03. . . . 16 = protocol error counters as
listed below:

• 01 = count of missing PRI handshakes

• 02 = count of peer initiated re-establishment link
• 03 = count of unsuccessful retransmit N200 of SABME
• 04 = count of unsuccessful retransmit N201 of DISC
• 05 = count of N(R) errors
• 06 = count of I fields with length greater than N201
• 07 = count of undefined frames
• 08 = count of I fields but not allowed
• 09 = count of FRMR frames
•

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 413 of 472

• 10 = count of CRC error frames

• 11 = count of REJ frames
• 12 = count of messages with less than 4 octets
• 13 = count of undefined protocol discriminators
• 14 = count of undefined message types
• 15 = count of messages missing mandatory info.
elements
• 16 = count of messages with undefined information
elements
•
PMES DCH x Print incoming layer 3 messages on MSDL DCH x. msdl-18
The following data is kept by the MSDL DCH loadware and
output when requested by this command or when one of the
counters overflows:
DCH : xx
MSG LOG CONFIRM TIME: hh:mm:ss
SETUP: yy
CONNECT: yy
ALERT: yy
(Only non-zero counters are reported) (Where yy is the number
of times a message was received)

When a counter overflows, the log is printed automatically and

the counters are cleared. The counter is also cleared when the
D-channel is disabled.

PTAB DCHI x (t) pra-13

Display layer 3 message configuration table t and LAPD
parameters from DCHI x. This command is intended as a
debugging tool for system designers.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 414 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

PTRF DCH x Print traffic report on MSDL DCH x. msdl-18

The following traffic information is output:
1. PEAK_I_US xx % = peak incoming usage on the DCH
link
2. AVRG_I_US xx % = average incoming usage on the
DCH link
3. PEAK_O_US xx % = peak outgoing usage on the DCH
link
4. AVRG_O_US xx % = average outgoing usage on the
DCH link
5. TIME xx = time in seconds
6. CONNECTED CALLS xx: = total number of established
call-independent connections

RLS DCH x Release D-channel x. The link is in a waiting state, ready to pra-13
come back up at any time.
If you release the D-channel with active B-channels, then calls
in progress are not affected. However, these calls are
disconnected when you re-establish the D-channel.
When the automatic recovery feature is active, the B-channels
are automatically re-established

RLS ISPC l ch Stop the data interface establishment process. ispc-22

When this command is entered, the mode becomes MANUAL
and the number of attempts to be performed = 0.

RST DCH x Reset D-channel x, inhibit signaling. Forces the link to reset pra-13
(RST) state, but does not disable PRI or DCH

RST MON Reset or reactivate monitoring on D-channels with enabled pra-17

monitors.
RST TMDI x Reset TMDI card x basic-24

SDCH DCH x Switch to the standby D-channel x. This is only valid in a pra-13
backup D-channel configuration.
Releases a D-channel and switches over to the other
D-channel as long as the other D-channel is in EST STBY,
established standby mode.
Where x is the standby D-channel number. This command
changes the status of the active D-channel to standby, and
changes the status of standby D-channel to active.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 415 of 472

This command is not applicable if the recovery to primary

D-channel option (prompt RCVP = YES in LD 17) is used.
This command is only applicable to Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 to
Meridian 1/Meridian SL-1 Backup D-channel interface (IFC =
SL-1 in LD 17).

SET MSGI x MON (0)-2 pra-17

Set monitor output format level for all incoming messages on
D-channel x. Refer to Setting output format levels earlier in the
section.

SET MSGO x MON (0) -2 pra-17

Set monitor output format level for all outgoing messages on
D-channel x. Refer to Setting output format levels earlier in the
section.

SLFT TMDI x Invoke self test on TMDI card x basic-24

STAT DCH x Get the present status of D-channel x, where x is the I/O port pra-13
number (entering x to specify just one link is optional).

DCH status may be:

• EST = DCH link is established
• EST STBY = DCH link is established and is the standby
• FAIL = DCH link has failed
• RLS = DCH link is released
• RST = DCH link is in reset state
• AEST, ARLS, REST = these codes indicate
intermediate background functions are being performed.
Enter the STAT command again to determine final
status.

STAT DCH (x) Get status of one or all D-channels. pra-18

If a DCH number is not entered, the status of all D-channels is
output. The output format is:
DCH x : aaaa bbbb cccc dddd x

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 416 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

Where:
• x = DCH number
• aaaa = application status
• bbbb = link status
• cccc = AUTO if autorecovery is enable
• dddd = BKUP x or PRIM x (associated primary or
backup DCH)

Application status (aaaa):

• APRI = Awaiting PRI response
• CPRI = Checking PRI
• DIAG = application has failed
• DSBL = application is disabled
• OPER = link is operational
• RST = application is in reset state
• SDCH = Setting D-channel

Link status (bbbb):

• AEST = Awaiting establishment
• ARLS = Awaiting release
• EST ACTV = DCH link is established and active
• EST STBY = DCH link is established and is the standby
• FAIL = DCH link has failed
• REST = request establishment
• RLS = DCH link is released
• RST = DCH link is in reset state
• TST = Test mode
In X11 Release 17 and earlier, the STAT DCHI command is
required to get the application status.
•
STAT DCHI (x) Get the present status of DCHI x (entering x to specify just one pra-13
card, is optional). DCHI status may be:
1. DSBL = DCHI hardware is disabled.
2. DIAG = DCHI hardware has failed.
3. OPER = DCHI hardware is operational.
4. RST = DCHI is in reset state.
5. PRI, CPRI, SDCH = these codes indicate intermediate
background functions are being performed. Enter the
STAT DCHI command again to determine final status.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 417 of 472

STAT ISPC l ch Get status of data interface establishment process at an ISPC ispc-22
SLAVE side of an ISPC link (where l = loop and ch = channel)
which is configured to convey D-channel signaling.
The status may be:
1. DISABLED = ISPC link is disabled
2. AWAITING ESTABLISHMENT = the data interface
establishment process is waiting to receive DTMF digits.
While waiting, dial tone is provided to the ISPC link at the
SLAVE side.
3. RELEASED = the data interface establishment process is
stopped because either an “RLS ISPC” command has
been entered or because the maximum number of tries
has been reached.
4. ESTABLISHED = data interfaces at both ends of the ISPC
link are established.
5. AWAITING RELEASE = the ISPC link is being
disconnected. Once disconnected, the link will transition
to the “RELEASED” state.

The mode may be:

1. MODE MANUAL N = the data interface establishment
process is running with up to “N” number of tries
2. MODE AUTOMATIC = the Meridian 1 provides dial tone to
the ISPC slave D-channel.

STAT MON (x) Display the incoming and outgoing monitoring status of one or pra-13
all D-channels.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 418 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT NCAL <DCH#> qsig gf-22

List all current call-independent connections on a given
PRI D-channel.
The response format is as follows:
• NCAL CONN_ID: The connection ID number is a number
in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent
connection on a given DCH.
• CREF: call reference number in HEX identifying
independent connection
• STATE: current state of all call-independent connections
(IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST)
• TIME: year month day hour:minute:second (the time
when call independent connection request is made)
• APPL: applications using the call-independent
connection (eg. NACD, NMS, ...)
• ORIG: originator
• DEST: destination

STAT NCAL <DCH#> <conn_ID> qsig gf-22

List information pertaining to a specific call-independent
connection as defined by its connection ID number.
The response format is as follows:
• NCAL CONN_ID: The connection ID number is a number
in the range of 1-9999 that identifies the call independent
connection on a given DCH.
• CREF: call reference number in HEX identifying
independent connection
• STATE: current state of all call-independent connections
(IDLE, CONN_REQ, CONN_EST)
• TIME: year month day hour:minute:second (the time
when call independent connection request is made)
• APPL: applications using the call-independent
connection (eg. NACD, NMS, ...)
• ORIG: originator
• DEST: destination

STAT SERV (x) Get the enable/disable status of services messages for one or pra-15
all D-channels. See “ENL SERV” for details.

STAT TMDI x Get TMDI status on card x basic-24

STAT TMDI x FULL basic-24

Get TMDI status and all corresponding units.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 96
Alphabetical list of commands Page 419 of 472

TEST 100 x Perform interrupt generation test on DCHI x. This is an isolated pra-13
hardware test. If this test fails, either a faulty DCHI card or a
contention problem is indicated.
Tests 100, 101, 200, and 201 must be run in sequential order.
Established calls will stay up, but new calls cannot be placed.
The DCH link must be in the reset (RST) state when these tests
are run. Reset (RST) can be established when the status of the
D-channel is established (EST) or released (RLS).

TEST 101 x Perform loop back mode test on DCHI x. This is an isolated pra-13
hardware test. If this test fails, either a faulty DCHI card or a
contention problem is indicated.

TEST 200 x Perform interrupt handler test on DCHI x. This is a software test pra-13
which, when failed, indicates software problems. (Not
supported on Option 11)

TEST 201 x Test interrupt handler-to-link interface path. This is a software pra-13
test which, when failed, indicates software problems. (Not
supported on Option 11)

TEST LLB x Start local loop back test on MSDL DCH x. See “ENL TEST” msdl-18
command for details.

TEST RLB x Start remote loop back test on MSDL DCH x. See “ENL TEST” msdl-18
command for details.

X11 Maintenance
LD 96
Page 420 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

440

LD 117 LD 117
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 421 of 472

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

This overlay has a new command format which allows the administrator to:

1. configure the Release 22 Alarm Management feature

2. identify all Meridian 1 alarms
3. configure IP network interface addresses
4. perform all IP network related maintenance and diagnostic functions

Both Administration and Maintenance commands appear in this overlay.

New Command Format

LD 117 uses a new command line input interface (input parser) which has the
following general structure (where “=>” is the command prompt):

=> COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD 2 value)... (FIELDx value)]

LD 117 offers the administrator the following configuration features:

1. Context Sensitive Help - Help is offered when “?” is entered. The Help
context is determined by the position of the “?” entry in the command line.
If you enter “?” in the COMMAND position, Help text will appear which
presents all applicable command options. If you enter “?” in the OBJECT
position, HELP text will appear which presents all applicable OBJECT
options.
2. Abbreviated Inputs - The new input parser will recognize abbreviated
inputs for commands, objects and object fields. For example, “N” can
be entered for the command “NEW” or “R” can be entered for the
object “Route”.
3. Optional Fields - Object fields with default values can be bypassed by the
user on the command line. For example, to configure an object which
consists of fields with default values, enter the command, enter the object
name, press <return>, and the object will be configured with default
values. All object fields do not have to be specified.
4. Selective Change - Instead of searching for a prompt within a lengthy

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 422 of 472 New Alarm Management Capability

prompt-response sequence, “Selective Change” empowers the

administrator to directly access the object field to be changed.
5. Service Change Error Message Consistency - The parser simplifies
usage of service change error messages. LD 117 displays only SCH0099
and SCH0105.

New Alarm Management Capability

With the Release 22 Alarm Management feature, all processor-based system
events are processed and logged into a new disk-based System Event List
(SEL). Events which are generated as a result of administration activities,
such as SCH or ESN error messages, are not logged into the SEL. Events
which are generated as a result of maintenance or system activities, like BUG
and ERR error messages, are logged into the SEL. Unlike the previous
System History File, this new System Event List survives Sysload,
Initialization and power failures.

The Event Collector

The Event Collector captures and maintains a list of all processor-based
system events. The Event Collector also routes critical events to FIL TTY
ports and lights the attendant console minor alarm lamp as appropriate. The
System Event List (SEL) can be printed or browsed.

The Event Server

The Event Server consists of two components:

1 Event Default Table (EDT): This table associates events with a default
severity. By using the CHG EDT command in LD 117, the EDT can be
overridden so that all events default to a severity of either INFO or
MINOR. The EDT can be viewed in LD 117.
Sample Event Default Table (EDT)

Error Code Severity

ERR220 Critical
IOD6 Critical
BUG4001 MInor

Note: Error codes which do not appear in the EDT will be assigned a
default severity of MINOR.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
New Alarm Management Capability Page 423 of 472

2 Event Preference Table (EPT): This table contains site-specific

preferences for event severities as well as criteria for severity escalation
and alarm suppression. The administrator can configure the EPT to:
a override the default event severity assigned by the default table
b escalate event severity of frequently occurring minor or major
alarms

Sample Event Preference Table (EPT)

Error Code Severity Escalate Threshold (events/60 sec.) (see Note 2)

ERR??? (see Note 1) Critical 5
INI??? Default 7
BUG1?? Minor 0
HWI363 Major 3
Note 3: The”?” is a wildcard. See section below for explanation of wildcard entries.
Note 4: The window timer length defaults to 60 seconds. However, this value can be changed by the
Administrator. Read “Global Window Timer Length” on page 424 for more information.

Wildcards
The special wildcard character “?” can be entered for the numeric segment of
an error code entry in the EPT to represent a range of events. All events in the
range indicated by the wildcard entry can then be assigned a particular
severity or escalation threshold.

For example, if “ERR????” is entered and assigned a MAJOR severity in the

EPT, all events from ERR0000 to ERR9999 are assigned MAJOR severity.
If “BUG3?” is entered and assigned an escalation threshold of 5, the severity
of all events from BUG0030 to BUG0039 will be escalated to the next higher
severity if their occurrence rate exceeds 5 per time window.

Escalation and Suppression Thresholds

The escalation threshold specifies a number of events per window timer
length that when exceeded, will cause the event severity to be escalated up
one level. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. Escalation
occurs only for minor or major alarms. Escalation threshold values must be
less than the universal suppression threshold value.

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 424 of 472 New Alarm Management Capability

A suppression threshold suppresses events that flood the system and applies
to all events. It is set to 15 events per minute by default.

Global Window Timer Length

Both the escalation and suppression thresholds are measured within a global
window timer length. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default.
However, the window timer length can be changed by using the CHG TIMER
command in LD 117.

TTY Output Format of Events

TTY event output can be formatted or unformatted. Formatted output is also
called fancy format. Output format is configurable in LD 117 using the CHG
FMT _OUTPUT command.

Fancy Format Output

Formatted output appears in the following template:

<severity> <report id> <date> <time> <prim_seq_no> <cp_id> <cp_ad>

DESCTXT: <descriptive text>
OPRDATA: <operator data>
EXPDATA: <expert data>

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
New Alarm Management Capability Page 425 of 472

Field Description

<severity> "***" (critical); "**" (major); "*" (minor); " " (blank for info)
<report id> The report id consists of an event category (e.g. BUG, ERR, etc.) and an
event number (1200, 230, etc.). It is padded with blanks at the end to ensure
it is 9 characters long (4 characters max. for category and 5 digits max. for
number). Examples of report ids are: ERR230, ACD3560, and BUG30.
<date> DD/MM/YY
<time> HH:MM:SS
<prim_seq_no> Primary sequence number of the event (length of 5 digits)
<cp_id> The Component ID is a 15 character string which indicates the id of the
subsystem generating the alarm
<cp_ad> The Component address is a 15 character string which indicates the
address of the subsystem generating the event
<descriptive text> This is an optional string which describes an event
<operator data> This is an optional field which holds a 160 character string containing extra
text or data to assist the operator in clearing a fault. This field contains any
data output with a filtered SL-1 alarm (e.g. loop number, TN, etc.)
<expert data> This is an optional variable length character string which contains extra text
or data for a system expert or designer.

The following are samples of fancy format output:

*** BUG015 15/12/95 12:05:45 00345

EXPDATA: 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EC6 05500EAA
BUG015 + 05500E72 + 05500E56 + 0550D96 + 055053A + 04D84E02 +
04D83CFC
BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7EFC
04F7E1B0

* ERR00220 15/12/92 12:05:27 00346

OPRDATA: 51

VAS0010 15/12/92 12:06:11 00347 VMBA VAS 5

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 426 of 472 Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

Unformatted Output
Unformatted data consists of only the report ID and perhaps additional text.
The following is a sample of unformatted output:

BUG015
BUG015 + 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EAA 0550E8E
BUG015 + 05500E72 05500E56 05500D96 0550053A 04D84E02
BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7E2FC 04&E1B0
BUG015 + 04F7E148

ERR00220 51
VAS0010

Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

LD 117 may be used to configure and manage an IP network interface. The
Meridian 1 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C Options are hardware-equipped for this
advance with an Ethernet controller on the I/O processor (IOP) card. Each
IOP card is equipped with a Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet
(LANCE) which is preconfigured with an unique Ethernet address. The
Option 11C will support Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol.

An Ethernet address is a unique 48-bit long physical address assigned to the

Ethernet controller on the IOP. On a single CPU M1 system, there is only one
IOP which contains one Ethernet interface and an IP address which must be
configured. Single CPU systems use only a Primary IP address.

On a redundant or dual CPU M1 system, two IP addresses must be specified:

Primary and Secondary. A dual CPU M1 system operating normally will use
the Primary IP address. A dual CPU M1 system operating in split mode (the
mode used only when upgrading software or hardware) will use the
Secondary IP address.

Remote access to Meridian 1 switches is made possible with Point-to-Point

Protocol (PPP). LD 117 may be used to configure IP addresses for
Point-to-Point Protocol.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol Page 427 of 472

The Meridian 1 Ethernet interface is provided by the IOP pack with AUI
cable on the back panel on Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C. The Option 11C
provides Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the main
cabinet. The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) can be established via
asynchronous connection to any Meridian 1 SDI port. The IP addresses for
Ethernet and PPP interface can be configured in overlay 117, and defaults will
be used for all new installation and upgrades.

How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

The following tables explain how to configure IP addresses for Ethernet and
Point-to-Point Protocol. These two tables are followed by examples.

Configure IP address for the Ethernet Interface

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117

2 Create host entries

3 Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es)

4 Set up Ethernet subnet mask

5 Set up routing entry

Configure IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117

2 Create host entries

3 Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es)

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 428 of 472 Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

Example 1
Configure IP address for the Ethernet Interface

Given: Primary IP address: 47.1.1.10 ; Secondary IP address: 47.1.1.11; Subnet

mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway IP: 47.1.1.1

Step Action
1 Load Overlay 117
2 Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:
NEW HOST PRIMARY_IP 47.1.1.10
NEW HOST SECONDARY_IP 47.1.1.11 (for Dual CPU only)
NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)
3 Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the
following commands:
CHG ELNK ACTIVE PRIMARY_IP
CHG ELNK INACTIVE SECONDARY_IP (for Dual CPU only)
Verify your IP address for Ethernet by entering the PRT ENLK command.
4 Set up Ethernet subnet mask. Enter the command:
CHG MASK 255.255.255.0
Verify subnet mask setting by entering the command: PRT MASK
5 Set up routing entry. Enter the command:
NEW ROUTE 0.0.0.0 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)
*Note that 0.0.0.0 = network IP; 47.1.1.1 = gateway IP
Verify default routing by entering the command: PRT ROUTE

Note 1: For a single CPU machine, the secondary IP is not used.

Note 2: The secondary IP is only accessible when a system is in split mode.
Note 3: The subnet mask must be the same value used for the M1 Ethernet network.
Note 4: The M1 private Ethernet is used by all M1 devices for system access and control. An internet
gateway must be used to isolate the M1 private Ethernet from the customer LAN.
Note 5: Routing information is required if an internet gateway or router connects an M1 private network to
the customer’s LAN.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol Page 429 of 472

Example 2
Configure IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface

Given: Local IP address: 172.1.1.1; Remote IP address 100.1.1.1

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117

2 Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:

NEW HOST LOCAL_PPP 172.1.1.1
NEW HOST REMOTE_PPP 100.1.1.1 (this entry is optional)

3 Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the

following commands:
CHG PPP LOCAL LOCAL_PPP 0 (always use interface #0)
CHG PPP REMOTE REMOTE_PPP 0 (this entry is optional)
Verify your IP address(es) for PPP by entering the PRT PPP command.

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 430 of 472 Command Descriptions

Command Descriptions
Command Definition Description
**** Abort Abort overlay
BROWSE Browse Browse an existing System Event List
CHG Change Change/modify object configuration
DIS Disable Disable Point-to-Point Protocol
ENL Enable Enable Point-to-Point Protocol
INV GENERATE CARDS Enable Begin generating card inventory
INV GENERATE SETS Enable Begin generating sets inventory
INV GENERATE ALL Enable Begin generating both card and sets inventory
INV PRT STATUS Status Print out the status of the Inventory feature
INV PRT CARDS Print Print out the Card Inventory file
INV PRT SETS Print Print out the Sets Inventory file
INV PRT ALL Print Print out both Card and Sets Inventory file
**** Abort Abort overlay or Printing if it is printing an Inventory file
INV GENERATE ABORT Abort Abort any/all inventory generations
INV MIDNIGHT CARDS Enable Set Midnight to run card inventory file generations
INV MIDNIGHT SETS Enable Set Midnight to run sets inventory file generations
INV MIDNIGHT ALL Enable Set Midnight to run both card and sets inventory
generations
INV MIDNIGHT OFF Disable Set Midnight to be turned off for both card and sets
inventory generations
INV MIDNIGHT STATUS Status Get the state of the Midnight for Inventory.
NEW New Add and configure new object
OUT Out Delete existing object
PRT Print Print configuration of existing object
RST Reset Reset Object
SET Set Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value
STAT Status Display object statistics
UPDATE Update Update INET database

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Object Descriptions Page 431 of 472

Object Descriptions
Object Description

DBS Database

EDT Event Default Table: Table of default event entries and associated severities

ELNK Ethernet interface

ELNK ACTIVE Active Ethernet Link: Change the Primary IP address and host name

ELNK INACTIVE Inactive Ethernet Link: Change the Secondary IP address and host name

EPT Event Preference Table: Table of customer’s event entries with associated
severities

FMT_OUTPUT Formatted Output: Determine if system events uses formatted (also called
fancy) or unformatted output. See “TTY Output Format of Events” on
page 424 for more information.

HOST Host name

MASK Subnet mask

OPEN_ALARM Open Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps setting

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol interface

PPP LOCAL Local Point-to-Point Protocol interface address

PPP REMOTE Remote Point-to-Point Protocol interface address

PTM Point-to-Point Protocol idle Timer

ROUTE Configure new routing entry

SELSIZE System Event List Size: Number of events in System Event Log

SEL System Event List

SUPPRESS Suppress count: Number of times the same event is processed before it is
suppressed

TIMER Global window timer length. See “Global Window Timer Length” on page 424
for more information.

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 432 of 472 Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

The commands listed below use the following general structure
(where “=>” is the command prompt):

=> COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD 2 value)... (FIELDx value)]

In the table below, COMMANDS and OBJECTS are in bold typeface and fields
are in regular typeface. Fields enclosed in brackets ( ) are default values.

=> Command Description

BROWSE SEL UP n Browse up n # of lines in System Event List (SEL)

BROWSE SEL DOWN n Browse down n # of lines in SEL
BROWSE SEL TOP Browse to top of SEL
BROWSE SEL BOT Browse to bottom of SEL
BROWSE SEL FIND xxx Browse forward to find string xxx in SEL
BROWSE SEL BFIND xxx Browse backward to find string xxx in SEL

CHG EDT NORMAL Use Event Default Table (EDT) default severities
CHG EDT INFO Override EDT; use INFO as default severity for all events
except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT)
CHG EDT MINOR Override EDT; use MINOR as default severity for all events
except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT)
CHG ELNK ACTIVE hostname Set Meridian 1 active Ethernet interface IP address
CHG ELNK INACTIVE hostname Set Meridian 1 inactive Ethernet interface IP address

CHG EPT aa... a INFO x Change an Event Preference Table (EPT) entry to
Information severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Alphabetical list of Administration commands Page 433 of 472

=> Command Description

CHG EPT aa... a EDT x Change EPT to NT-defined severity from EDT, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.
CHG EPT aa... a MAJOR x Change an EPT entry to Major severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.
CHG EPT aa... a MINOR x Change an EPT entry to Minor severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.
CHG EPT aa... a CRITICAL x Change an EPT entry to Critical severity, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

CHG FMT_OUTPUT OFF Turn off formatted output

CHG FMT_OUTPUT ON Turn on formatted output
CHG MASK nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change subnet mask
CHG PPP LOCAL hostname Set Meridian 1 local Point-to-point Protocol interface
IP address
CHG PPP REMOTE hostname Set Meridian 1 remote Point-to-point Protocol interface
IP address
CHG PTM 0-60 Change Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to specified
value (in minutes)
CHG SELSIZE 5-(500)-2000 Change System Event List Size (number of events in SEL)

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 434 of 472 Alphabetical list of Administration commands

=> Command Description

CHG SUPPRESS 5-(15)-127 Change global suppress for events (number of

occurrences before event is suppressed)
CHG TIMER (1)-60 Change global timer window length in minutes. See
“Global Window Timer Length” on page 424 for more
information.
INV GENERATE CARDS Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the
Inventory file for all of the cards in the system. The
generation produces an inventory file with all of the cards
configured on the system. Those cards that are present in
the system and have card ID are noted in the inventory file
with their card type, TN, and card ID. Those cards that do
not have card ID or are not present in the system, will be
noted to be “Unavailable” in place of their card ID.
INV GENERATE SETS Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the
Inventory file for the digital telsets with their telsets’ IDs
that have been configured in the system. Those telsets
that are present in the system and have sets ID are noted
in the inventory file with their sets type, TN, sets ID, DES,
Primary DN. Those telsets that do not have sets ID or ar
not present in the sytem will be noted to be “Unavailable”
in place of their sets ID.
INV GENERATE ALL Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating
both the card and telsets Inventory file.
INV PRT STATUS Requests for the status of the Inventory feature.
Result may look somewhat:
Inventory status:
Card file status is Ok
43 records; 18/03/1999 17:10:21
Sets file status is Ok
19 records; 18/03/1999 16:44:09
INV PRT CARDS Requests for the Card Inventory file to be printed out to the
output destination (i.e. TTY).
INV PRT SETS Requests for the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the
output destination (i.e. TTY)
INV PRT ALL Requests for both the Card Inventory file and the Sets
Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (i.e.
TTY).

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Alphabetical list of Administration commands Page 435 of 472

=> Command Description

**** Abort overlay. This command can also be used to abort

any Inventory file printing.
INV GENERATE ABORT Abort any currently running Inventory generations.
INV MIDNIGHT CARDS Scheduling for the Midnight to run Card Inventory
generation.
INV MIDNIGHT SETS Scheduling for the Midnight to run Sets Inventory
generation.
INV MIDNIGHT ALL Scheduling for the Midnight to run both Card and Sets
Inventory generations.
INV MIDNIGHT OFF Turns off Midnight run off Card and Sets Inventory
generations.
INV MIDNIGHT STATUS Print out the state of the Midnight schedule of Inventory.
NEW EPT aa... a INFO x Assign Information severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.
NEW EPT aa... a EDT x Assign NT-defined severity from EDT to new EPT entry,
where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.
NEW EPT aa... a MAJOR x Assign Major severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 436 of 472 Alphabetical list of Administration commands

=> Command Description

NEW EPT aa... a MINOR x Assign Minor severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.
NEW EPT aa... a CRITICAL x Assign Critical severity to new EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry
from (0)-Suppress value, as defined by default or
your CHG SUPPRESS entry.

NEW HOST hostname IPaddress Configure a new host entry. The host name must exist in
the host table.
The default setting for the Primary IP address is:
137.135.128.253. The default setting for Primary Host
Name is: PRIMARY_ENET.
The default setting for the Secondary IP address is:
137.135.128.254. The default setting for the Secondary
Host Name is: SECONDARY_ENET.
Host Name Syntax: A host name can be up to 16
characters in length. The first character of a host name
must be a letter of the alphabet. A character may be a
letter, number, or underscore(_). A period is used as a
delimiter between domain names. Spaces and tabs are
not permitted. No distinction is made between upper and
lower case.
NEW ROUTE networkIP gateway IP Configure a new routing entry

OUT EPT aa... a Delete a single Event Preference Table (EPT) events,
where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
OUT EPT ALL Delete all entries in Event Default Table (EDT)
OUT HOST nnn Delete configured host entry

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Alphabetical list of Administration commands Page 437 of 472

=> Command Description

OUT ROUTE nn Delete configured routing entry

PRT EDT aa... a Print a single Event Default Table (EDT) event, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
PRT EDT aa... a bb...b Print a range of Event Default Table (EDT) events, where:
• aa... a = first entry in EDT event range
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• bb...b = last entry in EDT event range
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
PRT ELNK Print active and inactive Ethernet interface IP addresses
PRT EPT aa... a Print a single Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where:
• aa... a = an event class with an event number
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025
PRT EPT aa... a bb...b Print specific Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where:
• aa... a = first entry in EPT event range
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
• bb...b = last entry in EPT event range
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
PRT EPT ALL Print all entries in Event Preference Table (EPT)
PRT FMT_OUTPUT Print formatted output string
PRT HOST Print network host table entry(ies) information stored in
database
PRT MASK Print subnet mask stored in database
PRT OPEN_ALARM Print open Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
traps setting
PRT PPP Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es)
PRT PTM Print current Point-to-point Protocol idle timer settings
PRT ROUTE Print routing table entry(ies) information stored in
database
PRT SEL nn Print most recent record(s) in system event list, where:
nn = 0-(20)-SELSIZE. For example, if nn = 50, the 50 most
recent events in the system event list will be printed.
PRT SELSIZE Print System Event List size

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 438 of 472 Alphabetical list of Administration commands

=> Command Description

PRT SUPPRESS Print global suppress value

PRT TIMER Print global timer window length (in minutes). See “Global
Window Timer Length” on page 424 for more information.

OUT EPT ALL Delete all entries in Event Preference Table (EPT)
OUT EPT aa...a Delete a single EPT entry, where:
• aa... a = first entry in EPT event range
(e.g. BUG1000, ERR0025)
RST ELNK ACTIVE Reset Meridian 1 active Ethernet interface IP address to
default value
RST ELNK INACTIVE Reset Meridian 1 inactive Ethernet interface IP address to
default value
RST MASK Reset subnet mask to default
RST PPP LOCAL Reset local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to
default value
RST PPP REMOTE Reset remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address
to default value
RST PTM Reset Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to default

UPDATE DBS Rebuild INET database and renumber host and route entry
ID

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 117
Alphabetical list of Maintenance Commands Page 439 of 472

Alphabetical list of Maintenance Commands

Maintenance commands share the same entry format as Administration
commands.

=> Command Description

DIS BUF ALL Disable buffering for all data types

DIS BUF CDR Disable buffering for CDR data
DIS BUF TRF Disable buffering for TRF data
DIS DBK Display database disaster recovery’s backup & restore
DIS HOST n Remove a host from the run time host table, where:
n = host entry number
DIS PPP Disable Point-to-point Protocol access (this enables
PPPD)
DIS ROUTE n Remove a route from the run time routing table, where:
n = route entry number

ENL BUF ALL Enable buffering for all data types

ENL BUF CDR Enable buffering for CDR data
ENL BUF TRF Enable buffering for TRF data
ENL DBK Enable database disaster recovery’s backup & restore
ENL HOST n Add a host to run time host table, where: n = host entry
number
ENL PPP Enable Point-to-point Protocol access (Enables
PPPD command)
ENL ROUTE n Add a route to run time routing table, where: n = route
entry number

PING Ping an IP address to test the network settings

SET MASK Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value

SET OPEN_ALARM slot address Add an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
trap destination slot address from 0 to 7.
The address format is: x.x.x.x. (TCP/IP)
To clear slot, set address to 0.0.0.0.

X11 Maintenance
LD 117
Page 440 of 472 Alphabetical list of Maintenance Commands

=> Command Description

STAT BUF Display buffer info (data type,% full, not ready)
STAT DBK Display status of disaster recovery (enabled, disabled)
STAT HOST Display current runtime host table status
STAT PPP Show Point-to-point Protocol connection status
STAT ROUTE Display host and network routing table

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

454

LD 135 LD 135
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 441 of 472

LD 135: Core Common Equipment

Diagnostic
LD 135 provides diagnostic and maintenance information for Option
11C/51C/61C/81/81C machines with X11 Release 18 and later. It provides a
means of performing the following functions:

— clearing minor and major alarms

— clearing and printing maintenance display contents for the primary Core
— testing the idle Core

— displaying CP card status and ID

— enabling and disabling CNI cards

— displaying CNI card ID and status

— testing SIMMs, inactive CNIs, and standby Core during daily routines

— switch Cores when in redundant mode

— during midnight routines checks primary CNIs, checks for Core

redundancy, and attempts to switch Cores

When a status appears disabled, one or more Out-of-Service (OOS) messages

may appear. Listed below are the possible OOS messages. (What actually
appears are the numbers associated with the OOS text).

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 442 of 472 Core Common Equipment Diagnostic

Possible OOS Messages

0 = CP local bus parity threshold exceeded
1 = CP card HPM timeout threshold exceeded
8 = Unconfigured CNI card.
9 = Port has been disabled by craftsperson.
10 = Device is not accessible.
16 = CNI to 3PE cable 1 on specified card and port lost.
17 = CNI to 3PE cable 2 on specified card and port lost.
18 = 3PE power lost.
19 = 3PE has been manually disabled.
20 = CNI card has been manually disabled.
21 = Card test failed.
22 = Port test failed.
23 = Extender disabled by Meridian 1 initialization.
24 = Port interrupt line 0 disabled.
25 = Port interrupt line 1 disabled.
26 = Port interrupt line 2 disabled.
27 = Port interrupt line 3 disabled.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 135
Adding a group to an option 51C/61C/81/81C Page 443 of 472

Adding a group to an option 51C/61C/81/81C

It may be necessary to add a group, or groups, to your system after original
installation. Refer to the System installation NTP for cabling and general
installation information. Follow these steps to configure the new groups in the
software.

1 Be sure to connect the cables from the network shelf to the active and
standby IPB CNI card slots. Each CNI card has 2 ports and can support
2 groups.
2 Load Overlay 135 and disable the standby port connect to the new group.
Switch Cores, then disable the standby port again (was the active one).
LD 135
DIS CNI c s p Disable the standby core CNI port
SCPU Switch Cores If asked for FORCE, enter Yes.
DIS CNI c s p Disable the standby core CNI port
3 Load Overlay 17 and configure the active and standby EXT for each new
group.
4 Load Overlay 135 and enable the standby CNI port. Switch Cores and
enable the standby again (was the active). Switch Cores again.
LD 135
ENL CNI c s p Enable the standby core CNI port
SCPU Switch Cores If asked for FORCE, enter Yes.
ENL CNI c s p Enable the standby CNI port
SCPU Switch Cores If asked for FORCE, enter Yes.
5 Load Overlay 43 and datadump to save the new configuration.
6 Load Overlay 135 and perform some system integrity checks. Switch the
Cores, and test the CNI ports.

LD 135
ENL CNI c s p Enable the standby CNI port
SCPU Switch Cores If asked for FORCE, enter Yes.
ENL CNI c s p Enable the standby CNI port
SCPU Switch Cores If asked for FORCE, enter Yes.

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 444 of 472 Removing a group from an option 51C/61C/81/81C

Removing a group from an option 51C/61C/81/81C

It may be necessary to remove a group, or groups, from your system after
original installation. Refer to the System installation NTP for cabling and
general installation information. Follow these steps to remove the groups
from the software.

1 Disable any peripheral or network devices connected to the groups being

removed.
2 Load Overlay 135 and disable the standby port connect to the new group.
Switch Cores, then disable the standby port again (was the active one).
LD 135
DIS CNI c s p Disable the standby CNI port
SCPU Switch Cores If asked for FORCE, enter Yes.
DIS CNI c s p Disable the standby CNI port
3 Load Overlay 17 and remove (OUT) the active and standby EXT for
removed group.
4 Load Overlay 43 and datadump to save the new configuration.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 135
Basic Commands Page 445 of 472

Basic Commands
CDSP Clear maintenance displays.
CMAJ Clear major alarm, and reset power fail transfer.
CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis
CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles
CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for customer c (not
applicable for Release 22)

DIS CNI c s p Disable the CNI port.

DSPL Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core.
DSPL ALL Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core as well as previous 63
displays.

ENL CNI c s p Enable CNI port.

IDC CNI s Print the card ID for the CNI on the active side.
IDC CPU Print card ID for the active Core.

MIDN Run midnight routines after LD 135 is aborted and TTY is logged out.

SCPU Switch Cores.

SHDW Restore redundancy to a system put in single mode by the SPLIT command.

SPLIT Put a redundant (shadowed) system into single (non-shadowed) mode.

STAT CNI c s p Get the status of all configured CNIs. (Also prints the Network Group number
of both ports on each CNI.)
STAT CPU Get the status and core numbers for both CPs.
STAT MEM c m Get status of SIMMs on both CPs.

TEST CNI c s p Test the CNI port.

TEST CPU Test the inactive (standby) Core. This command performs NO tests upon the
active (primary) Core.
TEST IPB Test the backplane protocol on the secondary (inactive) Interprocessor Bus.
This command does NOT test the primary (active) IPB.
TEST LCD Test the LCD display on the active CP card.

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 446 of 472 Option 11C commands

Option 11C commands

DIS FIL n Disable fibre optic link n
ENL FIL n Enable fibre optic link n
LLBK FIL n Perform local loop back test on fibre optic link n
RLBK FIL n Perform remote loop back test on fibre optic link n
STAT FIL Get status of all fibre optic links
STAT FIL n Get status of fibre optic link n

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 135
Alphabetical list of commands Page 447 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CDSP Clear maintenance displays. This command sets the basic-18

maintenance display for the primary CP to blank.

CMAJ Clear major alarm, and reset power fail transfer. basic-18

CMIN Clear the minor lamp on a system basis. alrm_filter-22

CMIN ALL Clear minor alarm indication on all attendant consoles. basic-18

CMIN c Clear minor alarm indication on attendant consoles for basic-18

customer c. (not applicable for Release 22)

DIS CNI c s p Disable the CNI port. Where: basic-18

• c = Core number (0 or 1) This must be the standby side.
Disable the active side if the CNI is not in service.
• s = Slot number (8-12)
• p = Port number (0 or 1)
If the P is not entered, both ports, and the card itself are
disabled.

DIS FIL n Disable fibre optic link n opt11c-22

Where :
n = 1 (first expansion cabinet)
n = 2 (second expansion cabinet)
n = 3 (third expansion cabinet) (Release 24)
n = 4 (fourth expansion cabinet) (Release 24)

DSPL Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core. If the basic-18
maintenance display is blank, BLANK is output.

DSPL ALL Get contents of maintenance display for the active Core, and basic-18
previous 63 displays.

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 448 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

ENL CNI c s p Enable CNI port. basic-18

Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) ; s = Slot number (8-12) ;
p = Port number (0 or 1)
If the P is not entered, both ports, and the card itself are
enabled. A port cannot be enabled if the card is disabled.
Enabling the CNI card will also enable the 3 Port Extender.

ENL FIL n Enable fibre optic link n opt11c-22

Where :
n = 1 (first expansion cabinet)
n = 2 (second expansion cabinet)
n = 3 (third expansion cabinet) (Release 24)
n = 4 (fourth expansion cabinet) (Release 24)

IDC CNI s Print the card ID for the CNI on the active side. Where: s = Slot basic-18
number (8-12). The printout appears in the following format:
x y ppppppppaa rrssss ccccccc

Where:
• x = Core number (0 or 1)
• y = Slot number (8-12)
• pppppppp = PEC code
• aa = Attribute code
• rr = Release number
• ssss = Serial number
• cccccccc = Comments (optional)

IDC CPU Print card ID for the active Core. The printout appears in the basic-18
following format:
x y pppppppppp rrssss ccccccc
Where:
• x = Core number (0 or 1)
• y = Slot number (8-12)
• pppppppppp = PEC code
• rr = Release number
• ssss = Serial number
• cccccccc = Comments (optional)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 135
Alphabetical list of commands Page 449 of 472

LLBK FIL n Perform local loop back test on fibre optic link n (link must be opt11c-22
disabled)
Where :
n = 1 (first expansion cabinet)
n = 2 (second expansion cabinet)
n = 3 (third expansion cabinet) (Release 24)
n = 4 (fourth expansion cabinet) (Release 24)

MIDN Run midnight routines after LD 135 is aborted and TTY is basic-18
logged out.

RLBK FIL n Perform remote loop back test on fibre optic link n (link must opt11c-22
be disabled)
Where :
n = 1 (first expansion cabinet)
n = 2 (second expansion cabinet)
n = 3 (third expansion cabinet) (Release 24)
n = 4 (fourth expansion cabinet) (Release 24)

SCPU Switch Cores. basic-18

This command causes the inactive CP to become active. If the
switchover is successful, OK in printed. If it is not successful,
an error message is printed.

If, when attempting to switch CPs, the system determines the

currently active side is better than the standby side, a message
appears on the TTY:
“FORCE
Enter <YES> to force SCPU to standby Core x.
Press <Return> to abort SCPU."
Entering Yes continues the switch. Entering a Carriage Return
<CR> defaults to No and retains the currently active side.

SHDW Restore redundancy to a system put in single mode by the basic-18

SPLIT command.
This command cannot be used unless the system is already
SPLIT. This command MUST be entered by the CPIO port on
the secondary CP.

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 450 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

SHDW puts the secondary CP to "sleep." Once the secondary

CP is asleep, the primary CP begins the process of updating
the secondary CP's memories so they match the primary CPs.
SHDW does NOT synchronize the contents of the CMDUs. Use
LD 137 to synchronize the CMDUs. When implementing this
command, the following is output:
WARNING: CP x will be put to SLEEP.
Enter <YES> to continue, or press <return> to abort.

SPLIT Put a redundant (shadowed) system into single basic-18

(non-shadowed) mode.
The active Core remains active. Use this command for parallel
reload, and for diagnostics requiring split mode operation.
Additionally, the standby (inactive) Core "wakes up" and does a
system level INIT.
When the command is successful, OK is printed. If it is not
successful, an error message is printed.

This command has the same effect as putting both Cores into
MAINT.
If a terminal is connected to the secondary Core's CPIO port,
OS level startup messages appear as well as INI messages.
This is not an error, and is operating according to design.
If the disks are not synchronized, the command aborts, and an
error message appears.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 135
Alphabetical list of commands Page 451 of 472

STAT CNI c s p Get the status of all configured CNIs. (This command also basic-18
prints the Network Group number of both ports on each CNI.)
To get the status of a specific CNI port, enter the following
information. Entering only STAT CNI gets the status for all CNI
ports.
Where: c = Core number (0 or 1) ; s = Slot number (8-12) ;
p = Port number (0 or 1).
If the P is not entered, the status of both ports is printed.

If the status is DSBL (Disabled), one or more of the OOS

reasons may appear. What actually appears are the numbers
associated with the OOS text.
• 0 = CP local bus parity threshold exceeded
• 1 = CP card HPM timeout threshold exceeded
• 8 = Unconfigured CNI card
• 9 = Port has been disabled by craftsperson
• 10 = Device is not accessible
• 16 = CNI to 3PE cable 1 on specified card and port lost
• 17 = CNI to 3PE cable 2 on specified card and port lost
• 18 = 3PE power lost
• 19 = 3PE has been manually disabled
• 20 = CNI card has been manually disabled
• 21 = Card test failed
• 22 = Port test failed
• 23 = Extender disabled by Meridian 1 initialization
• 24 = Port interrupt line 0 disabled
• 25 = Port interrupt line 1 disabled
• 26 = Port interrupt line 2 disabled

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 452 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

STAT CPU Get the status and core numbers for both CPs. Possible basic-18
responses are:
• ENBL = CP is running
• IDLE = CP is in standby
• DSBL = CP is disabled

If the status is DSBL, one of the following OOS reasons is

printed:
• 0 = CP card local bus parity threshold exceeded
• 1 = CP card sanity timeout threshold exceeded
• 10 = Secondary CP is not accessible
• 16 = Secondary CP has a major fault
This command also prints out the results of the latest self-test,
and the position of the MAINT/NORM switch.

STAT FIL Get status of all fibre optic links. opt11c-22

Link status may be ENBL (enabled), DSBL (disabled), LLBK
(local loop back mode) or RLBK (remote loop back mode)

STAT FIL n Get status of fibre optic link n opt11c-22

Where :
n = 1 (first expansion cabinet)
n = 2 (second expansion cabinet)
n = 3 (third expansion cabinet) (Release 24)
n = 4 (fourth expansion cabinet) (Release 24)

STAT MEM c m basic-18

Get status of SIMMs on both CPs.
To get the status of a single SIMM, or a specific side, enter the
following information. Where:
• c = Core (0 or 1)
• m = SIMM number (0-5) If m is not entered, status for all
SIMMs is printed.
If the status is Disabled (DSBL), the device is not accessible

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 135
Alphabetical list of commands Page 453 of 472

TEST CNI c s p basic-18

Test the CNI port. Where:
• c = Core number (0 or 1)
• s = Slot number (8-12)
• p = Port number (0 or 1) If the P is not entered, both
ports are tested.
This command can test Standby CNIs as well as active CNIs
that are out of service.
This may take a few minutes because of the time required to
reestablish memory shadowing and contents. When the
command is successful, OK is printed. If it is not successful, an
error message is printed.

TEST CPU Test the inactive (standby) Core. This command performs NO basic-18
tests upon the active (primary) Core.
The CMB (on the CP card), CP to CP cable, and memory are
sure that Split mode can be entered safely. Then the CP is
tested. The system enters split mode, runs the test, and returns
to redundancy (memory shadowing).

This may take a few minutes because of the time required to

reestablish memory shadowing and contents. It is possible,
during the test, that service may be interrupted if an error
occurs on the single active Core.
Output from this test is "OK," or a CCED message. Refer to the
specific message for more information.

Testing the secondary (inactive) Core is done by performing a

"reset" on the secondary Core. If a terminal is connected to the
secondary Core's CPIO, cold start diagnostics are displayed on
the terminal. This is not an error, and is operating according to
design.

TEST IPB Test the backplane protocol on the secondary (inactive) basic-18
Interprocessor Bus. This command does NOT test the primary
(active) IPB.
The system enters split mode, runs the test, and returns to
redundancy (memory shadowing). When the command is
successful, OK is printed. If it is not successful, an error
message is printed.

X11 Maintenance
LD 135
Page 454 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

This may take a few minutes because of the time required to

reestablish memory shadowing and contents. It is possible,
during the test, that service may be interrupted if an error
occurs on the single active Core.

TEST LCD Test the LCD display on the active CP card. The following test basic-18
pattern is displayed on the active CP card's display:
• 8888888888888888
• 8888888888888888
• ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
• QRSTUVWXYZ123456
• abcdefghijklmnop
• qrstuvwxyz012345
The first two tests go by very quickly, so you may actually see
only the third one.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

466

LD 137 LD 137
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 455 of 472

LD 137: Core Input/Output Diagnostic

LD 137 provides IOP and CMDU related diagnostic and maintenance
information for Option 11C, 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C machines with X11
Release 18 and later. Some commands in LD 37 can also be used. Refer to
that program.

LD 137 provides a means of performing the following functions.

— enabling and disabling the CMDU and IOP cards

— displaying status and card ID for CMDU and IOP cards
— testing the IOP and CMDU (the hard and floppy disk drives are tested)
— testing individual disk drives
— enabling and disabling disk redundancy
— testing SCSI cable connections between IOPs and CMDUs
— testing disk synchronization on file or sector levels
— during midnight routines performs DATA CMDU, DATA RDUN
commands

— displaying the Security Device Identification of the Security Dongle

The DATA CMDU AND DATA RDUN midnight routines are run every 5
days.

X11 Maintenance
LD 137
Page 456 of 472 Core Input/Output Diagnostic

When a status appears disabled, one or more Out of Service (OOS) messages
may appear. Listed below are the possible OOS messages:

• IOP out-of-service
• Unexpected interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Fault interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Processor exception fault monitor threshold exceeded
• ASIC interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Unrecognized error fault monitor threshold exceeded
• General event interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• IOP not responding
• IOP disabled by craftsperson
• IOP responding but cannot be enabled
• CMDU out-of-service
• Hard disk read error
• Hard disk write error
• Hard disk drive error
• CMDU does not respond, the disk drive may be missing
• CMDU has been disabled by the craftsperson
• CMDU is disabled because the IOP is out-of-service
• Hard disk is inaccessible
• CMDUs are not synchronized
• CMDU status is mismatched because of a software error
• CMDU is in split mode
• CMDU is out of split mode
• No access to hard disk (HDK)

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 137
Basic Commands Page 457 of 472

Basic Commands
DATA CMDU n Perform read tests on the specified CMDU.

DATA CMDU n HDK, FDK

Perform read test on either the Hard Disk or Floppy Disk
DATA RDUN Perform sector level checking on both hard disk
DIS CMDU n Disable CMDU.
DIS ELNK Disable the ethernet link on the active IOP pack
DIS IOP Disable the active IOP and Ethernet

ENL CMDU n Enable the CMDU.

ENL ELNK Enable the ethernet link on the active IOP pack
ENL IOP Enable IOP on the active Core and Ethernet
ENL HOST n Add a host to run time host table

IDC Print the IDs of both CMDUs and the active IOP
IDC CMDU n Print the ID for the CMDU
IDC IOP Print out the ID of the active IOP

SDID Display Security Device Identification of Security Dongle(s)

STAT Get status of IOPs, CMDUs and Ethernet.

STAT CMDU n Get status of the CMDU.
STAT ELNK Display status of the ethernet link on the active IOP pack whether enabled or
disabled
STAT HOST Display current run time host table status
STAT IOP Display status of the active IOP and Ethernet

SWAP Swap the CMDUs

SYNC Synchronize the hard disks on both CMDUs

TEST CMDU n Perform test for the CMDU.

TEST CMDU n HDK, FDK
Perform test on the Hard or Floppy Disk
TEST ELNK INT Test internal loop-back on Ethernet link
TEST ELNK EXT Test external loop-back on Ethernet link
TEST ELNK TDR Test the Time Domain Reflectometry
TEST IOP Perform the self test on the active IOP
TEST RDUN Perform file level checking on both hard disks
TEST SCSI Test the SCSI cables

TTY x Test TTY x

X11 Maintenance
LD 137
Page 458 of 472 Option 11C Commands

Option 11C Commands

Command Description
DIS ELNK Disable ethernet link
ENL ELNK Enable ethernet link
STAT Get status of PPP and ethernet link
STAT ELNK Display status of ethernet link

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 137
Alphabetical list of commands Page 459 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

DATA CMDU n Perform read tests on the specified CMDU. basic-18

This data validity check is performed on both hard and floppy
disks. While the test is in progress, the CMDU is inaccessible.
Progress messages are output. n = core number (0 or 1) If n is
not entered, this command checks both CMDUs.
This is more extensive than the TEST command, and may take
longer.

DATA CMDU n HDK, FDK

Perform read test on either the Hard Disk or Floppy Disk. This is basic-18
a data validity check. While the test is in progress, the Disk is
inaccessible.
Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core
number. This is more extensive than the TEST command, and
may take longer.

DATA RDUN Perform sector level checking on both hard disks. basic-18
This test ensures that disk synchronization (disk redundancy)
exists. It can only be performed when disk redundancy is
enabled. All data is checked, on both disks, sector by sector. If
the test fails, a CIOD message appears, and disk redundancy is
disabled.
This is more extensive than the TEST command, and may take
longer. While this test is in progress, the disks are inaccessible.

DIS CMDU n Disable CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must basic-18
enter the Core number.
If disk redundancy is currently enabled (both CMDUs are
enabled and enabled), disabling the CMDU also disables disk
redundancy.
The confirmation is displayed:
"CURRENTLY CMDU N IS ACTIVE. DISK RDUN WILL BE
DISABLED. ENTER Y(ES) TO CONFIRM, N(O) TO
ABORT."
If the specified CMDU is in standby, its state is changed to
disabled. If it is the active CMDU, it is disabled, and the standby
CMDU becomes active.

X11 Maintenance
LD 137
Page 460 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

DIS ELNK Disable the ethernet link on the active IOP pack. basic-22
An attempt is made to disable the Ethernet link. When the link is
disabled, all activities will be terminated. The system displays
OK to indicate that the link is disabled or FAIL to indicate that
the link could not be disabled.

DIS IOP Disable the active IOP and Ethernet. The LED is lit on the IOP basic-18
faceplate and both CMDUs are inaccessible.

ENL CMDU n Enable the CMDU. basic-18

Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core
number.
When the first CMDU is enabled, that CMDU's state is ACTIVE.
If a second ENL CMDU is attempted, a file level synchronization
on both hard disks is performed first. If the synchronization (disk
redundancy) does not exist, a CIOD error message is printed,
and the second CMDU remains disabled.
If the synchronization exists, the confirmation is displayed:
"DISK RDUN WILL BE ENABLED, ENTER Y(ES) to
CONFIRM, N(O) TO ABORT."
When disk redundancy is successful, both CMDU states are
Enabled. The CMDU enabled first is active, and the second is
standby.

ENL ELNK Enable the ethernet link on the active IOP pack. basic-22
If the Ethernet link is down, entering this command will cause an
attempt to restore the Ethernet link to normal operation state.
However, if the system cannot successfully restore the link, the
Ethernet link will remain disabled.
If the link was already up, this command does not affect the
current operation of it. The system displays OK to indicate that
the link is now enabled or FAIL to indicate that the link could not
be enabled.

ENL HOST n Add a host to run time host table. basic-22

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 137
Alphabetical list of commands Page 461 of 472

ENL IOP Enable IOP and Ethernet on the active Core. basic-18
The LED is turned off on the IOP faceplate. The CMDUs are
restored to the state they were in prior to the IOP being
changed. However, if the cable between the IOPs is not
connected, the CMDUs remain inaccessible until the cable is
reattached.
If both CMDUs were enabled, a file level synchronization check
is performed prior to restoring states. If the synchronization
(disk redundancy) does not exist, only the previously active
CMDU is enabled.

IDC Print the IDs of both CMDUs and the active IOP. The printout basic-18
appears in the following format:
pppppppppp rrssss cccccccc
Where:
• pppppppppp = PEC code
• rr = Release number
• ssss = Serial number
• cccccccc = Comments (not always be present)

IDC CMDU n Print the ID for the CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). If basic-18
n is not entered, card ID information is printed for both CMDUs.

IDC IOP Print out the ID of the active IOP. basic-18

SDID Display Security Device Identification of Security Dongle(s) basic-23

STAT Get status of IOPs, CMDUs and Ethernet. basic-18

For the IOP, the Enabled or Disabled, and Active or Standby
state is printed. Status is given for active and standby IOPs. For
the CMDU, Disk redundancy, enabled/disabled, and
active/standby status are printed. If Ethernet is disabled, the
status (enabled or disabled) is displayed along with an OOS
message.
The status given for the standby IOP is a software status as it
was last seen when that IOP was active. No hardware status is
given because the standby IOP cannot be accessed.
For Option 11C: The STAT command is used to get status of
PPP and ELNK.

X11 Maintenance
LD 137
Page 462 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

If the status of the IOP or CMDU is disabled, one of the

following OOS messages may appear:
• IOP out-of-service
• Unexpected interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Fault interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Processor exception fault monitor threshold exceeded
• ASIC interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Unrecognized error fault monitor threshold exceeded
• General event interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• IOP not responding
• IOP disabled by craftsperson
• IOP responding but cannot be enabled
• CMDU out-of-service
• Hard disk read error
• Hard disk write error
• Hard disk drive error
• CMDU does not respond, the disk drive may be missing
• CMDU has been disabled by the craftsperson
• CMDU is disabled because the IOP is out-of-service
• Hard disk is inaccessible: CMDUs are not synchronized
• CMDU status is mismatched because of a software error
• CMDU is in split mode
• CMDU is out of split mode
• No access to hard disk (HDK)

STAT CMDU n Get status of the CMDU. Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). basic-18
If n is not entered, the status for both CMDUs is printed.

If the CMDU is disabled, one of the following CMDU OOS

reason may appear:
• Hard disk read error
• Hard disk write error
• Hard disk drive error

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 137
Alphabetical list of commands Page 463 of 472

• CMDU does not respond, the disk drive may be missing

• CMDU has been disabled by the craftsperson
• CMDU is disabled because the IOP is out-of-service
• Hard disk is inaccessible
• CMDUs are not synchronized
• CMDU status is mismatched because of a software error
• CMDU is in split mode
• CMDU is out of split mode
• No access to hard disk (HDK)

STAT ELNK Display status of the ethernet link on the active IOP pack basic-22
whether enabled or disabled. The Ethernet address of this
active Input Output Processor (IOP) is also displayed.
Since the Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet (LANCE)
is equipped on the IOP, LANCE will be disabled when the IOP is
disabled.
If the ethernet link is disabled, an OOS reason will be displayed
containing the following information:
ELNK ENABLED
Ethernet (In unit number 0):
Host: aaaxxx
Internet address: xx.xxx.xx.xxx
Netmask: xxxxxxxxxx ; Subnetmask: xxxxxxxxxx
xxx packets received ; xxx packets sent
x input errors ; x output errors
x collisions

STAT HOST Display current run time host table status. basic-22

STAT IOP Display status of the active IOP and Ethernet. basic-18
This command prints out the status whether the IOP is enabled
or disabled. If it is disabled, the OOS reasons are printed. The
following IOP OOS messages may appear:
• IOP out-of-service
• Unexpected interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Fault interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• Processor exception fault monitor threshold exceeded

X11 Maintenance
LD 137
Page 464 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

• ASIC interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded

• Unrecognized error fault monitor threshold exceeded
• General event interrupt fault monitor threshold exceeded
• IOP not responding
• IOP disabled by craftsperson
• IOP responding but cannot be enabled

SWAP Swap the CMDUs. basic-18

After this command is issued, the active CMDU becomes
standby, and the standby CMDU becomes active. This
command is performed only when disk redundancy is enabled.

SYNC Synchronize the hard disks on both CMDUs. basic-18

This is a sector level synchronization. It is performed by copying
the data from the active CMDU to the disabled CMDU, sector by
sector. This can only be done when one CMDU is active and
one is disabled.
The confirmation prompt appears when the system is ready to
do the copying:
“CMDU n ACTIVE HDK WILL BE COPIED AND DISK RDUN
WILL BE ENABLED. ENTER Y TO CONFIRM.”
Synchronization may take as long as 40 minutes. Progress
reports appear on the TTY periodically.

TEST CMDU n Perform test for the CMDU. basic-18

This test includes a self-test, read/write capability test, and disk
access test on both hard and floppy disks for this CMDU. While
the test is in progress, the CMDU is inaccessible.
Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core
number.
A disk must be in the floppy drive when this test is run. If the
floppy disk is not present, the floppy disk test will fail. The hard
disk test will not be affected.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 137
Alphabetical list of commands Page 465 of 472

TEST CMDU n HDK, FDK basic-18

Perform test on the Hard or Floppy Disk.
This test includes a self-test, read/write capability test, and disk
access test on either the hard or floppy disk drive for this
CMDU. While the test is in progress, the CMDU is inaccessible.
Where: n = Core number (0 or 1). You must enter the Core
number.
A disk must be in the floppy drive to test it. If a floppy disk is not
present, the floppy disk test will fail. The hard disk test will not
be affected.

TEST ELNK EXT basic-22

Test the external-loop back on Ethernet link.
The result displayed can be either: PASS or FAIL. A pass
indicates that the system can transmit its own transmitted
packet and a fail means the opposite.

TEST ELNK INT basic-22

Test the internal-loop back on Ethernet link.
The result displayed can be either: PASS or FAIL. A pass
indicates that the system can receive its own transmitted packet
and a fail means the opposite.

TEST ELNK TDR basic-22

Test the Time Domain Reflectory
The displayed result is used to determine the location of
suspected cable faults. A confirm message is displayed to ask
the user to enter YES or NO. The entry YES tells the system to
stop the Ethernet communication and perform a DTR. The entry
NO tells the system to ignore the command.
The Ethernet link remains disabled after this test. The user must
enable it by command ENL ELNK.

TEST IOP Perform the self test on the active IOP and internal loop-back basic-18
test on Ethernet. The IOP must be disabled to perform this test.

TEST RDUN Perform file level checking on both hard disks. basic-18
This test ensures that disk synchronization exists. It can only be
performed when disk redundancy is enabled. If the test fails, a
CIOD message appears, and disk redundancy is disabled.
While this test is in progress, the disk is inaccessible.

X11 Maintenance
LD 137
Page 466 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

TEST SCSI Test the SCSI cables. basic-18

This test ensures the cable connections between the IOPs
are present. Access to the CMDUs is tested as well.
If the test is successful, OK is printed. If the test is unsuccessful,
CIOD messages are printed to indicate the problem.

TTY x Test TTY x. Response is: basic-18

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789"#$%*!&()<>—.:,.? READY FOR INPUT
Anything entered on the keyboard will be echoed until END is
input.

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

472

LD 143 LD 143
Issued: June 1999
Status: Standard
X11 Release: 24

Page 467 of 472

LD 143: Customer Configuration Backup and

Restore
X11 Release 23 introduces the Keycode Management feature for customers
with the Input/Output Disk Unit with CD-Rom (IODU/C). Previously, a
Keycode was stored on two devices: a Security Cartridge and a Direct.rec file.

With X11 Release 23, however, a Keycode is a “soft” entity that resides on a
customer’s hard disk. A Keycode can be delivered, replaced, upgraded, and
downgraded.

All Keycode Management commands are executed in Overlay 143.

X11 Maintenance
LD 143
Page 468 of 472 Basic commands

Basic commands

ABKO Attended Backup

ARES Attended Restore

HELP View overlay commands on terminal

KDIF k1 k2 Print the differences between two specified keycodes

KMAN Manually introduce the keycode the same way as form the Installation
Tools

KNEW d r Check and accept new keycode file

KOUT Delete “keycode.new” file

KRVR d r Revert the current keycode.rec and keycode.old files

KSHO k Show content of the currently used keycode file and the differences
with the rest of keycode files

KSTT Print the status of a new (trial) keycode (if any).

KUPL Upload keycode command.

UPGRADE Perform Option 11C upgrade

XBK Remote backup database

XRT Remote restore database

XSL Remote sysload the system

XVR Remote verify database

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 143
Alphabetical list of commands Page 469 of 472

Alphabetical list of commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

ABKO Attended Backup. basic-23

EDD and BKO commands are enhanced to indicate lack of space or
other obstacles to perform required backup. In case of failure, an
Attended Backup is suggested.

ARES Attended Restore. basic-23

Attended Database Restore is an interactive process very similar to
the existing Install procedure. Installer is prompted to install Database
floppies in appropriate order. Note that the identical procedure is used
during upgrade of large customer IODU/C machine assuming that
Amber will generate multiple 2MB floppies with customer’s Database.

HELP View overlay commands on terminal basic-23

KDIF k1 k2 Print the differences between two specified keycodes. basic-23

Where k1 and k2 may have one of the following values:
• PEND: pending keycode which is searched for in “/f0”, if not
found, in “/f1” and finally in “/u”
• CURR: current keycode which can be either keycode.rec or
keycode.new, both residing in “p/install” on user’s hard disk
• REC: keycode.rec file residing in “/p/install” on user’s hard
disk
• OLD: keycode.file residing in “/p/install” on user’s hard disk
• NEW: keycode.new file residing in “/p/install” on users hard
disk

KMAN Manually introduce the keycode the same way as form the Installation
Tools. The user must input 20 lines, each line containing 16
characters to create a keycode. The “end” string notifies the end of
keycode creation. On the 21st line it marks keycode completion; on
any other line, it the keycode creation is abandoned.

X11 Maintenance
LD 143
Page 470 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

KNEW d r Check and accept new keycode file. The new keycode will be basic-23
activated by the first restart and will become permanent keycode on
the d-th midnight unless r restarts occur before.
With Release 24 and later, the KNEW command allows changes to
ISM parameters and feature packaging to be instantly activated
without Sysload. The following message is output:
CCBR020 New Keycode accepted and activated successfully.
Sysload is NOT needed!

KOUT Delete “keycode.new” file. basic-23

KRVR d r The old keycode is reverted to current keycode. Where, the old basic-23
keycode will be activated by the first restart and will become
permanent keycode on the D-th midnight unless r restarts occur
before.
Note: Using the KRVR command without parameters implies that the old
keycode will be activated and become the permanent keycode after the first
restart.
With Release 24 and later, the KRVR command will instantly activate
the Old keycode if the only difference between the Old Keycode
(Keycode.old) and the new Keycode (Keycode.rec) is that some or all
of the ISM parameters in the Old Keycode are higher.
After the KRVR command has been entered, the following new
message is printed if the system has instantly activated the Old
Keycode:
CCBR020 New Keycode accepted and activated successfully.
Sysload is NOT needed!

KSHO k Print the content of the currently used keycode file and the differences basic-23
with the rest of keycode files.
Where k may have one of the following values:
• PEND: pending keycode which is searched for in “/fo”, if not
found, in “/f1” and finally in “/u”
• CURR: current keycode which can be either keycode.rec or
keycode.new, both residing in “/p/install” on user’s hard disk
• REC: keycode.rec file residing in “/p/install” on user’s hard
disk
• OLD: keycode.old file residing in “/p/install” on user’s hard
disk
• NEW: keycode.new file residing in “/p/install” on user’s hard
disk

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

 LD 143
Alphabetical list of commands Page 471 of 472

KSTT Print the status of a new (trial) keycode (if any).

KUPL Upload keycode command.

In the Meridian 1 system window, paste the new keycode after the
Upload keycode prompt. Pressing enter will upload the keycode and
initiate validation.

UPGRADE Perform Option 11C upgrade. This command invokes the Install opt11c-22
Setup Program.
To perform an installation, the installer inserts a Software Delivery
Card in the PCMCIA slot on the System Core Card. Then, on TTY 0,
the installer may invoke the Setup Program by using the UPGRADE
command in LD 143. If the installation was invoked in LD 143, the
system reboots and automatically runs the Loader Program.
With Release 24 and later, the UPGRADE command allows changes
to ISM parameters and feature packaging to be instantly activated
without Sysload upon keycode acceptance. The following message is
output:
Upgrade was completed and activated successfully.
Sysload is NOT needed!

XBK Remote backup database opt11c-22

Backup the configuration files from the primary flash drive of the
Option 11C system onto a computer.

XRT Remote restore database opt11c-22

Restore the files from a computer into the primary flash drive of the
Option 11C system.

XSL Remote sysload the system opt11c-22

Sysload the Option 11C system from the primary flash drive.

XVR Remote verify database opt11c-22

Verify the files on a computer with the files in the primary flash drive of
the Option 11C system.

X11 Maintenance
LD 143
Page 472 of 472 Alphabetical list of commands

553-3001-511 Standard 6.0 June 1999

Family Product Manual Contacts Copyright FCC notice Trademarks
Document number Product release Document release Date Publish

Meridian 1
Software Input/Output Guide
X11 Maintenance

P0891467

© 1995,1999
All rights reserved
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel
Networks reserves the right to make changes in
design or components as progress in engineering and
manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules,
and the radio interference regulations of Industry
Canada. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at their
own expense.
SL-1 and Meridian 1 are trademarks of Nortel
Networks.
Publication number: 553-3001-511
Document release: Standard 6.0
Date: June 1999
Printed in Canada